Skip to main content

Full text of "The arrangement of atoms in space"

See other formats


f— n_ ru. 


REESE  LIBRARY 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA. 

Deceived 

No.   7&  0  V(o    .   Class  No. 


AKBANGEMENT 

OF 

ATOMS    IN    SPACE 


THE     AEEANGBMBNT 


OF 


ATOMS    IN     SPACE 

BY 

J.   H.   VAN  'T  HOFF 

SECOND    REVISED   AND   ENLARGED   EDITION 


WITH    A    PKEFACE    BY    JOHANNES    WISLICENUS 

Professor  of  Chemistry  at  the  University  of  Leipzig 
AND    AN    APPENDIX 

STEREOCHEMISTRY   AMONG   INORGANIC   SUBSTANCES 

BY 

ALFEED    WEENEB 

Professor  of  Chemistry  at  the  University  of  ZUrich 
TRANSLATED      AND      EDITED      BY 

ABNOLD    EILOAET 


LONGMANS,     GEEEN,    AND    CO, 

89    PATERNOSTER    ROW,    LONDON 

NEW    YORK    AND    BOMBAY 

1898 

All    rights    reserved 


PBEFACE 

TO 

THE    FIKST    EDITION 


THE  first  edition  of  this  little  book  appeared  in 
1877,  in  the  form  of  Dr.  F.  Herrmann's  free  render- 
ing of  my  brochure,  '  La  Chimie  dans  1'Espace,'  and 
Wislicenus,  as  long  ago  as  that,  helped  the  work 
by  a  warm  recommendation. 

As  the  original  views  still  survive  in  Stereo- 
chemistry, this  second  edition  presents  once  more 
a  freely  revised  version  of  that  brochure ;  but  a 
section  on  nitrogen  derivatives  has  been  added. 
Besides  this,  in  the  part  devoted  to  carbon,  the 
greatly  increased  number  of  facts  has  been  taken 
into  account,  and  finally  the  amount  of  the  rota- 
tion of  active  bodies  has  received  special  attention. 
Accordingly  the  book  may  serve  as  a  reference 
book  for  stereochemistry  and  optical  activity. 

At  the  publishers'  wish,  I  have  studied  brevity 
as  far  as  compatible  with  thorough  treatment. 

J.   H.   VAN   'T   HOFF. 

AMSTERDAM  :  February  1894. 


PREFACE 

TO 

THE    SECOND    EDITION 


FOR  this  second  edition  of  the  '  Arrangement  of 
Atoms  in  Space,'  as  for  the  first,  the  publishers  and 
the  author  desire  a  short  preface  from  my  pen. 
This  can  have  now  no  such  purpose  as  in  the  case  of 
Dr.  Herrmann's  edition.  Then  I  had  to  address  to 
German  chemists  a  letter  of  recommendation  in 
favour  of  the  little-known  hypothesis  of  a  very 
young  colleague ;  now  the  name  of  the  author  has 
a  renown  so  high,  based  on  such  an  extraordinary 
series  of  important  and  far-reaching  researches,  that 
my  recommendation  would  be  altogether  superfluous 
for  his  book,  even  if  the  theory  here  set  forth  had  not 
acquired  for  itself  the  position  in  chemistry  which  in 
fact  it  possesses. 

Indeed,  the  old  opposition  to  the  principle  has 
almost  died  out  ;  where  it  still  lives  it  is  directed 


PREFACE  TO  THE   SECOND  EDITION  vii 

against  the  ultimate  basis— against  the  Atomic 
Hypothesis  itself — and  does  not  deny  that  the  doc- 
trine of  atomic  arrangement  in  three  dimensions  is 
a  logical  and  necessary  stage,  perhaps  the  final 
stage,  in  the  chemical  theory  of  atoms.  For  the 
most  part  the  opposition  is  directed — often  quite 
rightly — against  special  applications  of  the  principle 
to  the  explanation  of  particular  facts,  leaving  the 
principle  itself  untouched.  That  the  hypothesis 
itself  has  proved  its  own  justification — at  least,  as 
much  as  any  other  scientific  theory — none  can 
dispute. 

It  has  already  effected  to  the  full  all  that  can  be 
effected  by  any  theory ;  for  it  has  brought  into 
organic  connection  with  the  fundamental  theories 
of  chemistry  facts  which  were  before  incomprehen- 
sible and  apparently  isolated,  and  has  enabled  us  to 
explain  them  from  these  theories  in  the  simplest 
way.  By  propounding  to  us  new  problems  the  hy- 
pothesis has  stimulated  empirical  investigation  on 
all  sides  ;  it  has  caused  a  vast  accumulation  of  facts, 
has  led  to  the  discovery  of  new  methods  of  observa- 
tion, has  become  amenable  to  the  test  of  experiment, 
and  has  at  the  same  time  started  in  our  science 
a  movement  full  of  significance — in  a  certain  sense, 
indeed,  a  new  epoch. 

How  and  to  what  extent  the  hypothesis  has 
effected  this,  is  told  in  this  book,  briefly,  clearly,  com- 


Vlll  PREFACE   TO   THE   SECOND  EDITION 

pletely.  Tne  book  is  now  not  so  much  a  new  edition 
of  the  first  German  work,  as  a  German  revision  of 
van  't  Hoff's  '  Dix  Annees  dans  1'Histoire  d'une 
Theorie,'  enriched  by  the  growth  of  our  knowledge 
during  the  last  seven  years.  In  this  new  form, 
also,  the  book  will  win  many  friends,  and  be  a  wel- 
come guide  to  the  comprehension  of  stereochemistry 
and  to  its  already  very  extensive  literature. 

I  may  well  be  pardoned  if  I  find  an  especial 
satisfaction  in  this  new  edition  of  van  't  Hoff's  pioneer 
publication.  When  it  first  appeared  as  '  La  Chimie 
dans  1'Espace '  it  bore  as  motto  a  sentence  uttered 
by  me  as  early  as  1869. l  I  was  then  able  to  do 
something  towards  making  known  the  new  theory, 
and  later  to  contribute  to  its  development  and  to 
the  experimental  testing  of  it.  Accordingly  it  is 
with  great  pleasure  that  I  accept  the  honour  of  in- 
troducing the  new  revision,  and  send  my  thanks  and 
regards  to  my  honoured  friend  at  Amsterdam. 

JOHANNES   WISLICENUS. 

LEIPZIG  :  April  1894. 

1  Bcr.  2,  550,  and  especially  p.  620. 


CONTENTS 


PAGE 

INTRODUCTION     .  i 

STEREOCHEMISTRY  OF  CARBON 
CHAPTER  I 

THE    ASYMMETRIC    CARBON  ATOM 

I.  Statement  of  the  fundamental  conception    ....         5 
I.  Experimental  confirmation  of  the  fundamental  conception  .        9 

A.  Character  of  the  isomerism  due  to  the  asymmetric  carbon        9 

B.  Observed   coincidence   of   optical  isomerism  with  the 

presence  of  asymmetric  carbon 13 

CHAPTER   II 

DIVISION  OF   THE    INACTIVE    MIXTURE.     TEMPERATURE 

OF   CONVERSION 

Inactivity  of  compounds  containing  asymmetric  carbon     .         .  27 

1.  Division  by  means  of  active  compounds     .         .         .     .  28 

2.  Division  by  means  of  organisms 30 

3.  Spontaneous  division.     Temperature  of  conversion   .     .  34 

4.  Proof  of  divisibility  by  synthesis  of  the  inactive  mixture  40 
Indivisibility  in  absence  of  asymmetric  carbon   .         .         .  40 
Transformation  of  active  bodies   into   each   other.     The 

point  of  equilibrium         .         .         .         .         .         .     .       47 

Inactive  indivisible  type 50 


X  CONTENTS 

CHAPTER   III 

COMPOUNDS    WITH    SEVERAL    ASYMMETRIC 
CARBON    ATOMS 

PAGE 

I.  Application  of  the  fundamental  conception      .         .  54 

II.  Experimental  confirmation 57 

A.  Number  and  character  of  the  isomers  to  be  expected  57 

B.  Formation  of  isomers  containing  several  asymmetric 

carbon  atoms 65 

C.  Transformation  of  isomers  with   several   asymmetric 

carbon  atoms 70 

D.  Simplification    through     symmetry    of    the    formula. 

Inactive  indivisible  type 74 

CHAPTER   IV 

DETERMINATION   OF   THE   POSITION   OF    THE    RADICALS 

IN    STEREOMERS 81 

CHAPTER  V 

THE    UNSATURATED   CARBON    COMPOUNDS 

I.  Statement  of  the  fundamental  conception  ....      93 

II.  Confirmation  of  the  fundamental  conception          .        .     .      99 

III.  Determination  of  the  position  of  the  radicals  in  unsaturated 
compounds 105 

CHAPTER  VI 

RING   FORMATION 114 

CHAPTER  VII 

NUMERICAL   VALUE    OF   THE   ROTATORY   POWER 

I.  Conditions  in  which  the  results  are  comparable.  Examina- 
tion in  dilute  solution,  having  regard  to  the  molecular 
weight,  indispensable  ,  134 


CONTENTS  XI 

PAGE 

II.  Rotatory  power  of  electrolytes.  Law  of  Oudemans-Landolt  136 

III.  Rotation  of  imperfect  electrolytes.     Organic  acids          .     .  141 

IV.  Influence  of  ring  formation  on  rotation       ....  146 
V.  Rotation  of  non-electrolytes.     Hypotheses   of   Guye   and 

Crum  Brown .     .  153 

VI.  More  complicated  cases 160 

STEBEOCHEMISTRY  OF  NITROGEN 
COMPOUNDS 

I.  Trivalent  nitrogen 169 

-     A.  Trivalent  nitrogen  without  double  linkage     .        .        .  169 

B.  Trivalent  nitrogen  doubly  linked  with  carbon  .        .     .  171 

C.  Trivalent  nitrogen  in  closed  rings          ....  176 

D.  Configuration  in  the  case  of  doubly  linked  nitrogen  .     .  178 

II.  Compounds  containing  pentavalent  nitrogen        .        .        .  180 

APPENDIX 

Stereochemical  isomerism  of  inorganic  compounds        .        .     .  185 

INDEX                                                                                             .  201 


INTKODUCTION 


EVERY  time  I  write  on  stereochemistry  a  new  name 
has  to  be  added  to  complete  the  history  of  its 
development.  In  my  '  Dix  Annees  dans  1'Histoire 
d'une  Theorie  '  I  mentioned  Gaudin  and  his  '  Archi- 
tecture du  Monde '  (1873)  ;  then  Meyerhoffer  in  his 
1  Stereochemie '  added  Paterno,1  who  in  1869  pro- 
posed to  explain  isomeric  bromethylenes  by  a  tetra- 
hedral  grouping  round  carbon ;  and  Rosenstiehl,2 
who  in  the  same  year  represented  benzene  by  six 
tetrahedra  ;  and  now  Eiloart,  in  his  '  Guide  to 
Stereochemistry,'  goes  back  to  Swedenborg's  'Pro- 
dromus  Principiorum  Rerum  Naturalium  sive 
Novorum  Tentaminum  Chymicam  et  Physicam 
Experimentalem  geometrice  explicandi.' 3  Certainly, 
then,  we  were  not  over-hasty,  Le  Bel  and  I,  when  we 
published  our  ideas  (November  and  September  1874) 
in  the  '  Bulletin  de  la  Societe  Chimique '  and  in  the 
'  Voorstel  tot  Uitbreiding  der  Structuur-Formules  in 
de  Euimte  '  respectively.  That  shortly  before  this 

1  Giorn.  di  Scienze  Naturali  cd  Econ.  vol.  v.,  Palermo  ;   Gazz 
Chim.  1893,  35. 

2  Bull.  Soc.  Chim.  11,  393.      3  Jan  Ostenvyk,  Amsterdam,  172]. 

B 


tfl  STEREOCHEMISTRY   OF   CARBON 

we  had  been  working  together  in  Wurtz's  laboratory 
was  purely  fortuitous  ;  we  never  exchanged  a  word 
about  the  tetrahedron  there,  though  perhaps  both  of 
us  already  cherished  the  idea  in  secret.  To  me  it 
had  occurred  the  year  before,  in  Utrecht,  after  read- 
ing Wislicenus'  paper  on  lactic  acid.  '  The  facts 
compel  us  to  explain  the  difference  between  isomeric 
molecules  possessing  the  same  structural  formulae  by 
the  different  arrangement  of  their  atoms  in  space  ' : 
this  was  the  sentence  which  remained  in  my  memory, 
and  which  I  have  since  used  as  a  motto ;  on  trying 
to  refer  to  it  I  could  not  find  it  again,  and  so  cannot 
give  the  reference  here. 

On  the  whole,  Lie  Bel's  paper  and  mine  are  in 
accord  ;  still,  the  conceptions  are  not  quite  the  same. 
Historically  the  difference  lies  in  this,  that  Le  Bel's 
starting  point  was  the  researches  of  Pasteur,  mine 
those  of  Kekule. 

The  researches  of  Pasteur  had  made  plain  the 
connection  between  optical  activity  and  crystal-form, 
and  had  led  to  the  idea  that  the  isomers  of  opposite 
rotatory  power  correspond  to  an  asymmetric  group- 
ing and  to  its  mirrored  image.  Indeed,  the  possi- 
bility of  a  tetrahedral  grouping  was  suggested.1  Le 
Bel  closely  follows  Pasteur,  then,  when  he  sees  this 
grouping  in  the  four  atoms  or  radicals — inactive 
bodies  all  different — united  to  carbon. 

My  conception  is,  as  Baeyer  pointed  out  at  the 
Kekule  festival,  a  continuation  of  Kekule's  law  of  the 
quadrivalence  of  carbon,  with  the  added  hypothesis 
1  Lemons  sur  la  Dissymdtric  MoUculaire. 


INTRODUCTION  3 

that  the  four  valences  are  directed  towards  the 
corners  of  a  tetrahedron,  at  the  centre  of  which  is 
the  carbon  atom. 

Practically  our  ideas,  so  far  as  they  concern  the 
asymmetric  carbon,  amount  to  the  same  thing — ex- 
planation of  the  two  isomers  by  means  of  the  tetra- 
hedron and  its  image,  disappearance  of  this 
isomerism  when  two  groups  become  identical, 
through  the  resulting  symmetry  and  identity  of  the 
two  tetrahedra. 

In  the  case  of  doubly  linked  carbon,  however, 
"there  arises  the  possibilty  of  a  difference.  Here,  too, 
four  groups  are  connected,  and  Le  Bel  considers  that 
a  priori  only  so  much  is  known  about  their  position, 
that  of  the  two  pairs  one  pair  lies  nearer  to  one 
carbon,  the  other  pair  to  the  other  carbon.  It  may 
happen,  then,  that  ethylene  derivatives  may  have  no 
symmetry  in  their  molecules — they  may  be  active. 
Carrying  out  my  tetrahedral  grouping  I  concluded 
that  the  four  groups  are  in  one  plane  with  the  car- 
bon, this  being  accordingly  the  plane  of  symmetry  of 
all  ethylene  derivatives  ;  therefore  no  optical  activity 
can  occur.  As  regards  this,  Le  Bel [  at  first  altered 
his  opinion  in  my  favour,  but  later 2  altered  it  back 
again. 

Of  course,  the  facts  must  decide  ;  as,  however, 
Liebermann  informs  me,  specially  for  this  edition, 
that  bromocinnamic  acid  from  active  cinnamic  acid 
dibromide  is  inactive,  and  Walden  states  that  fumaric 
acid  from  active  bromosuccinic  acid  is  inactive,  it 

1  Bull.  Soc.  Chim.  37,  300.  "  Ibid.  [3],  7,  164,  1892. 

B  2 


4  STEEEOCHEMISTRY   OF   CARBON 

appears  that,  in  accordance  with  facts  previously 
known,  the  simple  conception  of  the  tetrahedral 
grouping  and  of  the  development  of  structural 
chemistry  to  stereochemistry  on  these  lines  is  still 
permissible. 


STEREOCHEMISTRY   OF   CARBON 

CHAPTEK   I 
THE  ASYMMETRIC   CARBON  ATOM 

I.  STATEMENT  OF  THE  FUNDAMENTAL 
CONCEPTION 

The  molecule  a  stable  system  of  material  points.— 

When  we  arrive  at  a  system  of  atomic  mechanics 
the  molecule  will  appear  as  a  stable  system  of 
material  points  ;  that  is  the  fundamental  idea  which 
continually  becomes  clearer  and  clearer  when  one  is 
-treating  of  stereochemistry ;  for  what  we  are  dealing 
with  here  is  nothing  else  than  the  spatial — i.e.  the 
real — positions  of  these  points,  the  atoms. 

I  choose  this  fundamental  conception  as  the 
starting  point  for  this  reason,  that  there  is  already 
evident  in  the  rough  outlines  of  this  future  system 
of  atom  mechanics  a  very  considerable  simplification, 
which  I  will  here  discuss. 

One  might  suppose  that  the  arrangement  of  the\ 
atoms  in  the  molecule  would  be  something  like  that 
in  a  system  of  planets,  equilibrium  being  maintained 
by    attraction    and    motion,   by   equality    between 
centripetal  and  centrifugal  force.      I  will  try  to  show 


6  STEREOCHEMISTRY  OF   CARBON 

that  we  must  exclude  this  motion ;  and  this  as  a 
necessary  consequence  of  simple  thermodynamic 
considerations. 

As  the  partial  decomposition  of  salts  containing 
water  of  crystallisation  shows,  and,  generally,  as  the 

formula        ~  •'--  =  ~L  requires,    the    alteration    of 
d.JL          ^J-2 

any  dissociation  phenomenon  with  the  temperature 
is  always  of  this  nature,  that  while  on  cooling  the 
decomposition  gradually  becomes  less,  yet  it  ceases 
only  at  absolute  zero  (T=0).  But  this  is  as  much 
as  to  say  that  the  internal  stability  of  the  molecule 
is  attained  only  at  absolute  zero,  i.e.  in  the  absence 
of  all  internal  motion.  Otherwise  interaction  with 
another  molecule  is  an  essential  condition  of  equi- 
librium. 

This  law  is  seen  to  be  perfectly  general  when  we 
consider  that  every  compound  would  undergo  visible 
dissociation  at  a  sufficiently  high  temperature,  thus 
fulfilling  the  above  conditions. 

We  may  add,  as  a  necessary  consequence,  that  the 
state  of  things  at  absolute  zero  is  to  be  explained 
solely  by  atomic  mechanics,  thermodynamics  having 
nothing  to  do  with  this  explanation,  because  thermo- 
dynamics comes  into  play  only  when,  at  a  tempera- 
ture above  zero,  dissociation  begins  ;  and  we  may 
add  further  that,  to  render  equilibrium  possible, 
instead  of  the  centrifugal  force  which  ordinarily  acts, 
there  must  be  a  repulsion,  for  the  action  of  matter 
(atoms)  alone  appears  insufficient,  and  there  must 
be  something  else,  perhaps  electricity. 


THE   ASYMMETRIC   CARBON  ATOM  7 

For  stereochemistry  the  above  considerations  are 
important  as  showing  that  motion  of  the  atoms  may 
for  the  present  be  neglected,  the  state  of  things 
being  tacitly  assumed  to  be  as  it  would  be  at  absolute 
zero.  Indeed,  the  phenomena  of  isomerism  are  in  a 
certain  sense  opposed  to  motion ;  they  are  certainly 
not  a  consequence  thereof ;  for  when  the  tempera- 
ture rises  they  ultimately  disappear,  and  become 
constantly  more  marked  as  it  falls.  He  who 
chooses  to  assume  motion,  however,  may  conceive 
^the  motionless  systems  here  to  be  described  as  the 
expression  of  the  position  of  certain  points  about 
which  the  motion,  doubtless  a  periodical  motion, 
takes  place. 

Insufficiency  of  structural  chemistry.  The  asym- 
metric carbon  atom. — Everyone  is  now  familiar 
with  the  fact,  only  occasionally  observed  in  1874, 
that  the  simple  structural  formulae  are  insufficient 
to  explain  the  existing  cases  of  isomerism;  and 
that,  to  consider  first  carbon-compounds  of  the 
type  C(E1K2E3E4) — i.e.  compounds  in  which  four 
separate  groups  or  atoms  are  combined  with  the 
carbon — an  extra  isomerism  occurs  when  these  four 
groups  are  different,  and  disappears  if  but  two  of 
them  become  the  same.  Assuming  a  fixed  position 
of  the  groups  round  the  carbon  atom,  only  a  tetra- 
hedral  grouping  brings  us  to  the  same  conclusion, 
as  figs.  3  and  4  show :  these  become  identical 
when  E3  and  B4  become  the  same  ;  while  this  leaves 
the  isomerism  unaffected  if  we  represent  the  formula 
in  one  plane  (figs.  1.  and  2). 


STEREOCHEMISTRY   OF   CARBON 


To  illustrate  the  matter  with  models  we  may 
use  the  cardboard  tetrahedra,  the  different  groups 
being  represented  by  attaching  caps  made  of  coloured 
paper  :  e.g.  Kt  white  ;  E2  yellow  ;  R3  black ;  R4  red ; 
to  make  the  two  tetrahedra  alike  an  extra  pair,  say  a 
pair  of  black  caps,  may  be  used,  and  may  be  placed 
on  R4,  for  instance.  The  Kekule  models,  improved  by 
v.  Baeyer,  and  sold  by  Sendtner  (Schillerstrasse  22, 
Miinchen),  may  be  used  for  the  same  purpose. 


Fig.  3. 


Fig.  4. 


A  word  as  to  the  shape  of  the  tetrahedra.  If  we 
wish  to  represent  only  the  two  possible  formulae 
given  above,  their  peculiar  lack  of  symmetry,  their 
object-and-image  relation,  and  the  way  they  may  be 
rendered  identical,  the  regular  tetrahedron  with 
variously  coloured  corners  quite  suffices.  But  if  the 
mechanics  of  the  atoms  is  to  be  taken  into  account, 
we  must  admit,  without  making  any  hypothesis  as 
to  the  nature  of  the  forces  acting,  that  in  general 


THE   ASYMMETKIC   CAKBON  ATOM  9 

these  forces  will  be  different  between  different 
groups,  and  the  same  between  similar  groups  ;  and 
then  the  difference  between  fig.  3  and  fig.  4  must 
be  expressed  in  the  dimensions  also.  The  edges 
E!  E4,  E!  K3,  &c.,  will  then  be  different  in  the 
two  figures,  but  the  corresponding  dimensions  in 
each,  E1  E4  in  fig.  3,  ^  E4  in  fig.  4,  &c.,  will  be 
equal.  The  two  tetrahedra  then  express  by  their 
shape  their  object-and-image  relation  (so-called  en- 
antiomorphism) ,  and  at  the  same  time  a  mechanical 
^necessity  is  satisfied.  It  is  now  superfluous  to  vary 
the  colours  of  the  corners ;  but  the  way  in  which 
identity  arises  can  now  be  shown  only  by  two  more 
models  in  which,  in  accordance  with  the  funda- 
mental requirement  of  mechanics,  E4  and  E3  take 
corresponding  positions  which  are  equally  distant 
from  the  plane  of  symmetry  now  called  into  ex- 
istence, and  passing  through  E1  E2 ;  for  we  now  have 

E4  E1  =  E3  E!  and  E4  E2=E3  E2. 

II.  EXPEEIMENTAL  CONFIRMATION   OF   THE 

FUNDAMENTAL  CONCEPTION 

A.    CHARACTER   OF   THE    ISOMERISM   DUE    TO   THE 
ASYMMETRIC   CARBON 

Optical  activity. — The  isomerism  expressed  by  the 
difference  between  the  two  enantiomorphous  forms 
is  characterised  in  the  first  place  by  this,  that  it  is 
to  be  expected  when  the  carbon  is  united  to  four 
different  groups,  and  only  then. 

But  in  the  second  place  all  the  molecular  dimen- 


10  STEREOCHEMISTRY   OF   CAEBON 

sions  being  equal  in  the  two  forms,  we  must  expect 
a  kind  of  isomerism  distinguished  by  a  near 
approach  to  identity.  This  state  of  things  fully 
coincides  with  the  facts,  and  may  be  summed  up  as 
follows. 

All  physical  properties  depending  on  molecular 
dimensions  and  attractions  (mathematically  speaking, 
on  the  quantities  a  and  b  of  Van  der  Waals'  theory) 
are  identical  in  the  two  isomers ;  thus,  sp.  gr.,  crit. 
temp.,  maximal  tension,  boiling  point,  melting  point, 
latent  heat  of  fusion  and  vaporisation,  &c.  The  same 
holds  for  the  physical  properties  which  manifest  them- 
selves as  the  expression  of  these  fundamental  quan- 
tities, on  contact  with  other  bodies,  e.g.  solubility. 

As  regards  chemical  properties  we  must  expect 
exactly  equal  stability,  the  same  speed  of  formation 
and  of  conversion  in  given  reactions,  equilibrium 
when  equal  quantities  of  each  are  present  together, 
no  heat  of  transformation  when  one  is  converted 
into  the  other,  and  accordingly  equal  heat  of  forma- 
tion in  both  cases. 

Finally,  the  only  difference  is  due  to  the  lack  of 
symmetry,  and  this  is  manifested  physically  in  the 
opposite  optical  activity,  the  so-called  right-  and 
left-handed  rotation,  shown  by  the  isomers  in  the 
dissolved  state — in  the  state,  that  is,  when  the 
rotation  must  arise  from  molecular,  not  from  crystal- 
line structure.  It  is  important  to  note  that  a 
corresponding  enantiomorphous  structure  causes  the 
opposite  activity  in  other  cases  also,  as  may  be 
deduced  empirically  from  active  crystals,  e.g.  quartz, 


THE   ASYMMETRIC   CARBON  ATOM  11 

in  which  opposite  rotatory  power  as  regards  light 
accompanies  enantiomorphism  of  crystalline  form. 
The  same  holds  for  elastic  bodies  wound  in  a  right- 
or  left-handed  spiral,  and  finally  for  the  active  mica 
combinations  of  Reusch,  formed  of  a  pile  of  thin 
plates  of  binaxial  mica  placed  at  an  angle  of  60°  one 
above  another.1  And  Sarrau  2  has  shown  the  theo- 
retical necessity  for  this  optical  phenomenon  in  the 
case  of  asymmetric  structures  in  general. 

Crystalline  form. — In  the  second  place  the 
asymmetry  manifests  itself  crystallographically,3 
isomers  due  to  asymmetric  carbon  showing  an 
enantiomorphism  of  crystalline  form  corresponding 
to  their  molecular  structure,  as  illustrated  by  the 
following  woodcuts  of  right-  and  left-handed 
ammonium  bimalate : — 


Fig.  5.  Fig.  6. 

We  may  add  that  Soret 4  has  shown  this  result 
to  be  a  general  necessity. 

In  the  third  place  there  is  the  difference  in  chemical 
and  consequently  in  physiological  properties. — The 

1  Wyrouboff,  Ann.  de  Chim.  et  de  Phys.  [6J,  8,  340. 

2  Journ.  de  Math.pures  et  appliquees  [2],  12,  1867. 

3  But  see  Walden,  Ber.  29,  1692,  and  H.  Traube's  reply,  I.e.  2446. 

4  Arch,  de  Geneve,  24,  592,  1890. 


12  STEREOCHEMISTRY  OF   CARBON 

chemical  identity  emphasised  above  ceases  directly 
the  asymmetric  isomers  have  to  do  with  a  substance 
which  is  itself  asymmetric.  And  it  is  just  in  this 
case  that  mechanical  reasons  show  the  impossibility 
of  equality  in  action  (mathematically  in  the  quan- 
tities a  of  Van  der  Waals  for  the  two  substances). 
The  affinities  are  accordingly  different,  and  doubtless 
the  solubilities  also  ;  the  resulting  compounds  have 
not  the  same  composition,  e.g.  salts,  as  regards 
water  of  crystallisation ;  sometimes  indeed  one 
isomer  can  exist,  while  the  other  is  incapable  of 
existing.  Finally  the  physiological  action,  particu- 
larly the  nutritive  value  for  the  lower  organisms,  is 
altogether  different  for  the  two  isomers,  doubtless 
owing  to  the  difference  above  mentioned,  for  in  these 
organisms  asymmetric  bodies,  e.g.  proteids,  play  a 
great  part.  Also  poisoning  power,  in  the  case  of 
tartaric  acid,  and  taste,  in  the  case  of  asparagine,  are 
different. 

We  may  add  that  Pasteur  !  long  ago  expressed 
the  view  that  the  above-mentioned  optical,  crystal- 
lographical,  chemical,  and  physiological  properties 
must  arise  from  an  asymmetric  grouping  in  the 
molecule ;  indeed,  he  even  mentioned  the  tetra- 
hedron as  a  possibility. 

'  Are  the  atoms  of  tartaric  acid  arranged  along 
the  spiral  of  a  right-handed  screw,  or  are  they  situ- 
ated at  the  corners  of  an  irregular  tetrahedron,  or 
have  they  some  other  asymmetric  grouping?  Time 
must  answer  the  question.  But  of  this  there  is  no 
1  Lemons  de  Chimie,  1860,  25. 


THE   ASYMMETRIC   CAKBON  ATOM  13 

doubt,  that  the  atoms  possess  an  asymmetric 
arrangement  like  that  of  an  object  and  its  mirrored 
image.  Equally  certain  is  it  that  the  atoms  of  the 
left-handed  acid  possess  just  the  opposite  asym- 
metric arrangement.' 

B.    OBSEEVED   COINCIDENCE     OF    OPTICAL    ISOMEEISM 
WITH   THE    PEESENCE    OF   ASYMMETEIC   CAEBON 

Enumeration  of  the  active  compounds. — In  order 
now  to  show  that  the  above-mentioned  properties 
really  accompany  the  asymmetric  carbon  atom 
wherever  it  occurs,  we  may  confine  our  attention  to 
the  optical  activity,  since  all  the  above-mentioned 
peculiarities,  crystallographical,  chemical,  and  physio- 
logical, regularly  coincide  therewith.  Another  sim- 
plification :  it  is  no  matter  whether  both  isomers 
have  been  found  or  not,  since  if  a  compound  has 
been  found  which  in  solution  rotates  to  the  right 
(e.g.),  it  is  perfectly  certain  that  the  corresponding 
compound  of  opposite  activity  will  sooner  or  later  be 
discovered. 

We  will  therefore  simply  enumerate  the  active 
bodies,  of  known  structure,  indicating  the  asym- 
metric carbon  by  italics.  In  order  to  give  these 
important  data  as  completely  as  possible  without 
occupying  too  much  space  I  will  here  confine  myself 
to  the  active  compounds  containing  only  one  asym- 
metric carbon,  as  the  others  will  be  discussed  later ; 
and  in  each  group  only  the  principal  members  (and 
not,  e.g.,  salts  and  esters)  will  be  included,  since 
these  derivatives  also  will  be  treated  of  specially. 


14  STEREOCHEMISTRY   OF   CARBON 

1.  Compounds  with  three  carbon  atoms. — (an  indi- 
cates the  directly  observed  rotation  for  sodium  light ; 
[a]D  is  the  so-called  specific  rotation,  i.e.  calculated 
for  one  decimetre  and  unit  density.) 

Propylene  glycol,1  (7H.OH.CH3.CH2OH  an 
=  -  5°  for  22  cm. 

Propylene  oxide,1  CH.CH3.OCH2  aD  =  +  1°  for 
22  cm.  '  |  J 

Propylene  diamine,  CH.CH3.NH2.CH2NH2.'2 

Ethylidene  lactic  acid,3  CH.OH.CH3.C02H.  Bo- 
tation  in  aqueous  solution  varying  much  with  time 
and  concentration  (c). 

Maximal  value  \_a~\D  =  +  3°  (c  =  7-38).  The 
somer  of  opposite  activity  has  also  been  obtained.4 

Lactid,3  (7H.CH3.CO.O     [a],,  =  -  86°. 


Cystine,5  O.SH.NH2.CH3.C02H     [a],  =  -  8°. 

Glyceric  acid,6  CH.OH.CH2OH.C02H.  '  Eotation 
in  aqueous  solution  varying  much  with  time  and 
concentration.  Both  isomers  have  been  obtained. 

2.  Compounds  with  four  carbon  atoms. 

Butyl  alcohol,7  (7H.OH.CHa.C2H5. 

1  Le  Bel,  Bull.  Soc.  Chim.  [2],  34,  129. 

2  Baumann,  Ber.  28,  1177. 

3  Wislicenus,  Ann.  167,  302. 

4  Nencki  and  Sieber,  Ber.   22,  Ref .   695 ;    Schurdinger,  Chem. 
Soc.    J.    Abstr.    1891,   p.  666;  Purdie    and  Walker,   Trans.  1892, 
p.  754  ;  Lewkowitsch,  Ber.  16,  2720  ;  Linossier,  24,  Ref.  660. 

5  Baumann,  Zeitschr.  f.  Physiol.  Chem.  8,  305. 

6  Lewkowitsch,  I.e.  ;  Frankland   and   Appleyard,  Chem.  Soc.  J. 
Trans.  1893,  p.  296. 

7  Combes  and  Le  Bel,  Chem,  Soc.  J.  Abstr.  1893,  p.  246. 


THE   ASYMMETKIC   CA 

'Oxybutyric    acid,1    (7H.OH.CH, 
=  -  21°. 

Malic  acid,  CH.OH.C02H.CH2C02H.  Kotationin 
aqueous  solution  varying  much  with  the  concentration. 
[a]n  =  -  2-3°  (c  =  8-4)  ;  [a\D  =   +  3'34°  (c  =  70). 2 

The  isomer  of  opposite  activity  has  also  been 
obtained.3 

Chlorosuccinic  acid,  CHCLC02H.CH2CO2H 4 
[a]5J  =  +  20°  (c=  3-2  to  16). 

Methoxysuccinic  acid, 

CH.OCH3.C02H.CH2C02H  5 

[a]i?=33°  (c  =  5-5  to  10-8). 

Both  isomers  were  obtained. 

Ethoxysuccinicacid,  CH.OC2H5.C02H.CH2C02H G 
[a]i8  =  33°  (c  =  5-6  to  11-2). 

Propoxysuccinic  acid, 

(7H.OC3H7.C02H.CH2C02H  7  [a]J?  =  36-2°. 
Isopropoxysuccinic  acid, 

OH.OCH(CH3)2.C02H.CH2C02H.8 

Aspartic  acid,  CH.NH2.C02H.CH2C02H  [a]7, 
=  —  4°  to  —  5°  9  in  aqueous  solution.  The  isomer  of 
opposite  activity  is  also  known.10 

1  Minkowski  and  Kiilz,  Ber.  17,  Eef.  334,  534,  535. 

2  Schneider,  Ann.  207,  257. 

3  Bremer,  Bull.  Soc.  Chim.  25,  6 ;  Piutti,  Ber.  19,  1693. 
1  Walden,  Ber.  26,  215. 

5  Purdie  and  Marshall,  Chem.  Soc.  J.  Trans.  1893,  p.  217. 
B  Purdie  and  Walker,  I.e.  p.  229. 

7  Purdie  and  Bolam,  ibid.  1895,  p.  955  ;  Cook,  Ber.  30,  294. 

8  Purdie  and  Lander,  Chem.  Soc.  Proc.  1896,  p.  221. 
»  Becker,  Ber.  14,  1031. 

10  Piutti,  Compt.  Bend.  103,  134  ;  Marshall,  Chem.  Soc.  Trans. 
1896,  p.  1023. 


16  STEREOCHEMISTRY   OF   CARBON 

Malamide,  CH.OH.C01OT2.CH2CONH2. 

Asparagine,  CH.NH2.C02H.CH2CONH2  [a]D 
—  —  8°  to  —  5° l  in  aqueous  solution.  The  isomer  of 
opposite  activity  is  also  known.2 

Uramidosuccinamide, 

CH.NHCONH2.C02H.CH2CONH2, 

also  obtained  in  the  two  modifications.2 

3.  Compounds  with  five  carbon  atoms. 

Amyl  alcohol,  (7H.CH3.C2H5.CH2OH  [o]S  =  -  5°.3 
The  isomer  of  opposite  activity  is  also  known.4  All 
the  derivatives  are  mentioned  later. 

Valeric  acid,  (7H.CH3.C2H5.C02H  \_a~\D  =  + 
17°  30'.5 

Amyl  alcohol,  OH.OH.CH3.C3H7  aD  =  -  8°  7' 
for  22  cm.6 

Amyl  iodide,  CHI.CH3.C3H7  aD  =  +  1°  8'  for 
22  cm.6 

Amyl  chloride,  CHC1.CH8.C3H7  aD  =  -  0°  5' 
for  20  cm.7 

Oxyglutaric  acid,  CH.OH.C02H.C2H4C02H  [a],, 
=  —  2° 8  in  aqueous  solution. 

Methylmalic  acid,  C.OH.CH3.C02H.CH2C02H.9 

1  Becker,  Ber.  14,  1031. 

2  Piutti,  Compt.  Rend.  103,  134 ;    Marshall,  Chern.  Soc.  Trans. 
1896,  p.  1023. 

3  Rogers,  Chem.  Soc.  J.  Trans.  1893,  p.  1130. 

4  Le  Bel,  Compt.  Rend.  87,  213  ;  cf.  Schiitz  and  Marckwald,  Ber. 
29,  52. 

5  Taverne,  Rec.  des  Trav.  Chim.  des  Pays-Bas,   1894,  p.  201 ; 
Schiitz  and  Marckwald,  Z.  c. 

6  Le  Bel,  Bull.  Soc.  Chim.  33,  106. 

7  Guye,  Th&ses,  1891,  p.  55. 

8  Ritthausen,  J.f.prakt.  Cfcew.[2],  5, 354;  Scheibler,  Ber.  17, 1728. 

9  Le  Bel,  Bull.  Soc.  Chim.  [3],  11,  292. 


THE  ASYMMETKIC  CARBON  ATOM        17 

Glutamic  acid,  CHNH2.C02H.C2H4C02H  [a]D 
=  ._+  35°  l  in  dilute  nitric  acid. 

4.  Fatty  substances  with  more  than  five  carbon  atoms. 
Hexyl  alcohol,2  CH.CH3.C2H5.CH2CH2OH  [a],,  =  8°. 

Hexylic  acid,2  GH..CHyCfLs.CHjCOJS.  [a]B  =  9°. 
The  isomer  of  opposite  activity  has  been  prepared 
from  amyl  alcohol.3 

l4f<7H.OH.CH,.C4H9,  left-handed. 

Hexylalc°holtcH.OH.C2H,C3H7,right-handed. 

Hexyl  chloride,4  CH.C1.C2H5.C3H7,  left-handed. 

Hexyl  iodide,4  CH.I.C2H5.C3H7,  right-handed. 

Leucine,5  CH.CH2CH(CH3)2.NH2.C02H  [a]D 
=  +  18°  in  hydrochloric  acid  solution.6  The  isomer 
of  opposite  activity  has  also  been  discovered.7 

Ethyl  amyl,8  CH.CH3.C2H5.C3H7  aD  =  +  5°  for 
20  cm. 

5.  Pyridine  derivatives. 

a-Pipecoline  =  a-methylpiperidine 9  [a]D  =  35°. 
a-Ethylpiperidine  9  [a]D  =  7°. 
Conine  =  a-propylpiperidine 9  [a]D  =  14°. 
CH2 

H0C       CH, 


H0C 


2 

H 


o 


H 

1  Bitthausen,  J.f.prakt.  Chem.  [1],  107,  238. 

2  Van  Bomburgh,  Rec.  des  Trav.  Chim.  des  Pays-Bas,  6,  150. 

3  Wurtz,  Ann.  Chim.  Phys.  [3],  51,  358. 

4  Combes  and  Le  Bel,  Chem.  Soc.  J.  Abstr.  1893,  p.  246. 

5  Schulze  and  Likiernik,  Ber.  24,  669  ;  26,  Bef.  500. 
d  Mauthner,  Zeitschr.  f.  physiol.  Chem.  7,  222. 

7  Schulze,  Barbieri,  and  Bosshard,  ibid.  9,  103. 

8  Just,  Ann.  220,  157.  °  Ladenburg,  Ber.  19,  2584,  2975. 

C 


18  STEREOCHEMISTRY   OF   CARBON 

Copellidine  =  methylethylpiperidine.1 
Methylconine  2  [a]*  =  81'33°. 
Nicotine  3[a]/>=  -161°. 

CH  CH 


HC      C OH    CH2 

II         I          I         I 
HC       CH     N CH2 

Y    <k 

6.  Aromatic  compounds. 

Mandelic  acid,4  OH.CGHVOH.C02H  [a]D  =  ±156°. 

Tropic  acid,5  OH.C6H5.CH2OH.C02H   [>],,  =  71° 
in  aqueous  solution.      Both  isomers  were  obtained. 

Phenylcystine,6     O.CH3.NH2.SC6H5.C02H     [a]D 
=  -  4°. 
Bromophenylcystine,6O.CH3.SCGH4Br.NH2.C02H. 

Phenylbromomercapturic  acid  6  [a]D  =  —  7°. 
O.CH3.SC6H4Br.NH(COCH3).C02H. 

Phenylamidopropionic  acid,7 

OH.NH2.CH2C6H5.C02H. 

Tyrosine,8     CH.NH2.CH2.CGH4OH.C02H      [a]D 
=  -8°. 

Isopropylphenylglycollic  acid,9 
OH.OH.CGH4C3H7.C02H.     Both  isomers  were  pre- 
pared.    [a]D  =  135°. 

1  Levy  and  Wolffenstein,  Ber.  28,  2270 ;  29,  43,  1959. 

2  Wolffenstein,  ibid.  27,  2614.  3  Ladenburg,  ibid.  26,  293. 
•»  Lewkowitsch,  ibid.  16,  1565,  2721. 

3  Ladenburg,  ibid.  22,  2590. 

«  Baumann,  ibid.  15,  1401,  1731. 

7  Schulze  and  Nageli,  Zcitschr.  f.  physiol.  Chem.  11,  201. 

8  Mauthner,  Wien.  Akad.  Ber.  [2],  85,  882.       9  Ber.  26,  Ref.  89. 


THE   ASYMMETRIC    CARBON   ATOM  19 

Leucinephthaloylic  acid,1 

CH.C4H9.NHCOC6H4(C02H).C02H. 
Phthalylamidocapro'ic  acid,1 

CH.C4H9.N(C202)C6H4.C02H. 


Limonene.2 

Carvol.3 

Camphor.4 

[a>=±1050 

[a\D=  ±62° 

[a]D=  ±55° 

C3H7 

C3H7 

C3H7 

C 

C 

C 

/% 

X\ 

/N 

HC        CH 

HC       CH 

H2C       CH 

II          1 
HC        CH2 

II         1 
HC        CO 

H2C       CO 

V 

\/ 

C 

\/ 

C 

HCH, 

HCH, 

HCH, 

Tetrahydronaphthylenediamine 5  [a]D  —  —  7°  and  +  8°. 
H     H.NH2 

H/Y\H, 
HC       C        CH2 

'V 

NH2      H2 

Phenyl  amyl,6  CH.CH3.C2H5.CH2C6H,  aD=l°  4'. 

Predictions   of    activity   confirmed. — Thus   in    all 

active  bodies  the  asymmetric  carbon  occurs  ;  indeed, 

1  Reese,  Ann.  242,  9  ;  Ber.  21,  277. 

2  Ber.  21,  166.  3  Ibid.  20,  486,  2071. 

4  Landolt,  Opt.  Drehungsvermogen,  p.  83. 

5  Bamberger,  Ber.  23, 291.  6  Guye,  Thtees,  1891. 

'  o  2 


20  STEREOCHEMISTRY   OF   CARBON 

in  many  cases  activity  was  first  suspected  from  the 
constitution,  and  subsequently  discovered.  This 
was  the  case  with  leucine,  tyrosine,  cystine,  propy- 
leneglycol,  glyceric  and  mandelic  acids,  secondary 
butyl-,  amyl-,  and  hexyl-alcohol,  isopropylphenyl- 
glycollic  acid,  hydronaphthalenediamine,  &c. 

Doubtful  statements. — A  fact  which  inspires  special 
confidence  is  that  in  seven  cases  the  supposed 
activity  of  bodies  containing  no  asymmetric  carbon 
atom  has  been  disproved. 

Propyl  alcohol,  C^CH.CH.OH.1 

Styrolene,  C6H5CHCH2.2 

Trimethylethylstibineiodide,  (CH3)3C2H5SbI.3 

/3-Picoline  =  /3-methylpyridine.4 

Papaverine.5 

Chlorofumaric  and  chloromaleic  acids,6 
C02HCC1CHC02H. 

It  must  then  be  considered  doubtful  whether 
oxypyroracemic  acid 7  with  the  constitution  ascribed 
to  it,  C02H.COCH2OH,  really  possesses  the  activity 
discovered  by  Will. 

1  Chancell,  Compt.  Rend.  68,  659,  726.     Inactive  according  to  a 
private  communication  from  Henninger. 

2  Berthelot,  ibid.  63,  518  ;  van  't  Hoff,  Maandblad  voor  Natuur- 
ivetenschappen,  6,  72  ;  Ber.  9,  5 ;  Krakau,  Ber.  11,  1259 ;   Weger, 
Ann.  221,  68. 

3  Friedlander,  Journ.  f.  prakt.  Chem.  70,  449  ;     Le  Bel,  Bull. 
Soc.  Chim.  27,  444. 

4  Hesekiel,  Ber.  18,  3091 ;  Landolt,  ibid.  19,  157. 

5  Hesse,     Ann.    176,    198 ;    Goldschmidt,    Wien.    Akad.    Ber. 
January  1888. 

6  Perkin,  Chem.  Soc.  Journ.  1888,  695  ;  van  't  Hoff,  Ber.  10, 1620; 
Walden,  I.e.  26,  210,  508. 

'  Ber.  24,  400. 


THE   ASYMMETKIC   CAKBON  ATOM  21 

Disappearance  of  the  activity  in  derivatives. — It  is 
of  special  importance  to  note  the  activity  in  different 
groups  of  derivatives,  for  it  is  found  that  the  activity 
regularly  vanishes  with  C,  the  asymmetric  carbon 
atom.  This  proof  is  specially  pertinent,  because 
Colson  l  has  recently  given  prominence  again  to  the 
conception  of  an  active  type  or  radical  as  the  cause 
of  rotation ;  this  conception,  however,  lacks  sufficient 
precision,  the  precision  which  renders  it  possible  to 
decide  beforehand  in  which  cases  this  type  vanishes. 

In  the  amyl  series,  in  the  derivatives  of  active 
amyl  alcohol,  H3C  (C2H5)  CHCH2OH,  the  activity 
persists  in  the  ethers  and  amyl  sulphates,  in  the 
chloride,  bromide,  and  iodide,  in  amylamine  and 
its  salts,  in  the  aldehyde  and  in  valeric  acid,  in 
diamyl ;  in  short,  in  more  than  sixty  compounds 
recently  examined  by  Guye  2  and  others.  Unaided  by 
the  theory,  one  would  be  inclined  to  maintain  that 
the  activity  exists  in  all  the  derivatives  ;  but,  relying 
on  the  theory,  Le  Bel3  and  Just4  examined  the 
nearest  derivatives  in  which  the  asymmetric  car- 
bon is  lacking,  the  former  testing  methylamyl, 
(H5C2)2CHCH3,  and  amylene,  H3C(C2H5)CCH2,  the 
latter  amylhydride.  No  rotatory  power  could  be 
detected  in  any  of  these  three  compounds. 

In   the   derivatives   of    tartaric   acid    the   same 

1  Etude  sur  la  Sttreochimie,   1892  ;  Journ.  de  Pharm.  et  de 
Chimie,  1893. 

2  Theses,  Paris,  1891 ;  Walden,  Zeitschr.  physik.  Chem.  15,  638  ; 
I.  Welt,  Compt.  Rend.  119,  885  ;  Guye  andChavanne,  I.e.  119,  906  ; 
120,  452. 

3  Bull.  Soc.  Chim.  [2],  25,  565.  4  Ann.  220,  146. 


22  STEREOCHEMISTRY   OF   CARBON 

peculiarity  occurs.  Starting  with  the  right-handed 
acid  we  find  the  rotatory  power  preserved  in  the 
salts  and  esters,  in  tartraniic  acid  and  tartraniide ; 
in  short,  in  forty-one  derivatives  recently  enumerated 
by  Guye,  in  malic  acid,  its  salts,  its  esters,  and 
its  amide.  But  Pasteur  himself  did  not  suspect 
that  the  activity  would  disappear  in  succinic  acid,1 
C02HCH2CH2C02H,  obtained  by  the  reduction  of 
malic  acid ;  the  same  holds  for  chlorofumaric  acid,2 
C02HCC1CHC02H,  obtained  by  treating  tartaric 
acid  with  phosphorus  pentachloride. 

Starting  from  malic  acid  in  the  contrary  direction 
we  have  active  methoxy-  and  ethoxy-succinic  acids, 
chlorosuccinic  acid,  asparagine,  aspartic  acid  with 
the  two  series  of  salts,  uramidosuccinic  acid  ; 3  but 
the  succinic  acid  made  from  asparagine  is  inactive. 

Further  confirmation  is  afforded  by  the  follow- 
ing isolated  cases,  which  will  find  an  application 
later. 

Oxalic  acid  made  from  active  sugar4  or  active 
tartaric  acid 5  is  inactive  ;  so  is  furfurol  from  active 
arabinose  or  xylose.5 

Active  phenylcystine  gives  on  treatment  with 
baryta  inactive  phenylmercaptan.6 

The  active  oxybutyric  acid  of  Minkowski  and 
Kiilz  gives  an  inactive  crotonic  acid.7 

Bremer  and  van  't  Hoff,  Ber.  9,  215. 

Van  't  Hoff,  ibid.  10,  620  ;  Walden,  Z.c.  26,  210. 

Piutti,  Compt.  Bend.  103,  134. 

Van  't  Hoff,  Ber.  10,  620.  5  Ibid.  1620. 

Baumann  and  Preusse,  Z.c. 

Deichmuller,  Szymansky,  and  Tollens,  Ann.  228,  95. 


THE   ASYMMETEIC   CAKBON  ATOM  23 

Among  observations  of  this  kind  those  cases  in 
which  compounds  without  the  asymmetric  atom  are 
obtained  by  fermentation — i.e.  by  the  action  of  living 
organisms — deserve  special  attention,  because  this 
action  specially  favours  the  formation  of  active 
compounds.  When  therefore  in  these  circumstances 
an  inactive  body  is  formed  from  an  active  one,  it  is 
surely  very  probable  that  its  inactivity  arises  from 
its  constitution  being  incompatible  with  rotatory 
power.  For  this  reason  we  mentioned  in  1875  the 
inactivity  of  ethyl-,  propyl-,  butyl-,  and  amyl-alcohols, 
which  result  from  the  fermentation  of  active  carbo- 
hydrates. 

Succinic  acid  l  made  by  fermentation  of  active 
malate  and  tartrate  of  calcium,  of  asparagine,  and 
of  starch,  is  inactive.  Further,  Beyerinck,  to  whom 
I  am  indebted  for  these  samples  of  succinic  acid 
(made  by  Fritz),  has  placed  at  my  disposal  some 
ethylacetate  prepared  by  fermenting  active  maltose. 
Van  Deventer  showed  that  this  was  inactive. 

Finally,  one  might  add  all  inactive  vegetable  pro- 
ducts, which  for  the  most  part  are  made  from  active 
material  under  the  influence  of  the  organism.  The 
inactivity  of  citric  acid,  e.g.,  rendered  probable  the 
formula  C02H.CH2COH(C02H)CH2C02H.  This  was 
pointed  out  long  ago  and  has  since  been  proved. 

Does  any  difference  in  the  groups  attached  to  the 
carbon  suffice  to  cause  activity  ? — This  question  arose 
in  the  first  edition.  Some  reserve  was  still  necessary 
as  long  as  cases  were  lacking  in  which  even  the  dif- 

1  Ber.  10,  1620 ;   11,  142  ;   12,  474. 


24  STEREOCHEMISTRY   OF  CARBON 

ference  between  halogen  and  hydrogen — i.e.  between 
the  simplest  possible  groups  of  only  one  atom — 
sufficed  for  activity.1  There  was  room  for  doubt, 
because  in  many  cases  the  activity  was  lost  on  sub- 
stituting  one  group  for  another — e.g.  chlorine  for 
hydroxyl — although  all  the  groups  were  still  different. 
Thus  the  following  inactive  halogen  derivatives  were 
obtained  from  active  bodies  :— 

Bromosuccinic  acid  from  malic  acid.2 

Dichlorosuccinic  acid  from  tartaric  acid.3 

lodohexyl  from  mannite.4 

Phenyl-brom-  and  chlor-acetic  acids  from  phenyl- 
glycollic  acid.5 

Isopropylphenylchloracetic  acid  from  isopropyl- 
phenylglycollic  acid.6 

Since  then,  however,  the  following  thoroughly 
decisive  cases  have  become  known  in  which  the 
activity  is  retained  or  present. 

Chloro-  and  bromo-propionic  acids  from  lactic 
acid.7 

Chlorosuccinic  acid  from  malic  acid.3 

Chloro-  and  bromo-malic  acids  from  tartaric  acid.7 

Iodide  and  chloride  of  secondary  amyl  alcohol, 
CH.OH.CH3.C3H7.8 

Iodide  and  chloride  of  secondary  hexyl  alcohol, 
CH.OH.C2H5.C3H7.9 

1  See  Guye's  work  below. 

2  Ann.  130,  172  ;  Ber.  24,  2687.  3  Walden,  Ber.  26,  212. 

4  Ann.  135,  130.  5  J.  Chem.  Soc.  59,  71 ;  Proc.  1891,  152. 

8  Fileti,  Oazz.  Chim.  [2],  22,  395.  7  Walden,  Ber.  28,  1287. 

s  Le  Bel,  Bull.  Soc.  Chim.  [2],  33,  106 ;  Guye,  Theses,  1891. 
"  Combes  and  Le  Bel,  J.  Chem.  Soc.  Abstr.  1893,  246. 


THE  ASYMMETKIC  CARBON  ATOM        25 

Hexachlorhydrin  of  mannite, 


Cinnamic  acid  dibromide  and  dichloride,2 
C6H5(CHBr)2C02H. 

Finally,  the  above-mentioned  phenyl-brom-  and 
chlor-acetic  acids,  which  had  been  known  only  in  the 
inactive  form,  were  obtained  active  from  mandelic 
acid. 

The  unexpected  occurrence  of  the  inactive  de- 
rivatives will  be  explained  presently. 

TKANSLATOE'S  NOTE 

A  final  restriction  has  yet  to  be  acknowledged. 
At  present  we  do  not  know  a  single  active  molecule 
containing  less  than  two  carbon  atoms  united  with 
the  asymmetric  carbon. 

Thus  no  activity  has  been  observed  in  the  follow- 
ing compounds  :— 

Containing  one  carbon  atom. 
Chlorobromomethanesulphonic  acid,  (7HClBr.S03H. 

Containing  two  carbon  atoms. 

Bromnitroethane,  CHBr.N02.CH3. 
Sodiumnitroethane,  CHNa.N02.CH3. 
Aldehyde  ammonia,  CH.OH.NH2.CH3. 
Chloralsulphydrate,  (7H.OH.SH.CC13. 
Chloral  alcoholate  and  hydrocyanide. 
Bromoglycollic  acid,  CH.OH.Br.COOH. 
Hydrogen  silver  fulminate,  CHAg.N02.CN. 
Ethylidene  iodobromide,  CHIBr.CH3. 

1  Mourgues,  Compt.Rend.  Ill,  112. 
-  Liebermann,  Ber.  26,  245,  833. 


26  STEREOCHEMISTRY   OF   CARBON 

Ethylidenemethethylate,  CH.OCH3.OC2H5.CH3. 
Ethylidenechlorosulphinic  acid,  (7HC1.S02H.CH3. 
Chlorethylidene  oxide,  CH8.CHC1.0.C1HC.CH3. 

The  verdict  of  observation,  then,  up  to  the 
present  time,  is  that  an  asymmetric  carbon  alone  is 
not  sufficient  to  cause  optical  activity,  but  that  the 
presence  of  the  group  C.C.C  is  essential.1  It  seems 
probable,  however,  that  the  inactivity  of  the  mole- 
cules just  mentioned  is  due  to  an  intramolecular 
transformation,  favoured  by  the  mobility  of  the 
small  radicals  attached  to  the  asymmetric  carbon. 
The  same  thing  is  observed  in  the  case  of  asymmetric 
nitrogen  (p.  181  post). 

1  Compare    Moller,    Cod    Liver   Oil    and    Chemistry,  p.   462 
(London  :   Moller). 


27 


CHAPTER   II 
DIVISION   OF   THE  INACTIVE  MIXTURE1 

INACTIVITY  OF  COMPOUNDS  CONTAINING  AN 
ASYMMETRIC  CARBON  ATOM 

EVERY  active  compound,  then,  occurring  in  the 
two  characteristic  isomers  contains  an  asymmetric 
carbon  atom  ;  on  the  other  hand,  there  are  many 
substances  which  possess  this  peculiar  constitution 
and  yet  show  no  activity ;  indeed,  they  are  perfectly 
certain  to  be  inactive  when  prepared  in  the  laboratory 
from  inactive  substances. 

..  From  the  first,  Le  Bel  and  I  considered  this 
difficulty  to  be  merely  apparent.  The  exactly  cor- 
responding internal  constitution  of  the  two  isomers, 
CR^RgR^  demands  that  when  they  are  formed 
from  CRjRgRgRg  (where  the  similar  groups  R3 
occupy  exactly  corresponding  positions  on  each  side 
of  the  plane  of  symmetry  passing  through  CR^), 
the  reaction  should  proceed  with  equal  velocity  in 
two  directions ;  the  product  will  consist  of  equal 
quantities  of  two  isomers,  one  resulting  from  the 
conversion  of  the  one  R3  group  into  R4,  the  other 

1  Compare  Chr.  Winther,  Bar.  28,  3000.      Tables   showing  the 
results  so  far  obtained  and  a  theoretical  explanation  are  given. 

IE~OS/ 

OF  TrfB 

UNIVERSITY 

>n\K 


28  STEEEOCHEMISTEY  OF   CARBON 

from  the  conversion  of  the  other  B3  group  into  R4. 
Thus  we  get  an  inactive  mixture,  and  a  mixture 
which,  owing  to  the  complete  agreement  in  the 
chemical  and  physical  properties  of  the  components, 
can  be  separated  only  by  special  means.  If  we  add 
that,  on  the  other  hand,  the  two  isomers,  like  right- 
and  left-handed  tartaric  acid,  may  join  together  to 
form  a  so-called  racemic  compound,  everything 
justifies  the  expectation  that  the  isomers  may  be 
obtained  from  the  product  of  this  reaction,  as  Pasteur 
obtained  tartaric  from  racemic  acid. 

And  this  has  gradually  been  done  in  more  than 
thirty  cases.  We  have  now,  then,  to  describe  the 
methods,  which  may  be  briefly  indicated  as— 

Division  by  the  use  of  active  compounds ;  divi- 
sion by  the  use  of  organisms  ;  spontaneous  division  ; 
proof  of  divisibility  by  synthesis  of  the  inactive 
mixture  or  compound. 

1.   DIVISION   BY   THE    USE    OF   ACTIVE    COMPOUNDS 

This  method  was  based  on  the  observation  of 
Pasteur  that  when  a  solution  of  racemic  acid  is 
neutralised  with  (active)  cinchonine,  the  salt  of  the 
left-handed  tartaric  acid  is  the  first  to  crystallise  out. 
Since  that  time  the  method  has  been  employed  with 
success  in  many  cases,  and  seems  advantageous  for 
procuring  a  large  quantity  of  pure  substance  ;  but  it 
is  limited  to  the  division  of  acids  and  bases,  because 
other  active  bodies  lack  the  requisite  combining 
power. 


DIVISION   OF  THE   INACTIVE   MIXTUKE 


29 


Substance 
Racemic  acid, 
CO,H  CHOHCHOHC02H 

Malic  acid, 
CO^HCHOHCHCO.^ 


a-Oxybutyric  acid, 


Pyrotartaric  acid, 

C02HC'H.CH3.CH2CO,H 

Mandelic  acid, 
C6H5.CHOHC02H 

i-Mannonic  acid, 
CH2OH(CHOH)4C02H 

i-Galactonic  acid, 

CH,OH(CHOH)4C02H 

Phenylbromolactic  acid, 
C6H5CHBrCHOHCO,H 


Means 
Cinchonine 


Cinchonine 

Brucine 

Strychnine 
Cinchonine 

Strychnine, 
Morphine 

Strychnine 
Cinchonine 


•Ethoxysuccinic  acid,  Cinchonine 

C02HCH(OC2H5)CH2C02H 


Lactic  acid,  CH8CHOHC02H       Strychnine 


Isopropylphenylglycollic         Quinine,  Cincho- 
acid,  C3H7C<5H4CHOHC02H    nine,  Codeine 

Cinnamic  acid  dibromide  Strychnine 

C6H5(CHBr)2C02H 


Cinnamic  acid  dichloride  Strychnine 

Phenyldibromobutyric  acid  Brucine 


Author 

Pasteur. 


Bremer,  'Ber.'  13, 
351;'Rec.desTrav. 
Chim.  des  Pays- 
Bas,'  4,  180. 

Guye  and  Chavanne, 
'  Compt.  Kend.' 
120,  565,  632. 

Ladenburg,  'Ber. '28, 
1171. 

Lewkowitsch,  '  Ber.' 
16,  1573. 

Fischer, 'Ber.' 23, 379. 


Fischer, 'Ber.' 25, 124. 

Purdie  and  Marshall, 
'  Chem.  Soc.  J. 
Trans.'  1893,  218. 

Purdie  and  Walker, 
'  Chem.  Soc.  J. 
Trans.'  1892,  754. 

Purdie  and  Walker, 
'  Chem.  Soc.  J. 
Trans.'  1892,  754. 

Fileti,  'Gazz.  Chi- 
mica,'  [2],  22,  395. 

Erlenmeyer,  jun.,  and 
Lothar  Meyer,  jun., 
'  Ann.'  271,  137; 
'Ber.' 25,  3121. 

Liebermann, '  Ber.'  26, 
833. 

L.  Meyer,  jun.,  and  0. 
Stein, 'Ber.' 27,  890. 


30 


STEREOCHEMISTRY   OF   CARBON 


Substance 

Nitrosohexahydroquinolic 
acid 


Conine,  HNC5H,,C3H7 
o-Pipecoline,  HNC5H9CHg 
a-Ethylpiperidine, 


1,  5-Tetrahydronaphthylene- 
diamine 

Diphenyldiethylenediamine 


Copellidine  (hydroaldehyde- 
collidine) 


Means 
Strychnine 

Tartaric  acid 
Tartaric  acid 
Tartaric  acid 
Tartaric  acid 
Tartaric  acid 
Tartaric  acid 


Author 

Besthorn,  '  Ber.'  28, 
3156. 

Ladenburg,  '  Ber.'  19, 
2975. 

Ladenburg,  'Ber.'  19, 
2975. 

Ladenburg,  '  Ber.'  19, 
2975. 

Bamberger, '  Ber.'  23, 
291. 

Feist  and  Arnstein, 
'  Ber.'  28,  3169. 

Levy  and  Wolffen- 
stein,  'Ber.'  28, 
2270 ;  29,  43. 


2.   DIVISION   BY   THE    USE    OF   ORGANISMS 

In  this  case  it  may  be  said  that  the  division  is 
due  to  the  same  causes  as  in  the  last — namely,  to  the 
different  deportment  of  the  active  isomers  towards 
the  active  compounds  (proteids)  of  the  organism. 
The  origination  of  this  method  is  also  due  to  Pasteur, 
who  observed  that  a  dilute  solution  of  ammonium 
racemate  with  a  trace  of  phosphate-leaves,  after  the 
growth  of  penicillium,  finally  a  solution  of  the  left- 
handed  salt. 

For  stereochemical  purposes  the  method  has  the 
advantage  that  it  is  not  limited  to  acids  and  bases ; 
on  the  other  hand,  one  of  the  isomers  is  lost,  whereas 
the  former  method  yielded  both.  Moreover  the  pre- 
paration of  a  pure  product  is  not  so  easy,  because 


DIVISION   OF  THE   INACTIVE   MIXTURE 


31 


continued  vegetation  often  destroys  the  other  isomer 
also.  The  process  seems  specially  suitable  in  cases 
where  a  qualitative  test  of  possible  activity  is  re- 
quired ;  accordingly  it  was  used  in  all  Le  Bel's 
investigations.  In  this  way  we  may  divide — 


Substance 
Racemic  acid, 

COaHCHOHCHOHCO-jH 

Amyl  alcohol, 

CH.CH3.C.2H5CH2OH 

Amyl  alcohol, 
CHOHCH3C3H7 

Butyl  alcohol, 


Hexyl  alcohol, 
CHOHCH3C4H9 


Butyleneglycol, 
CHOHCH3CH,OH 

Mandelic  acid, 


Gly eerie  acid, 

CHOH.CH2OH.C0.2H 


Lactic  acid, 

CH.OH.CHj.CO.pI 


Means  and  Product 

Penicillium, 
L-tartaric  acid 

Penicillium, 
R-alcohol 

Penicillium, 
L-alcohol 

Penicillium, 
L-alcohol 


Penicillium, 
L-alcohol 


Bacterium  termo, 
L-alcohol 

Aspergillus,  Mucor, 
Penicillium, 

R-acid ; 
Saccharomyces 

ellipsoi'deus, 
Schizomycetes, 
L-acid 

Penicillium, 

L-acid ; 

Bacillus  ethaceticus, 
R-acid 

Penicillium, 

L-acid  [?] 

R-acid 


Author 

Pasteur. 


Le      Bel,      '  Compt. 
Rend.'  87,  213. 

Le  Bel,  '  Compt. 
Rend.'  89,  312. 

Combes  and  Le  Bel, 
'  Bull.  Soc.  Chim.' 
[3],  7,  551. 

Combes  and  Le  Bel, 
'  Bull.  Soc.  Chim.' 
[3],  7,  551. 

Le  Bel,  *  Compt. 
Rend.'  92,  532. 

Lewkowitsch,   'Ber.' 

15,  1505. 

Lewkowitsch,    '  Ber.' 

16,  1569. 


Lewkowitsch,    '  Ber. 
16,  2721. 


Lewkowitsch,   'Ber. 

16,  2721. 
Linossier,  '  Bull.  Soc. 

Chim.'  [3],  6,  10 ; 

Schardinger, '  Mon. 

fur  Chem.'  11,  545. 


82  STEREOCHEMISTRY   OF   CARBON 

Substance  Means  and  Product  Author 

Leucine,  Penicillium,       Schulze     and    Boss- 

CH.NH,.C4H(J.CO.,H  left-handed  in        hard,  'Ber.'  18,  388. 

hydrochloric  acid 

Glutamic  acid,  Penicillium,       Schulze     and    Boss- 

CH.NH2.C02H.C2H4CO,H      left-handed  in         hard,  '  Ber.'  18,  388. 
hydrochloric  acid 

Aspartic  acid,  Penicillium,        Schulze    and    Boss- 

CH.NH2.C02H.CH2CO,H       left-handed  in         hard,   I.e.  ;    Engel, 
hydrochloric  acid     '  Compt.  Rend.'  106, 
1734. 

o-Acrose,  Beer  yeast,          Fischer,     'Ber.'    23, 

CH.,OH(CHOH)8COCH2OH       L-fructose  389. 

i-Mannose,  Beer  yeast,         Fischer,    '  Ber.'     23, 

CH,OH(CHOH)4COH  L-mannose  382. 

Ethoxysuccinic  acid,  Penicillium,        Purdie  and   Walker, 

CH.OC2H5.CO,H.CH2C02H          L-acid  '  Chem.     Soc.     J. 

Trans.'  1893,  230. 


TRANSLATOR'S  NOTE 

Fischer  and  Thierfelder  ]  have  shown  that  micro- 
organisms not  only  distinguish  between  isomers  of 
completely  opposed  activity,  but  that  the  transposi- 
tion of  two  groups,  attached  to  a  single  one  of  a 
number  of  asymmetric  carbon  atoms  in  a  molecule, 
is  of  moment  to  them. 

Thus  the  following  sugars  are  fermentable  by 
various  species  of  yeast  :— 

H     H     OH     H 

d-Glucose      CH2OH  C      C      C        C    COH 
OH  OH  H       OH 

1  Ber.  27,  2031 ;  see  also  Fischer,  ibid.  27,  2985,  3228,  3479  ; 
28,  1429. 


DIVISION   OF  THE   INACTIVE   MIXTURE  33 

H       H     OH   OH 

d-Mannose,  CH2OH  C       C       C       C       COH 
OH    OH  H      H 

H      OH    OH  H 

d-Galactose,  CH2OH  C       C       C       C      COH 
OH   H      H      OH 

But  the  same  yeast  species  are  incapable  of  attacking 
d-talose, 

H       HO    OH     OH 
CH2OH     C        C       C        C     COH 

OH    H      H        H 

which  differs  from  mannose  and  galactose  only  by 
the  transposition  of  the  groups  attached  to  a  single 
asymmetric  carbon  atom. 

This  result  is  the  more  surprising,  since  changes 
in  the  composition  of  the  sugar,  though  much  more 
marked,  do  not  affect  these  ferments,  which  act  on 
sugars  with  three  as  well  as  on  those  with  nine 
carbon  atoms. 

Similar  results  have  been  obtained  with  unorgan- 
ised ferments.  To  insure  fermentation,  then,  the 
substance  to  be  fermented  and  the  ferment  must 
have  their  configurations  adjusted  to  one  another 
like  lock  and  key.  It  follows  that  ferments  which 
act  on  the  same  substance  must  resemble  one 
another  in  configuration  like  two  keys ;  and  they 
may  act  on  one  another  to  their  mutual  destruction 
if  the  keys  turn  opposite  ways.  Experiments  made 
by  me  showed,  however,  no  such  destructive  action 
in  the  case  of  human  and  pig  pepsins. 


34  STEREOCHEMISTRY   OF   CARBON 


3.    SPONTANEOUS   DIVISION.      TEMPERATURE    OF 
CONVERSION 

While  the  method  of  division  last  mentioned 
depends  on  the  action  of  the  living  organism,  and 
the  first  method  is  also  connected  therewith,  in  that 
the  active  compounds  employed  are  mostly  products 
of  the  organism,  the  method  now  to  be  described 
does  not  demand  the  aid  of  life.  It  is  a  purely 
chemical  one,  which  isolates  the  active  compound 
without  assistance  from  animate  nature.  This 
method,  too,  was  discovered  by  Pasteur,  who,  on 
crystallising  a  solution  of  sodium  ammonium  race- 
mate,  found  the  two  tartrates  separated.  Although 
the  method  has  been  rarely  used  since  (first  by 
Purdie  to  divide  lactic  acid  ]),  yet  the  researches 
which  brought  to  light  the  facts  on  which  the  method 
is  based  have  a  special  interest. 

As  a  matter  of  history  we  may  remark  that 
Stadel,2  when  he  evaporated  the  solution  which  in 
Pasteur's  hands  had  yielded  the  two  tartrates,  ob- 
tained crystals  of  a  double  racemate  of  sodium  and 
ammonium. 

This  apparent  contradiction  was  harmonised  by 
Scacchi,3  who  showed  by  a  thorough  investigation  of 
the  racemate  in  question  that  a  high  temperature 
of  crystallisation  favours  the  formation  of  the  race- 
mate,  while  at  the  ordinary  temperature  one  obtains 

1  Trans.  Chem.  Soc.  1893,  1143.  2  Ber.  11,  1752. 

3  Bendiconti  delV  Accademia  di  Napoli,  1865,  p.  250. 


DIVISION   OF  THE   INACTIVE   MIXTURE  35 

chiefly  the  two  tartrates.  Indeed,  Wyrouboff  '  suc- 
ceeded in  showing  that  the  phenomenon  is  very 
simple  when  supersaturation  is  avoided.  There  is 
then  a  perfectly  definite  limiting  temperature,  viz. 
about  28°  ;  on  evaporation  one  obtains  the  racemate 
or  the  tartrate,  according  as  the  crystallisation  takes 
place  above  or  below  this  temperature. 

Temperature   of    transformation. — The   researches 
wilich  I  conducted  with  van  Deventer  2  have  shown 
that  we  have  here  to  do  with  a  peculiar  phenomenon 
which   may  occur   also   outside  the  solution.    The 
mixture  of  the  two  tartrates,  when  heated  a  little 
above  27°,  loses  a  part  of  its  water  of  crystallisation 
and  is  quantitatively  converted  into  the  racemate 
according  to  the  following  equation  : 
2C406H4NaNH44H20 
=  (C406H4NaNH4)22H20  +  6H20  ; 
while  below  this  temperature  the  reverse  takes  place. 
The   temperature    mentioned    is    that    noticed   by 
Wyrouboff,  and  the  transformation  observed  gives 
therefore  a  complete  explanation  of  his  results. 

This   conversion  is  also  to  be  detected  in   the 
following  ways  : 

1.  On  mixing  the  racemate  with  the  above-men- 
tioned proportion  of  water,  the  originally  soft  mass 
becomes  hard,  until  finally  a  perfectly  dry  mixture  of 
the  two  tartrates  remains. 

2.  A  mixture  of  the  two  tartrates  in  equal  quan- 
tities, heated  above  27°  in  sealed  tubes,  is  partly 

1  Bull.  Soc.  ChimAl,  210;  45,  52  ;    Compt.  Rend.  102,  627. 

2  Zeitschr.  f.  phys.  Chem.  1,  173. 

D  2 


36  STEREOCHEMISTRY   OF   CARBON 

liquefied  through  loss  of  water  of  crystallisation  and 
formation  of  the  racemate. 

3.  The  expansion  on  formation  of  the  racemate 
renders  possible  an  exact  study  of  the  phenomenon. 
The  dilatometer  used  consisted  of  a  huge  thermometer, 
in  the  bulb  of  which  was  placed  the  mixture  of  the 
two  tartrates,  this  being  covered  with  oil.  .The 
height  of  the  oil  in  the  stem  of  the  thermometer  was 
read  off  on  a  scale.  On  heating  this  dilatometer  for 
a  sufficiently  long  time  at  definite  temperatures,  one 
observes,  between  26'7°  and  27'7°,  a  slow  but  persis- 
tent and  very  considerable  expansion,  accompanied 
by  a  complete  change  in  the  contents  of  the  bulb ; 
partial  liquefaction  takes  place,  together  with  pro- 
duction of  the  racemate  in  well-formed  crystals.  On 
cooling,  the  reverse  phenomenon  is  observed. 

This  process  of  division  is  of  special  interest, 
because  it  represents  the  first  case  of  a  class  of 
phenomena  of  chemical  equilibrium,1  much  studied 
of  late,  and  characterised  by  a  definite  temperature, 
the  '  conversion  temperature,'  above  and  below 
which  only  one  of  the  two  systems  can  exist. 

Recently  van  't  Hoff,2  H.  Goldschmidt,  and 
Jorissen  have  adopted  another  method  for  investi- 
gating phenomena  of  this  kind.  Taking  the  case 
already  studied,  at  the  temperature  of  transformation 
equality  will  exist  in  the  vapour  tension  of  (1)  the 

1  Van  't  Hoff  and  van  Deventer,  Ber.  19,  2142  ;  Zeitschr.  f.  physik. 
Chem.  I,  165,  227  ;  Bakhuis  Roozeboom,  Bee.  Trav.  Chim.  Pays-Bas, 
6,  36,  91,  137  ;   Zeitschr.f.  physik.  Chem.  2,  336. 

2  Vorlesungen  iiber  Bildung  und    Spaltung    von  Doppelsalzen 
(Leipzig,  1897,  Engelmann). 


DIVISION  OF  THE  INACTIVE  MIXTURE  37 

water  of  crystallisation  of  the  dextro-  and  Igevo- 
tartrates,  (2)  a  saturated  solution  of  the  above  salts, 
(3)  a  saturated  solution  of  the  salt  of  Scacchi, 

(C4H1NaNH40(i.H20)2. 

Accordingly  the  bulbs  attached  to  the  two  limbs 
of  a  differential  tensimeter  were  charged  with  mix- 
tures representing  (1)  and  (2),  and  the  temperature 
was  observed  at  which  the  tension  in  the  two  limbs 
became  equal.  It  was  26-6°. 

If  the  temperature  be  raised  a  few  degrees  another 
transformation  takes  place,  the  double  racemate  of 
Scacchi  now  breaking  up  to  form  the  single  racemates : 

2(NaNH4H4C406.H20)2 

=  (Na2H4C406)2  +  ((NH4)2H4C406)2  +  4H20. 

At  the  temperature  of  conversion  there  is  equality 
in  the  vapour  tension  of 

(1)  A   saturated   solution  of    Scacchi's  salt  and 
'sodium  racemate. 

(2)  A  saturated   solution   of    Scacchi's  salt  and 
ammonium  racemate. 

(3)  A  saturated  solution  of  sodium  and  ammonium 
racemate. 

(4)  The  water  of  crystallisation  of  Scacchi's  salt. 
To  represent   (4)   one  division  of  the  tensimeter 

was  filled  with  4  gm.  of  the  salt  of  Scacchi  which 
had  been  dried  till  it  lost  half  its  water  (J  mol.). 
Thus  was  formed  the  acid  ammonium  salt  which  is 
necessary  in  order  to  reduce  the  ammonia  tension  to 
a  minimum.  The  other  division  contained  the  same 
filling,  with  the  addition  of  one  molecule  of  water ; 


38  STEEEOCHEMISTEY   OF   CARBON 

that  is,  it  was  Scacchi's  salt  plus  a  mixture  of  dextro- 
and-  Igevo-tartrates.  This  was  first  heated  to  about 
30°  so  as  to  form  a  saturated  solution  of  the  salt  of 
Scacchi  with  one  of  the  two  single  racemates.  The 
tensions  became  equal  at  34- 5°.  On  account  of  the 
presence  of  the  acid  ammonium  salt  this  temperature 
is  a  little  lower  than  that  found  by  the  dilatometer, 
viz.  36°.  It  was  found,  further,  that  by  heating  at 
once  above  27°  the  conversion  of  the  double  tartrates 
to  the  Scacchi  salt  could  be  avoided  and  the  single 
racemates  could  be  obtained  direct.  The  tempera- 
ture of  this  transformation  was  found  to  lie,  as  ex- 
pected, between  the  other  two,  viz.  at  29°. 

For  sodium  potassium  racemate  also,  the  exist- 
ence of  such  a  temperature  of  conversion  had  been 
indicated  by  WyroubofTs  researches.1  And  it  is 
found  by  van  't  Hoff  and  H.  Goldschmidt  that  at 
—  6°  C.  this  salt  is  formed  from  the  two  tartrates  : 

2NaKH4C406.4H20=(NaKH4C406.3H20)2  +  2H20. 

Wyrouboff's  salt. 

This  double  racemate  divides  at  41°  into  the  single 
racemates  : 

2(NaKH4C4O(5.3H20)2 

=  (Na2H4C406.2H20)2+  (K2H4C406.)2  +  8H20. 
And  at   an  intermediate  temperature,  viz.  33°,  the 
direct  conversion  takes  place  : 

4NaKH4C4Orr4H20 

=  (Na2H4C406.2H20)2  +  (K2H4C406.)2  +  12H20. 
A    similar    conversion    is     undergone,    e.g.  by 

1  Ann.  de  Cliim.  et  de  Phys.  [6],  9,  221. 


DIVISION   OF  THE   INACTIVE   MIXTURE  39 

magnesium  sulphate,  S04Mg7H20,  and  sodium  sul- 
phate, S04Na210H20,  these  being  converted  at  21° 
into  a  double  salt,  astracanite,  according  to  the 
equation : 

S04Mg7H20  +  S04Na210H20 
=  (S04)2MgNa24H20  +  13H2O. 

Below  21°,  on  the  other  hand,  the  double  salt 
treated  with  13  molecules  of  water  yields  the  two 
single  salts. 

This  case,  then,  is  quite  analogous  to  the  forma- 
tion of  the  racemate  from  the  two  constituents,  the 
right-  and  left-handed  tartrates,  at  27°. 

This  third  method  of  division  has  been  employed 
successfully  with  racemic  and  lactic  acids.  It  has 
been  observed  l  also  that  inactive  asparagine,  obtained 
by  the  action  of  ammonia  on  maleic  or  fumaric  ether, 
crystallises  in  hemihedral,  enantiomorphous  forms, 
of  which  the  two  kinds  are  present  in  equal  quan- 
tity. So  also  with  homoaspartic  acid.2  Also  the 
lactone  of  gulonic  acid 3  divides  on  crystallising  into 
the  two  crystals  of  opposite  activity ;  while  an  indi- 
cation of  the  same  thing  occurs  in  the  case  of 
dimethyldioxyglutaric  acid,  but  has  not  yet  been 
utilised  for  actually  dividing  it. 

More  recently  Fischer  and  Beensch  have  ob- 
served a  similar  transformation  in  the  case  of  a 
substance  free  from  water,  viz.  methyl  mannoside, 
which  above  15°  exists  only  in  the  racemic  form, 
but  below  8°  only  as  the  two  active  forms.  The 

1  Korner  and  Menozzi,  Bcr.  21,  Ref.  87. 

-  Accad.  Lined,  1893,  ii.  368.  3  Fischer,  tier.  25,  1026. 


40  STEEEOCHEMISTEY  OF  CAEBON 

exact  temperature  of   conversion  has  not  been  de- 
termined. 

4.    PEOOF    OF   DIVISIBILITY   BY    SYNTHESIS    OF    THE 
INACTIVE    MIXTUEE 

While  in  the  above  cases  direct  proof  of 
divisibility  was  afforded  by  actual  division,  the 
observations  now  to  be  mentioned  are  not  less 
convincing.  In  these,  by  bringing  together  two 
isomers  of  opposite  activity,  an  inactive  body  was 
produced  which  could  then  be  identified  with  the 
inactive  product  otherwise  obtained.  Thus  the 
inactive  mandelic  acid  was  obtained  by  Lewko- 
witsch  from  the  right  and  left  modifications  and 
found  to  be  identical  with  the  synthesised  inactive 
acid,  which  in  fact  was  afterwards  divided.  Since 
then,  whole  groups  of  such  racemic  mixtures  have 
been  prepared  by  Montgolfier,  Haller,  Jungfleisch,  and 
Friedel :  in  the  camphor  series — camphor,  borneol, 
bornylphenylurethane,  camphoric  acid,  &c.  ;  in  the 
terpene  series — dipentene  and  derivatives,  limonene, 
camphene,  &c.,  by  Wallach ;  and  finally  in  the 
sugar  group,  by  Fischer — arabite,  mannite,  mannose, 
glucose,  levulose,  &c. 

Since  the  result  of  bringing  together  two  opposed 
active  bodies  varies  according  as  this  occurs  below  or 
above  the  temperature  of  transformation — in  the  one 
case  a  mixture  resulting,  in  the  other  a  compound — it 
is  found  that,  in  general,  there  is  a  difference  in  the 
deportment  of  active  mixtures  at  a  given  temperature, 
say  the  ordinary  temperature.  These  mixtures 


DIVISION   OF  THE   INACTIVE  MIXTUKE  41 

belong  to  two  categories.  On  the  one  hand  an 
inactive  substance  is  produced  which,  excepting  in 
optical  properties,  is  exactly  similar  to  the  original 
bodies  as  regards  specific  weight,  and  also  chemically ; 
in  the  other  case,  however,  the  product  obtained  is 
entirely  different  from  them.  Probably  the  most 
remarkable  examples  of  this  double  behaviour  are 
those  discovered  by  Wallach  in  the  terpene  series, 
and  by  Fischer  in  the  sugar  group. 

To  show  the  way  in  which  racemic  compounds 
differ  from  their  components,  the  following  list,  given 
by  Walden,1  may  be  cited. 

I.  Inactive  malic  acid,  C02H.CH2.CHOH.C02H 
M.P.    130°-131°.      Specific  gravity,  2°C    (d)  =  1-601. 
Molecular    volume,  Vm  =  83 -70.     Affinity  constant, 
(K)  =  0-040. 

L-  or  natural  malic  acid.  M.P.  100°.  d  =  1-595. 
Vm  =  84-01.  K  =0-040.  Solubility  greater  than  the 
inactive. 

II.  I-chlorosuccinicacid,  C02H.CH2.CHC1.C02H. 
M.P.  153°-154°.   d  =  1-679.   Ym=90-83.    K=0-294. 
Solubility  (20°  C.),  1  in  2-3. 

D-chlorosuccinic  acid.  M.P.  176°.  d  =  1-687. 
Vm  =  90-40.  K  =  0-294.  Solubility,  1  in  4-5. 

L-chlorosuccinic  acid.  M.P.  176°.  d  =  1-687. 
Vm  =  90-40.  K  =  0-294.  Solubility,  1  in  4-6. 

III.  I-bromosuccinic  acid,  C02H.CH2.CHBrC02H. 
M.P.  160°-161°.    d=2-073.    Vm=95«03.    K=0'268. 
Solubility,  1  in  5-2. 

1  Ber.  29,  1692 ;  compare  J.  Traube,  I.e.  p.  1394 ;  H.  Traube, 
I.e.  p.  2446.  See  also  Kipping  and  Pope  on  '  Bacemism  and  Pseudo- 
racemism,'  J.  Chem.  Soc.  1897,  p.  989. 


42  STEREOCHEMISTRY   OF   CARBON 

L-bromosuccinic  acid.  M.P.  172°.  d  =  2-093. 
Vm  =  94-12.  K  =  0-268.  Solubility,  1  in  6-3. 

IV.  I-mandelic  acid,  C6H5.CHOH.C02H.    M.P. 
118°-119°.       d  =  1-300.     Vm  =  116-9.     K  =  0-043. 
Solubility,  15-97  in  100. 

L-mandelic  acid.  M.P.  130°.  d  =  1-341.  Vm 
=  113-3.  K  =  0-043.  Solubility,  8-64  in  100. 

V.  I-glutamic  acid, 

C02H.CH2.CH2.CH(NH2).C02H. 

M.P.  198°.    d  =  1-511.  Vm  =  97-29.  K,  see  Walden, 
1  Z.  physik.  Chem.'  8,  489.      Solubility,  1  in  591. 

D-glutamic  acid.  M.P.  202°.  d  =  1-538.  Ym 
=  95-58.  K,  see  Walden,  I.e.  Solubility,  1  in  100. 

VI.  I-camphoric  acid,  C8H14(C02H)2.  M.P.  202°- 
203°.    d  =,1-228.   Vm  =  162-9.    K  =  0-00229.    Solu- 
bility, 0-239  in  100. 

D-camphoric  acid.  M.P.  187°.  d  =  1-186.  Vm 
=  168-6.  K=0-00229.  Solubility,  6-96  in  100. 

L-camphoric  acid.  M.P.  187°.  d= 1-190.  Vm 
=  168-1.  K= 0-00228.  Solubility,  6-95  in  100. 

VII.  I-isocamphoric   acid.    M.P.  190°-191°.      d 
=  1-249.   Vm=160-l.   K=0-00174.    Solubility,  0-203 
in  100. 

D-isocamphoric  acid.  M.P.  171°.  d= 1-243.  Vm 
=  160-9.  K  =  0-00174.  Solubility,  0-357  in  100. 

L-isocamphoric  acid.  M.P.  171°.  d= 1-243.  Vm 
=  160-9.  K= 0-00174.  Solubility,  0-337  in  100. 

VIII.  Eacemic  acid, 
C02H.CHOH.CHOH.C02H  +  H20. 

M.P.  204°.    d=l-697.  Vm  =  99«00.    K  =  0-097.    Solu- 
bility less  than  the  active  acids. 


DIVISION   OF  THE   INACTIVE   MIXTURE  43 

D-tartaric  acid,  C02H.CHOH.CHOHC02H. 
M.P.  170°.  d=l-755.  Vm  =  85-47.  K  =  0-097. 

L-tartaric  acid.  M.P.  170°.  d  =  1-754.  Vm 
=  85-52.  K=0-097. 

Mesotartaric  acid, 

C02H.CHOH.CHOH.C02H  +  H20. 

M.P.  140°.  d=l-666.  Vm  =  100-8.  K=0-060.  More 
soluble  than  racemic  acid. 

As  to  the  melting  point,  it  was  to  be  expected 
that  the  mixture  should  melt  lower  than  its  con- 
stituents, addition  of  foreign  bodies  always  lowering 
the  melting  point.  But  from  the  above  examples 
we  see  that  the  racemic  form  has  sometimes  a 
higher,  sometimes  a  lower  melting  point  than  its 
components  ;  the  form  of  higher  melting  point  being 
less  soluble,  and  having  the  smaller  molecular 
volume.  (See  also  Kipping  and  Pope,  *  Proc.  Chem. 
Soc.'  1895,  p.  39.) 

As  to  the  boiling  point,  it  is  similarly  to  be  ex- 
pected that  the  compound  will  have  a  higher  boiling 
point,  but  the  mixture  the  same  as  the  constituents, 
corresponding  to  the  halving  of  their  maximal  tension. 

If  we  take  this  halving  of  the  maximal  tension  as  a 
basis  for  calculating  the  extent  to  which  the  melting 
point  is  lowered  in  the  cases  given  above,  we  have 


where  T  is  the  absolute  melting  temperature,  W  the 
latent  heat  of  liquefaction  per  kilogram-molecule. 
In  fact  this  equation  gives  values  which  fairly 


44  STEEEOCHEMISTEY   OF   CAEBON 

correspond  with  the  observations  in  the  case  of  the 
gulonic  acid  lactones.  Taking  the  known  heat  of 
liquefaction  for  organic  compounds,1  we  get  numbers 
between  15°  and  45°.  This  could  be  exactly  tested 
by  determining  the  heat  of  liquefaction  of  the 
gulonic  lactones,  and  so  perhaps  we  should  arrive  at 
a  new  means  of  determining  racemic 'character. 

Proof  of  divisibility  without  direct  division. — In 
the  above  cases  it  was  possible  to  prove  divisibility 
indirectly,  by  synthesis  of  the  inactive  compounds  ; 
but  even  if  only  one  of  the  products  of  division  is 
known,  we  may  obtain  the  desired  proof,  in  the  case 
of  acids  at  least,  by  examining  the  conductivity. 
Since  the  divisible  compounds,  such  as  racemic 
acid,  are  decomposed  in  solution,2  and  the  conduc- 
tivity of  the  two  active  components  is  the  same,  it 
is  sufficient  to  prove  that  the  conductivity  of  the 
inactive  body  is  equal  to  that  of  the  active  one. 
As  is  well  known,  the  electrical  deportment  varies 
so  strongly  with  the  constitution,  that  identity  in 
one  respect  makes  identity  in  the  other  extremely 
probable. 

That  inactive  malic  acid 3  showed  in  Ostwald's 
research  the  same  conductivity  as  the  active  acid, 
convinces  us  therefore  of  the  divisibility  of  the 
former.  The  same  conclusion  is  to  be  drawn  from 
Eykman's4  examination  of  inactive  quinic  acid, 
which  also  was  found  to  be  equal  to  the  active  acid. 

The  peculiar  behaviour  of  compounds  containing 

1  Eylsm.Kn.)Zeitschr.physik.  Chem.  3,  209.      2  Kaoult,  ibid.  371. 
3  Zeitschr.  physik.  Chem.  3,  370.  4  Ber.  24, 1289. 


DIVISION   OF   THE   INACTIVE   MIXTURE  45 

an    asymmetric  carbon  atom,  resulting  from  sym- 
metrical bodies  in  ordinary  laboratory  experiments, 
is  now  explained,  and  it  only  remains  to  mention 
that,  in  what  may  be  called  asymmetric  conditions 
of  formation,  we  may  expect  another  and  a  simpler 
state  of  things,  and  that  we  find  it.     The  speed  of 
formation  of  the  two  isomers  is  in  this  case  gene- 
rally different  and  the  product  directly  active.     This 
is  illustrated  by  the  direct  formation  of  active  bodies 
in  the  organism,  an  apparatus  consisting  essentially 
of   active   materials ;    thus,   from  inactive  carbonic 
acid,  water,  ammonia,  and  nitrates,  the  plant  forms 
the  innumerable  active  compounds  with  which  we 
are  familiar — terpenes,  carbohydrates,  alkaloids.     In 
the  animal  organism,  which  consumes  principally 
active  material,  the  opportunity  for  such  observa- 
tions is  evidently  more  limited  ;  yet  Baumann  and 
Preusse l  were  able  to  show  that   inactive   bromo- 
benzene  is  converted  in  the  body  into  bromophenyl- 
mercapturic  acid.2 

It  is  exceedingly  probable  that  in  other  asym- 
metric conditions  of  experiment  the  same  direct 
formation  of  active  bodies  will  result ;  e.g.  in  trans- 
formations taking  place  under  the  action  of  right  or 
left  circular  polarised  light,  or  caused  by  active  com- 

1  Zeitschr.  physiol  Chem.  5,  309  ;  Ber.  15,  1731. 

2  The  production  of  the   active  acid  may,  however,  be  due  to 
preliminary  formation  of  active  alanine,   and   therefore  cannot  be 
taken  as  proof  of  the  production  of  active  from  inactive  compounds 
by  the  animal  organism  (J.  f.  physiol.   Chem.  21,  255).      On  the 
other  hand  it  has  been  observed  that,  after  poisoning  by  carbon 
monoxide,  the  injection  of  inactive  sodium  lactate  produces  separa- 
tion of  active  acid  (I.e.  19,  455  ;  20,  374). 


46  STEREOCHEMISTRY   OF   CARBON 

pounds,  perhaps  even  if  only  taking  place  in  active 
solvents.1 

Indivisibility  when  the  asymmetric  carbon  atom  is 
absent. — If  on  the  one  hand  it  may  be  said  that 
up  till  now  no  compound  with  an  asymmetric  car- 
bon atom,  when  suitably  treated,  has  escaped  divi- 
sion (with  the  exception  of  certain  compounds  of 
symmetrical  type  which  will  be  considered  later),  it 
is  important  on  the  other  hand  to  observe  that 
division  has  been  repeatedly  attempted  in  the  absence 
of  dissymmetry,  but  so  far  without  success. 

We  may  again  mention  here  the  compounds 
enumerated  on  page  23,  obtained  from  active  bodies 
by  fermentation  &c.,  and  yet  inactive ;  we  may  add 
the  inactive  vegetable  products.  Of  special  impor- 
tance, however,  are  the  experiments  undertaken  with 
the  express  purpose  of  obtaining  division  :  e.g.  of 
oxalic  acid  by  Anschiitz  and  Hintze ; 2  of  fumaric 
acid 3  by  the  same  ;  of  orthotoluidine  4  by  Le  Bel ; 
of  inosite 5  by  Maquenne ;  of  homosalicylic  acid, 
C6H3(CH3)(C02H)OH(1,  2,  3),  of  homo-oxybenzoic 
acid,  C6H3(OH)(CH3)C02H(1,  2,  3),  and  of  methoxy- 

1  Pope  and  Kipping  (Proc.  Chem.  Soc.  December  1896)  find  that 
substances  active  only  in  the  solid  form,  which  ordinarily  deposit 
from  solution  dextro-  and  Isevo-gyrate  crystals  in  equal  numbers, 
may  be  made  to  yield  an  excess  of  one  form  by  dissolving  an  active 
substance  with  them.       Thus  5  per  cent,  of  dextrose  in  the  solu- 
tion caused  a  preponderance  of  1-sodium  chlorate  in  the  separated 
crystals,  while  5  per  cent,  of  isodulcite  caused  the  dextro-chlorate 
to  preponderate.     They  suggest  that  racemic  bodies  may  be  divided 
in  this  way.     (Compare  Eakle,  Chem.  Centralbl.  1896,  ii.  649.) 

2  Ber.  18,  1394.  3  Ann.  239,  164. 

4  Bull.  Soc.  Chim.  38,  98.  5  Compt.  Eend.  104,  225. 


DIVISION   OF  THE   INACTIVE  MIXTUKE  47 

toluylic  acid,  C6H3(OCH3)(CH3)C02H(1,  2,  3),  by 
Lewkowitsch.1  All  these  attempts  were  unsuccessful. 
Mutual  conversion  of  active  bodies.  Position  of 
equilibrium.— From  the  exactly  corresponding  con- 
figuration of  the  two  isomers,  it  is  at  once  clear  that 
the  stability  of  both  is  the  same.  Now  this  stability 
is,  in  general,  slight ;  it  has  long  been  known  that 
on  warming  sufficiently  the  activity  is  lost  while 
the  composition  remains  the  same.  It  has  gradu- 
ally become  certain  that  we  have  here  to  do  with 
the  formation  of  the  racemic  mixture.  On  heating 
tartaric  acid,  racemic  acid  2  is  formed  ;  on  heating 
active  amylalcohol  (as  sodium  derivative)  the  result 
is  an  inactive  product,  which  Le  Bel 3  has  divided  ; 
mandelic  acid  yields  an  inactive  mixture,  divided  by 
Lewkowitsch  ; 4  Schulze  and  Bosshard 5  obtained  by 
heating  active  leucine  an  inactive  isomer,  which 
was  also  divided  by  them ;  Michael  and  Wing 6 
obtained  aspartic  acid,  divided  by  Engel ; 7  Wallach 
the  divisible  dipentene  from  active  isomers.  In 
short,  we  have  here  a  general  method  for  preparing 
from  one  isomer  a  derivative  of  opposed  activity — 
viz.  racemising  by  heat  and  dividing  the  product. 
Further,  Walden  8  has  made  the  curious  observa- 
tion that  laevomalic  acid  produces  with  PC15  the 

J.  Chem.  Soc.  Trans.  1888,  781. 

Jungfleisch,  Compt.  fiend.  75,  439,  1739. 

Bull.  Soc.  Chim.  31,  104 ;  Compt.  Rend.  87,  213. 

Ber.  15,  1505. 

Ibid.  18,  588;  Zeitschr.  physiol.  Chem.  10,134. 

Ber.  18,  2984.  7  Compt.  Rend.  106,  1734. 

Ber.  28,  2766  ;  29,  133. 


48  STEREOCHEMISTRY   OF   CARBON 

chlorosuccinic  acid  corresponding  to  dextromalic 
acid ;  ethyl  lactate  behaves  in  the  same  way.1 
Similarly  Anschiitz,  on  treating  fumaric  acid  with 
bromine,  observed  the  formation  of  the  dibromo- 
succinic  acid  corresponding  to  inactive  tartaric  acid  ; 
whereas,  according  to  page  107  post,  the  racemic 
compound  was  to  have  been  expected. 

It  is  important  to  add  that  so-called  catalytic 
influences  may  bring  about  a  similar  racernising,  as 
in  the  conversion  of  hyoscyamine  into  atropine  by 
bases,2  and  of  tartaric  into  racemic  acid  by  the  oxides 
of  iron  and  aluminium ; 3  in  fact  these  catalytic  in- 
fluences occasionally  cause  the  formation  of  racemic 
acid  in  the  commercial  preparation  of  tartaric  acid. 

Further,  the  isomerisation  in  question,  leading  to 
the  production  of  inactive  bodies,  takes  place  more 
easily  during  their  formation  than  with  the  ready- 
formed  bodies,  which  is  in  perfect  accord  with  all 
our  conceptions  of  the  nascent  state.  Thus  on  heat- 
ing albuminoids  with  baryta,  the  result  was  inactive 
tyrosine,  leucine,  and  inactive  glutamic  acid,  while 
when  Schulze  and  Bosshard  used  hydrochloric  acid 
for  the  conversion,  all  the  derivatives  were  obtained 
in  the  active  state  ;  in  the  former  case,  then,  isomeri- 
sation with  loss  of  activity  was  brought  about  by  the 
united  action  of  heat,  alkali,  and  the  nascent  con- 
dition. In  those  cases  which  have  not  yet  been 
cleared  up  by  direct  experiment  there  is  yet  hardly 
room  for  doubt.  That  nitro-  and  pyro-tartaric  acid 

1  Purdie,  J.  Chem.  Soc.  1896,  p.  818. 

2  Ber.  21,  2777.  3  Jungfleisch,  Compt.  Rend.  85,  805. 


DIVISION   OF   THE   INACTIVE   MIXTURE  49 

are  inactive,  although  asymmetrical  and  prepared 
from  tartaric  acid,  is  probably  due  to  the  same  cause. 
Hence  also  arises  the  inactivity  of  bromosuccinic 
acid  made  from  malic  acid ;  it  has  already  been 
mentioned  on  p.  24  that  in  the  corresponding  re- 
action the  chlorine  product  was  obtained  active.  It 
should  be  specially  mentioned  here  that,  when  halo- 
gens are  brought  into  union  with  the  asymmetric 
carbon,  isomerisation  takes  place  very  readily,  as  is 
shown  by  the  substances  mentioned  on  p.  24 — 
dichlorosuccinic  acid,  iodohexyl,  phenylchlor-,  brom-, 
and  isopropylphenylchlor-acetic  acid. 

The  case  is  of  course  quite  otherwise  with  Hart- 
mann's  l  anhydride  of  active  camphoric  acid,  which 
changes  back  into  the  active  camphoric  acid ;  it 
chanced  to  be  inactive  under  the  particular  con- 
ditions, as,  according  to  Colson,2  may  be  the  case 
with  the  isobutylamyl  ester. 

-  Finally,  it  is  of  special  interest  to  consider  the 
matter  from  a  more  general  kinetic  and  thermo- 
dynamic  point  of  view.  The  state  of  equilibrium  of 
active  isomers  in  a  racemic  mixture  is  the  simplest 
conceivable.  Kinetically  it  is  evident  that,  if  the 
stability  is  slight  and  leads  to  conversion,  equilibrium 
will  be  attained  when  the  inactive  mixture  is  formed. 
Since,  from  the  complete  mechanical  symmetry,  the 
tendency  to  conversion  is  equal  in  the  two  isomers, 
the  one  present  in  larger  quantity  will  always  be 
converted  in  larger  quantity,  until  equal  quantities 
of  each  are  present.3 

1  Ber.  1888,  221.  2  Compt.  Bend.  February  1893. 

3  Van  't  Hoff,  Ber.  10,  1620. 


50  STEREOCHEMISTRY   OF  CARBON 

Thermodynamically  we  have  here  a  case  most 
remarkable  for  its  simplicity.  Seeing  that  the 
equilibrium  depends  upon  the  work,  E,  which  can 
be  performed  by  the  conversion,  and  which  in  our 
case,  owing  to  the  mechanical  symmetry,  is  evidently 
nil,  the  equilibrium-constant  K,  which  determines 
the  proportion  of  the  two  active  substances,  must  be 
unity,  according  to  the  equation  : 


where  T  is  the  absolute  temperature.1 

A  word  in  parenthesis.  We  have  here  one  of 
those  rare  cases  in  which  alteration  of  the  tempera- 
ture does  not  change  the  equilibrium-constant  ;  and 
this  is  simply  because  this  change  depends  on  the 
heat  of  conversion,  q  (which  is  here  nil  —  again 
owing  to  the  mechanical  symmetry),  according  to 
the  equation  : 

d  log  K         q 
~dT      =  2T*' 

This  is  the  simplest  form  of  equilibrium. 

INACTIVE,    INDIVISIBLE    TYPE 

When  Le  Bel's  paper  and  mine  were  laid  before 
the  Societe  Chimique  in  Paris,  Berthelot  2  observed 
that  our  views  took  no  account  of  the  '  indivisible 
nactive  type.'  It  was  Pasteur  who  described  this 

1  Van  't  Hoff,  Arch.  NcerL  1886  ;  Kongl.  SvensUa  Akad.  HandL 
1886.^ 

2  Etudes  de  dynamique  chimique. 


DIVISION  OF  THE   INACTIVE  MIXTURE  51 

modification  in  the  case  of  tartaric  acid,  an  indivisible 
inactive  tartaric  acid  being  known,  as  representative 
of  the  fourth  type,  in  addition  to  the  two  active  acids 
and  the  combination  of  these  two.  In  fact,  in  this 
special  case,  in  the  presence  of  two  asymmetric 
carbon  atoms  our  theory  foresees  the  existence  of 
an  indivisible  inactive  compound. 

Since  then  some  chemists  have  assumed  the 
existence  of  this  indivisible  inactive  modification  as 
quite  general.  This  type  is,  indeed,  not  to  be  ex- 
plained by  the  theory  in  cases  where  the  constitu- 
tional formula  contains  only  one  asymmetric  carbon 
atom.  In  this  respect  the  objection  of  Berthelot 
was  perfectly  justified.  The  next  thing  was  to  find 
a  representative  of  the  inactive  type  in  bodies  con- 
taining only  a  single  asymmetric  carbon  atom,  and 
Berthelot  instanced  the  inactive  malic  acid,  which 
was,  indeed,  the  only  compound  presenting  a  serious 
objection  to  our  theory.  This  malic  acid  had  been 
obtained  by  Pasteur  from  the  inactive  aspartic  acid 
of  Dessaignes.  This  malic  acid  was  inactive,  and 
Pasteur  mentions  it  as  indivisible.1  But  his  paper 
did  not  give  me  the  impression  that  he  wished  to 
bind  himself  very  strongly  to  this  statement. 

Nevertheless,  the  existence  of  the  indivisible 
inactive  malic  acid,  in  addition  to  the  inactive  com- 
pound resulting  from  compensation,  had  from  that 
time  been  generally  accepted.2 

1  Ann.  de  Chim.  et  de  Phys.  [3],  34,  46. 

' a  See,  e.g.  Landolt,  Das  optische  Drehungsvermogen  organischer 
Substanzen,  p.  20. 

K  2 


52  STEREOCHEMISTRY   OF   CARBON 

Through  the  more  recent  researches  of  Bremer, 
Anschiitz,  and  H.  J.  van  't  Hoff,  this  difficulty  has 
now  been  removed.  Not  only  has  Pasteur's  acid 
been  studied  afresh,  but  all  inactive  malic  acids, 
prepared  according  to  the  methods  at  present  known, 
were  identified  with  the  inactive  acid  which  results 
from  mixing  equal  quantities  of  right-  and  left- 
handed  acids ;  while  more  than  one  of  these  acids 
was  found  capable  of  division.  My  brother l  proved 
the  identity  of  the  synthesised  inactive  acid  with 
that  of  Pasteur.  He  prepared  its  acid  ammonia 
salt  in  the  two  forms  which  are  observed  in  the  case 
of  Pasteur's  acid,  according  as  the  salt  is  anhydrous 
or  hydrated.  He  proved 2  the  same  thing  for  the 
inactive  acid  which  had  been  obtained  by  Loydl  by 
heating  fumaric  acid  with  caustic  soda,  and  this 
identity  was  confirmed  by  the  division  effected  by 
Bremer.3  The  same  crystalline  form  was  observed 
in  Kekule's  acid  ammonium  malate  prepared  from 
bromosuccinic  acid. 

Anschiitz4  found  on  a  crystallographic  com- 
parison of  these  salts,  made  from  the  acids  of 
Pasteur,  Kekule,  and  Jungfleisch  (the  last  obtained 
by  heating  fumaric  acid  with  water),  that  here  also 
identity  exists.  Jungfleisch,5  too,  found  his  acid 
ammonium  malate  to  be  crystallographically  identical 
with  that  of  Pasteur,  though  he  does  not  give  the 
measurements. 

1  Maandblad    voor   Natuurwetenschappen,   1885,  Bijdrage    to 
de  kennis  der  inaktieve  Appelzuren.     Diss.  1885. 

2  Ber.  18,  2170.  3  Bee.  Trav.  Chim.  Pays-Bas,  4,  180. 
4  Ber.  18,  1949.  a  Butt.  Soc.  Chim.  30,  147. 


DIVISION   OF  THE   INACTIVE   MIXTURE  53 

This  evidence  has  been  strengthened  by  an 
observation  of  Piutti,1  who  recognised  in  the  in- 
active aspartic  acid,  obtained  by  mixing  the  right 
and  left  isomers,  the  acid  prepared  by  Dessaignes, 
which  was  the  one  used  by  Pasteur  for  making 
malic  acid.  We  may  add  that  the  malic  acid 2 
prepared  by  heating  maleic  acid  with  caustic  soda 
has  been  found  identical  with  the  divisible  malic 
acid,  an  observation  which  has  since  been  confirmed 
by  the  probable  identity  of  the  methyl-  and  ethyl- 
-malic  acids  which  Purdie 3  obtained  on  treating 
fumaric  and  maleic  acids  with  sodium  methylate 
and  ethylate.  Thus  the  isomerism  of  these  acids 
disappears  in  the  malic  acid  derivatives  formed  from 
them. 

Then,  too,  what  Fischer  observed  in  the  case  of 
galactonic  acid  is  most  important.  From  mucic 
acid,  which  in  accordance  with  its  symmetrical 
formula,  C02H(CHOH)4C02H,  can  be  inactive  and 
indivisible,  as  indeed  it  is,  he  obtained  a  galactonic 
acid,  C02H(CHOH)4CH2OH,  not  of  the  inactive 
indivisible  type,  but  a  product  which  was  capable 
of  division  ;  surely  a  proof  that  even  under  the  most 
favourable  conditions  no  inactive  indivisible  type 
results,  unless  its  existence  is  justified  by  the  sym- 
metrical constitution. 

1  Compt.  Rend.     103,  134.  2  Ber.  18,  2173. 

3  Chem.  Soc.  J.  1885,  855, 


54 


STEREOCHEMISTRY  OF   CARBON 


CHAPTEK  III 

COMPOUNDS   WITH  SEVERAL  ASYMMETRIC 
CARBON  ATOMS 

I.  APPLICATION  OF  THE  FUNDAMENTAL 
CONCEPTION 

Spatial    arrangement.     Free    rotation. — From   the 
hypothesis   that  the  groups  attached  to  an  asym- 
metric carbon  atom  correspond  to  an  unsymmetric 
tetrahedron,  it  follows  at  once  that  for  a  compound 
with    two     asymmetric     carbon 
atoms    joined     to     each     other, 
CGE^KaB,,  0B4B5B6,  the  arrange- 
ment is  determined  as  far  as  this : 
each  carbon  atom  must  form  at 
once  the   centre  of  one  and  the 
corner  of  the  other  tetrahedron, 
as   shown   in  the  accompanying 
figure. 

Every  other  arrangement, 
however,  obtained  by  rotation  (of 
the  lower  tetrahedron,  e.g.)  round  the  axis  C — C 
must  be  equally  in  harmony  with  the  fundamental 
conception.  But  in  order  to  avoid  this  idea  of  an 
infinite  isomerism,  no  additional  hypothesis  is 


Fig.  7. 


UNIVERSITY 
SEVEEAL  ASYMMETEIC   cbssfiSmS  55 


necessary.  Free  rotation  being  admitted  by  the 
fundamental  conception,  the  mutual  action  of  the 
groups  Ej  E2  E3  on  the  one  hand,  and  E4  E5  E6  on  the 
other  will  lead  to  a  single  '  favoured  configuration.' 
It  is  for  the  present  indifferent  which  we  call  the 
'  favoured  configuration,'  and  we  may  take  as  such 
the  arrangement  represented  by  the  figure,  where  E! 
is  above  E4,  E2  above  E5,  E3  above  E6. 

We  may  use  now  either  the  model  recommended 
on  p.  8,  or,  following  Friedlander,  we  may  improvise 
one  from  caoutchouc  tubes  and  sealing-wax,  each 
tetrahedral  grouping  being  represented  by  four  short 
tubes  meeting  at  equal  angles.1  Or,  instead  of 
models,  we  may,  as  has  been  proposed  by  Fischer 
and  also  by  myself,  choose  as  the  most  suitable  way 
of  representing  these  isomers,  a  projection,  in  which 
the  front  groups  E3  and  E6  are  turned  upwards  or 
downwards,  and  so  appear  on  paper  thus  : 

E3 

E,     C     B2 
E4     C     E5 


These  projections  may  conveniently  be  used  for 
illustrating  the  possible  isomers.  That  there  are 
four  of  these  is  at  once  evident,  since  each  asym- 
metric carbon  involves  a  doubling. 

These  differences  are  represented   by  changing 
the  order  of  the  groups  Ej  E2  E3.     But  if,  without 

1  It  is  convenient  to  attach  the  tubes  to  a  hollow  caoutchouc 
ball  (Jowett's  model). 


56  STEREOCHEMISTRY   OF   CARBON 

changing  this  order,  we  simply  move  E,  to  E2, 
K2  to  K3,  E3  to  E4,  we  only  bring  about  the  above- 
mentioned  rotation  and  no  isomerism  results.  But 
if  E!  and  E2  change  places  we  get  a  new  isomer  ; 
also  by  transposing  E4  and  E3  ;  hence  the  following 
symbols  represent  the  four  isomers  : 

No.  1  No.  2  No.  3  No.  4 

E3        E3        E3        E3 

E!  C  E2  E2  C  Et  E!  C  E2  E2  C  ^ 

E4  C  E5  E4  C  E;.  E5  C  E4  E5  C  E4 

E(,        Eg        Eg        E6 

It  is  plain  that  these  are  reduced  to  two  directly 
the  asymmetry  of  one  of  the  carbon  atoms  ceases 
through  E.  and  E4  becoming  identical  ;  the  difference 
between  No.  1  and  No.  3  on  the  one  hand,  and 
between  No.  2  and  No.  4  on  the  other,  then  vanishes. 
Several  asymmetric  carbon  atoms.  —  The  special 
advantage  of  these  projections  lies  in  the  fact  that 
they  may  almost  be  said  to  gain  in  simplicity  when 
the  cases  become  more  complicated.  For  represent- 
ing the  isomerism  in  the  simplest  cases  they  are  not 
well  adapted  ;  here  they  have  to  compete  with  the 
cardboard  model.  For  three  asymmetric  carbons 
they  are  decidedly  superior.  The  number  being  then 
again  doubled  we  have  to  expect  eight  isomers  ;  in 
general,  271  for  n  asymmetric  carbons.  The  middle 
carbon  atom  then  holds  two  groups  : 


If  now  the  configurations  are  worked  out  in  three 
dimensions  —  according  to  Friedlander,  e.g.  —  and  then 


SEVERAL  ASYMMETRIC  CARBON  ATOMS     57 

utilising  the  free  rotation,  one  of  the  simplest  pos- 
sible positions  is  chosen,  where  B!  B2,  B7  B8,  and 
B4  B5  are  in  parallel  lines,  the  projection  leads  to  a 
formula  like  that  below,  and  the  eight  isomers  result 
on  simply  transposing  B,  and  B2,  B7  and  B8,  B4  and 

9  *No.  1  No.  2  No.  3  No.  4 

R~D  ~D  ~R 

a  -"a  -^3  -"a 

BI     0    B2  B2  0  Ej  JLij     O '  -Qi2  JAi2  O    -tvj 

B.  C  B8  B7  C  B8  B7  C  B8  B7  C  B8 

B4  C  B5  B4  C  B5  B5  C  B4  B5  C  B4 

E6>  E6        B6  E6 

No.  5        No.  6         No.  7         No.  8 

Bj  C  E2   E2  C  Bj   Bj  C  B2   B2  C  Et 
Eg  Q  B7   Eg  O  E7   Eg  O  E7   Eg  O  Jixi7 

E/^i       T>  *D          f^       T?  T?          (~^       T?  T?          /^       T? 

4       l^       JIX-  XV4       V><       -L\J5  -LV5       W       _LV4  JQjg       \J       JAi4 

B6  B6  E6  B6 

II.  EXPERIMENTAL  CONFIRMATION 

A.    NUMBER   AND    CHARACTER   OF   THE    ISOMERS 
TO   BE   EXPECTED 

The  actual  preparation  of  the  isomers  (which,  as 
we  have  seen,  should  number  four,  eight,  or  sixteen, 
according  as  two,  three,  or  four  asymmetric  carbon 
atoms  are  present)  is  simple,  provided  this  can  be 
effected  by  combining  several  compounds,  each  con- 
taining one  asymmetric  carbon.  Let  us  take,  for 
instance,  as  a  starting  point,  the  two  active  malic 
acids ;  with  these  and  the  two  active  amylalcohols 
we  can  evidently  prepare  four  amylmalic  acids.  If 
now  we  introduce  in  place  of  the  hydroxyl  hydrogen 


58  STEEEOCHEMISTEY   OF   CAEBON 

atom  the  radical  of  any  acid  obtainable  in  two  forms 
of  opposite  activity,  e.g.  lactic  acid,  we  should  have 
the  eight  bodies,  which,  on  saturating  with  the  two 
conines  of  opposite  activity,  would  give  us  the 
required  number  of  sixteen. 

As  to  the  characters  of  the  isomers,  a  considera- 
tion of  the  above,  as  well  as  a  glance  at  the  formulae 
Nos.  1  to  4  and  Nos.  5  to  8,  shows  that  the  isomers 
would  be  grouped  in  pairs.  The  symbols  No.  1  and 
No.  4,  No.  2  and  No.  3,  in  the  first  series,  and  those 
which  may  easily  be  found  in  the  second  series,  are 
reflections  one  of  the  other,  and  stand  to  each  other 
therefore  as  the  two  isomers  with  one  asymmetric 
carbon  atom,  and  are,  like  them,  so  similar  that  one 
might  be  taken  for  the  other.  The  existence  of  the 
second  asymmetric  carbon  atom  only  betrays  itself 
by  the  appearance  of  a  second  type,  which  is  also 
present  in  two  forms,  but  in  general  differs  from  the 
first  type  in  activity,  melting  point,  and  solubility. 
For  example,  in  the  case  of  the  experiment  which  we 
have  supposed  to  be  carried  out,  No.  1  and  No.  4 
would  correspond  to  left-amyl  left-malic  acid  and 
right-right  acid  ;  No.  2  and  No.  3  to  right-amyl  left 
acid  and  left-amyl  right  acid. 

The  following  have  been  obtained : 

Two  asymmetric  carbon  atoms.— The  four  active 
borneols  and  their  derivatives,  obtained  by  Mont- 
golfier1  and  Haller 2  by  reduction  of  camphor, 
exactly  correspond  with  the  above. 

1  Thdses  sur  les  Isomdres  et  les  Ddrivds  du  Camphre  et  du  BorneoL 

2  Compt.  Rend.  105,  227  ;  109,  187 ;  110,  149  ;  112,  143. 


SEVERAL  ASYMMETRIC   CARBON  ATOMS  59 

Camphor  Borneol 


HC      C 


H2 

HC      CO  H2C      CH(OH) 


HCH3  HCH3 

r-  and  1-Borneol  (a)  [a]D  =  +  and  -  37°  (in 

alcohol),  +  and  -  38° 
(in  toluene) 

r-  and  1-Borneol  (/3)  [>]„  =  +  and  -  33°  (in 

alcohol),  +  and  -  19° 
(in  toluene) 

Borneolphenylurethane  (a)  [a]D  =  +  and  —  35° 

"  (M.P.  137°) 

Borneolphenylurethane  (/9)  [a]D  =  +  and  -  57° 

(M.P.  130°) 

A  second  example  is  afforded  by  limonenenitroso- 
chloride  and  its  derivatives  :  l 

Limonene  Nitrosochloride 

C,H, 
HCT  "cH  HC       CHC1 


I        II  II 

H2C      OH  H2C       CNOH 

V  V 

HCH3  HCH3 

1  Wallach  and  Conrady,  Ann.  252,  144. 


60  STEREOCHEMISTRY   OF   CARBON 

r-  and  1-a-Nitrosochloride  [a]D  =  +  and  —  313° 

(M.P.  103°) 

r-  and  l-/3-Nitrosochloride          [a]n  =  4-  and  —  241° 

r-  and  1-a-Nitrolepiperidine        [a]D  =  +  and  —  68° 

(M.P.  94°) 

r-  and  l-/3-Nitrolepiperidine       [a]7,  =  +  and  —  60° 

(M.P.  110°) 

Perhaps  the  four  camphoric  acids  come  in  the 
same  category : 

HC  =  C  (C3H7)  C02H  CH2C(CH3)  C02H 

H2CCH(CH3)C02H  CH2C(C3H7)C02H 

(Kekule  ')  (Bamberger 2) 

r-  and  1-Camphoric  acid  (a)  [a]D  =  +  and  —  46° 

(M.P.  180°),  dissolves 
in  160  parts  of  water 
at  15° 

r-  and  1-Camphoric  acid  (J3) 3  [a]7;  =  +  and  —  46° 

(M.P.  113°),  dissolves 
in  268  parts  of  water 
at  15° 

The  constitution  being  here  uncertain,  however, 
the  possibility  of  an  isomerism  like  that  of  fumaric 
and  maleic  acids  is  not  excluded,  and  this  would 
explain  the  remarkable  equality  in  the  rotating 
power  of  the  a  and  /3  modifications.  This  occurs, 
however,  in  other  cases  and  will  be  discussed  later. 

1  Ber.  6,  932.  2  Ibid.  23,  218. 

3  Friedel,  Campt.  Rend.  108,  978 ;  Jungfleisch,  I.e.  110,  790  ; 
Marsh,  Ber.  23,  Eef.  229. 


SEVERAL  ASYMMETRIC  CARBON  ATOMS     61 

In  the  case  of  atropine,  which,  from  its  decom- 
position products,  tropine  and  tropic  acid,1  contains 
at  least  two  asymmetric  carbons : 

CH2 

/\ 

HC       CH2 

HC       (7HCH2CH2OCCH(CH2OH)C6H6 

\X  o 

N 
CH3 

there  have  been  obtained  the  left-  and  right-rotating 
atrophies,2  [a]D  =  10°,  M.P.  110° ;  of  the  two  other 
modifications  only  one  is  known,  viz.  hyoscyamine, 
[a]j,  =  -  21°,  M.P.  109°.  The  atropine  formed  from 
this  by  the  action  of  bases,  which  according  to 
Hesse 3  is  active,  may  belong  to  a  third  type.4 

There  is  still  another  point  on  which  more  light 
is  required.  The  left-handed  atropine,  resulting  from 
left-atropic  acid  and  inactive  tropine,  could  also  exist 
in  several  modifications,  since  this  tropine  must  be 
considered  as  a  racemic  mixture. 

In  the  case  of  the  allied  substance,  cocaine  ( [a]D 
=  -  16° ; 5  as  HC1  salt  [a]7,  =  -  68°),  and  of  ecgonine 
(as  HC1  salt  [a]D  =  -  62° 6): 

1  Ladenburg,  Ber.  21,  3065  ;  Einhorn,  I.e.  23,  1338. 
-  Ladenburg,  Ber.  22,  2591. 
3  Ann.  Chem.  271,  100. 

1  Pseudohyoscyamine,  [<*]/>  =  —  21°,  gives  on  decomposition  an 
isomeric  tropine,  like  hyoscine  (J.  Chem.  Soc.  Abstr.  1893,  p.  491). 
5  Ber.  20,  320.  6  Einhorn,  Ber.  22,  1495. 


62  STEREOCHEMISTRY   OF   CARBON 

Cocaine 

CH2 

!TT 


HC         CH 


HC         CHCH(OC7H50)CH2C02CH3 

N 
CH3 


Ecgonine 

CH0 


HC         CH2 

HC        CHCH(OH)CH2C02H 


N 
CH3 

the  transformation  which  the  latter  undergoes  when 
treated  with  alkalies  corresponds  to  that  undergone 
by  hyoscyamine,  only  there  results  here  a  right 
ecgonine l  (as  HC1  salt  \_a]D  —  +  20°)  which  yields  a 
right  cocaine  (as  HC1  salt  [a]7,  =  +  42°).  Both  are 
therefore  representatives  of  the  (3  type. 

However,  here  too  the  constitution  is  doubtful. 
If  we  were  to  accept  Merling's 2  tropine  formula  : 

CH2  XC\ 

/^       \  TT  rt  r\1\ 

HC       CH2 

II        I 
HC       CHCH9CH9OH 


C'JIOH 


H.C 


CH8  \N 

(Ladenburg)  ^-jjj 

(Merling) 

1  Einhorn,  Ber.  23,  468  ;  Liebermann,  I.e.  511. 

2  Liebermann,  Ber.  25,  929. 


SEVERAL  ASYMMETRIC   CARBON  ATOMS  63 

we  should  expect  to  find  four  asymmetric  carbons  in 
atropine  and  cocaine,  and  accordingly  sixteen  isomers.1 
And  Merling's  formula  has  been  rendered  the  more 
probable,  since  Willstatter  has  found  two  inactive 
tropines  (probably  racemic).  Ladenburg's  formula 
admits  of  only  one. 

Three  asymmetric  carbon  atoms. — Here  there  should 
be  eight  isomers,  in  four  pairs.  If  we  take  the  left 
and  right  tartaric  acids  as  corresponding  to  sub- 
stances with  a  single  asymmetric  carbon  atom,  then 
we  find  that  a  not  inconsiderable  proportion  of  these 
eight  isomers  has  been  prepared  by  Wallach  and 
Conrady  2  from  limonene  : 

r-  and  1-a-Nitrolebenzylamine 

right  tartrate  [a]D  -  50°  and  +  70° 

r-  and  1-a-Nitrolebenzylamine 

left  tartrate  \a\j,  -  70°  and  +  50° 

but  the  four  isomers  of  the  /3  type  are  lacking. 
Also,  Haller  has  obtained  chloralbornylates, 

CC13.CH(OH)C10H170, 

in  four  modifications,  r-  and  1-  (a),  and  r-  and  1-  (13)  ; 
while  it  is  quite  possible  that  in  each  of  the  four 
methods  of  preparation,  e.g.  from  chloral  and  r- 
borneol  (a),  two  isomers  were  formed. 

In  the  sugar  series,  in  the  pentose  group, 

COH(CHOH)3CH2OH, 

1  Ber.  29,  936.  *  Ann.  Chem.  252,  144. 


64  STEREOCHEMISTRY   OF   CARBON 

we  have : 

r-  and  1-Arabinose l   [a],,  =  +    and    —  104°    (at 

first  157°) 

Xylose  [a]l}  =  +  19°  (at  first  79°) 

Eibose  2 

Here,  then,  three  types  have  been  experimentally 
realised,  which  also  have  been  found  to  recur  in  the 
corresponding  acids : 

Arabonic  acid  [a]D  <  —  8° ;  as  lactone  [a\n  =  —  74° 
Xylonic  „  [ojj,  =  -  7° ;  „  „  [a]/,  =  +  21° 
Eibonic  „  ?  „  „  [a],,  =  -  18° 

Four  asymmetric  carbon  atoms. — Of  the  sixteen 
isomers  (eight  types)  there  have  been  prepared,  in 
the  case  of  the  glucoses, 

COH(CHOH)4CH2OH, 

and  particularly  by  Fischer  : 3 

1-  and  r-Glucose       [a]w  =  53°  (at  first  105°) 

1-  and  r-Mannose4   [a]D  =  13° 

1-  and  r-Gulose 

Galactose  [a]D  =  80°  (at  first  118°) 

Talose 

Idose 

Of  the  corresponding  acids, 

C02H(CHOH)4CH2OH, 

and  their  lactones,  there  have  been  obtained  : 

1-  and  r-Gluconic  acid     [a]D  —  8° ;  as  lactone,  68° 
1-  and  r-Mannonic  acid  [a]D  =  3°  ;    „         „        54° 

1  Ber.  26,  740.  -  Fischer,  Ber.  24,  4220. 

3  Ber.  24,  1840,  3622.        4  I.e.  22,  368,  3218. 


SEVERAL  ASYMMETRIC   CARBON  ATOMS  65 

1-  and  r-Gulonic  acid  l     [a\n  —  14°  ;     as  lactone,  55° 
Galactonic  acid  [a]D  <  —  11;  ,,         „    —71° 

Talonic  acid,2  as  lactone,  strongly  left-handed. 

B.    FORMATION    OF    THE    ISOMERS   WITH    SEVERAL 
ASYMMETRIC    CARBON   ATOMS 

Whereas  the  formation  of  a  compound  with 
several  asymmetric  carbon  atoms  by  the  union  of 
two  substances,  each  containing  one  such  atom, 
leads  to  results  which  can  easily  be  foreseen,  the 
.case  is  altered  when  the  number  of  the  asymmetric 
carbon  atoms  increases  through  a  transformation 
taking  place  within  the  molecule. 

First  case. — Theoretically  the  simplest  case  is 
that  in  which  we  start  from  a  single  compound  with 
an  asymmetric  carbon  atom,  that  is,  a  compound 
active  and  not  racemic.3  If  we  introduce  into  such 
a  compound  a  new  asymmetric  carbon  atom,  as  in 
the  transformation  of  camphor  to  borneol,  we  may 
in  general  expect  the  production  of  two  isomers. 
But  this  case  is  quite  distinct  from  that  in  which  the 
original  compound  contained  no  asymmetric  carbon 
atom,  where  the  resulting  isomers  are  images  of 
each  other  and  possess  that  identity  of  internal 
structure  which  causes  the  formation  of  equal 
quantities  of  each.  Here  the  case  is  different.  We 
have  now  to  do  with  conditions  like  those  which 

.     '  Lc.  24,  526.  *  Z.c.  24,  3625. 

3  To  indicate  a  compound  rendered  inactive  by  the  mutual 
counterbalancing  of  two  active  isomers,  it  is  as  well  to  use  the  word 
chosen  by  Pasteur,  with  whom  this  conception  originated. 

F 


66  STEREOCHEMISTRY   OF   CARBON 

determine,  e.g.  the  formation  of  the  right  malate  of 
right  and  of  left  conine.  The  formation  of  equal 
quantities  of  the  two  isomers,  which  will  in  general 
possess  unequal  stability,  is  by  no  means  to  be  pre- 
dicted ;  indeed,  one  isomer  may  predominate  to  such 
a  degree  that  the  other  escapes  detection ;  further, 
the  two  isomers  may  be  separated  by  ordinary 
means,  e.g.  by  crystallisation,  without  necessitating 
a  resort  to  the  special  means  of  dividing  optical 
isomers. 

The  researches  of  Montgolfier  and  Haller  men- 
tioned above  afford  the  most  suitable  illustration  of 
all  this.  On  conversion  into  borneol,  camphor  gives 
two  isomers,  the  right-handed,  stable,  ordinary 
modification  (a),  and  a  left-handed  unstable 
modification  (/3).  These  may  be  separated  from 
each  other  by  simple  crystallisation,  and  yield  on 
oxidation  the  same  original  camphor.  The  left- 
handed  matricaria  camphor  also  forms  two  com- 
plementary compounds,  as  shown  in  the  following 
table  : 
Ordinary  camphor  Bright  stable  borneol  [a]D  =  +37° 

aD=  +  55°        [left  unstable      „        [a}D  =  - 33° 
Left  camphor          deft  stable          ,,        [a]D  =  —  37° 

an=—  55°        1  right  unstable  „        [a]D=+33° 

We  may  add  that  turpentine  oil  also  yields  two 
isomeric  borneols l  on  treatment  with  sulphuric 
acid,  and  that  there  are  two  camphoric  acids  corre- 
sponding to  each  camphor. 

1  Bouchardat  and  Lafont,  Compt.  Rend.  105,  49. 


SEVERAL  ASYMMETRIC   CARBON  ATOMS  6? 

Similarly,  E.  Fischer,1  by  addition  of  hydrocyanic 
acid,  has  formed  two  acids,  1-mannonic  and 
1-gluconic  acids,  from  arabinose ;  a-  and  y8-gluco- 
heptonic  acid  from  glucose ;  and  a-  and  /3-gluco- 
octonic  acid  from  heptose,  the  asymmetric  group, 
XCH(OH)C02H,  being  introduced  in  place  of  the 
aldehyde  group.  Glucose  yields,  moreover,  two 
isomeric  methylglucosides.2  Finally,  by  reduction  of 
levulose:  CH2OH(CHOH)3COCH2OH,  asymmetry 
is  introduced  into  the  CO  group,  and  the  result 
is  the  simultaneous  formation  of  two  isomeric 
alcohols,  mannite  and  sorbite.3 

There  is  every  reason  to  class  in  this  category 
the  formation  of  the  isomeric  nitrosochlorides  which 
were  obtained  by  Wallach4  from  limonene  (p.  60), 
by  means  of  amylnitrite  and  hydrochloric  acid ; 
the  right  limonene  gives,  e.g.  an  a-  and  /3-nitrosyl- 
chloride  (chlorinated  oxime).  It  seems  indeed,  at 
the  first  glance,  somewhat  strange  that  each  of 
these  chlorides  should  yield  with  amines — e.g. 
piperidine — a  mixture  of  a-  and  #-nitrosamine  ;  but 
this  is  probably  due  to  an  isomerisation  taking  place 
during  the  transformation,  such  as,  according  to 
p.  49,  is  especially  apt  to  occur  in  the  case  of  halogen 
derivatives. 

Finally,  in  the  fact  that  left  and  right  ecgonine 

1  Ber.  23,  2611 ;  24,  2685  ;  Ann.  270,  64. 

2  Alberda  v.   Ekenstein,  Rec.  des   Trav.   Chim.  des  Pays-Bast 
1894,  p.  183. 

3  Ber.  23,  3684;  Meunier,  Campt.  Rend.  Ill,  49. 

4  Ann.  252,  106 ;  Ber.  23,  3687 ;  24,  1653,  2687. 

99 


68  STEREOCHEMISTRY   OF  CARBON 

(p.  62)  yield  the  same  active  anhydrecgonine  and 
the  same  ecgonic  and  tropic  acid,  we  may  see  another 
example  of  the  disappearance  of  isomerism  conse- 
quent on  the  elimination  of  an  asymmetric  carbon 
atom.1 

Second  case. — A  case  theoretically  more  compli- 
cated, but  often  realised  in  the  laboratory,  occurs 
when  two  asymmetric  carbon  atoms  are  introduced 
into  an  inactive  or  racemic  compound,  as  in  the 
addition  of  bromine  to  cinnamic  acid,  forming 
C(JH5(CHBr)2C02H,  and  in  the  addition  of  nitrosyl- 
chloride  to  dipentene  (=  racemic  limonene) .  In  both 
cases  we  have  to  expect  the  formation  of  an  inactive 
mixture,  consisting  of  two  racemic  pairs,  represented 

by: 

First  pair :       +  A  +  B  and  —  A  —  B 

Second  pair  :    +  A  —  B  and  —  A  +  B 
The  ordinary  methods  of  separation  yield,  then,  two 
(racemic)    isomers,    the    special    methods    yielding 
four. 

It  is  only  lately  that  such  cases  have  been  experi- 
mentally demonstrated.  Wallach  was  able  to  follow 
them  out  in  detail  by  preparing  from  1-  and 
r-limonene-a-nitrosylchloride  the  inactive,  or  i-nitro- 
sylchloride  (a),  and  then  in  the  same  way  the 
i-nitrosylchloride  (J3) .  On  treating  dipentene  he  then 
obtained  and  isolated  the  i-(a)-  and  i-(/3)  -products. 

Erlenmeyer,  jun.,  Lothar  Meyer,  jun.,  and  Lieber- 
mann  have  broken  up  the  cinnamic  acid  bromide 
(00=68°)  and  the  last  named  the  dichloride  also 

1  Ber.  24,  611. 


SEVEKAL  ASYMMETKIC   CAKBON  ATOMS  69 

(aD=  67°) .  The  division  of  bromophenyl-lactic  acid  is 
the  third  example  of  division  in  presence  of  two  asym- 
metric carbon  atoms.  But  the  third  and  fourth 
isomers  are  still  lacking.  On  the  other  hand,  there  is  a 
whole  series  of  as  yet  undivided  racemic  com- 
pounds, which  have  already  been  obtained  in  the 
two  isomers  foreseen  by  the  theory.  Such  are  :  bro- 
mine addition  products  of  crotonic  and  isocrotonic 
acids,  CH^CHBrJjCOjH,1  angelic  and  tiglic  acids, 
CH3CHBrCBrCH3C02H,2  hypogaeic  and  gaidinic 
acids,  CH3((7HBr)2C13H2502,  oleic  and  elaidic  acids, 
CH3(CHBr)2C1-H2902,  erucic  and  brassidic  acids, 
CH3  (CHBr)2C19H3702,  mesaconic  and  citraconic 
acids,  CH3CBr  (C02H)  CHBrC02H.  Such  also  are  the 
bi-substituted  succinic  acids,  all  of  which  have  been 
obtained  in  two  modifications  :  brommethyl-,3 
methylallyl-,  allylethyl-,  benzylmethyl-,  benzyl- 
ethyl-,  methylphenyl-succinic  acid4 ;  further,  methyl- 
ethyl  and  methylpropyl-glutaric  acids,  and  isomeric 
glycols,  X(CHOH)2Y,  like  phenylmethylglycol,5 
which,  according  to  Zincke,6  constantly  occur  in 
two  modifications. 

Interesting,  too,  is  the  fact  lately  established  by 
Schiff,7  that  crotonchloral  gives  with  amides   (acet- 

1  Melikoff,  Ber.  16,  1268 ;  Wislicenus,  20,  1010. 

2  Puckert,  Ann.  250,  244  ;  Fittig,  259,  1. 

3  Bischoff,  Ber.  23,  3622. 

4  Ibid.  24,  1876  ;  Zeitschr.  f.  physiol.  Chem.  8,  465. 

5  Zincke,  Ber.  17,  708.  6  Ber.  20,  339. 

7  Ibid.  26,  446;    see  also  Griner,  Ann.  de  Chim.  et  de  Phys. 
2],  26,  305. 


70  STEEEOCHEMISTEY   OF   CARBON 

amide,    benzamide,    formamide)    two  isomers ;  this 
would  be  expected  from  the  formula  . 

CH3(7HC1CC12CH(OH)NHC2H30. 

But    that    crotonchloral    should  be  recovered   from 
this  in  two  isomeric  forms  is  inexplicable. 

C.    TEANSFOEMATION    OF     ISOMEES   WITH     SEVEEAL 
ASYMMETEIC    CAEBON    ATOMS 

As  has  been  stated,  compounds  containing  a 
single  asymmetric  carbon,  form,  on  heating,  an 
inactive  mixture  corresponding  to  the  state  of  stable 
equilibrium. 

It  is  otherwise  with  compounds  containing  two 
or  more  asymmetric  atoms.  It  is  evident  that  here 
too  the  inactive  mixture  corresponds  to  the  state  of 
equilibrium  ultimately  attained  ;  but  this  final  state  is 
reached  in  two  phases,  since  in  general  one  of  the 
two  asymmetric  groups  is  converted  faster  than  the 
other.  Sometimes,  indeed,  the  conversion  of  one 
group  may  be  complete  when  the  other  is  still 
unaltered.  Beginning,  then,  with  the  compound 
+  A  +  B,  we  shall  get  first  a  mixture  of  +  A  +  B  and 
+  A  — B.  It  is  by  no  means  necessary  that  the 
quantities  of  the  two  products  formed  at  the  end  of 
the  first  phase  should  be  equal,  for  the  two  molecules 
which  are  not  images  of  each  other  are  in  general  of 
different  stability.  It  is  therefore  not  strange  if 
almost  the  whole  mass  becomes  converted  into 
+  A— B,  the  direction  of  the  rotation  being  perhaps 
reversed.  In  fact,  this  has  been  found  to  take  place. 


SEVEKAL  ASYMMETRIC   CAKBON  ATOMS  71 

And  first  let  us  recall  Pasteur's  l  words  concerning 
the  transformations  in  the  quinine  group  : 

'  Let  us  consider  the  three  isomers,  quinine,  quini- 
dine, and  quinicine.  Quinine  is  left-handed,  quini- 
dine  right-handed,  both  to  a  considerable  degree. 
Quinicine  is  right-handed,  but,  compared  with  the 
others,  very  slightly  so. .  The  logical,  I  had  almost 
said  the  inevitable,  explanation  of  these  results  is 
the  following :  The  quinine  molecule  is  double,  and 
consists  of  two  active  bodies,  of  which  one  is  strongly 
left-handed,  the  other  very  slightly  right-handed. 
This  latter  is  stable  on  heating,  resists  transformation 
into  the  isomeric  group,  and,  persisting  unaltered  in 
quinicine,  imparts  to  this  the  weak  right  rotation. 
The  other  group,  which,  on  the  contrary,  is  strongly 
active,  becomes  inactive  when  quinine  becomes 
converted  by  heating  into  quinicine.  Accordingly 
quinicine  would  be  nothing  else  than  a  quinine  in 
which  one  group  has  become  inactive.  Similarly 
quinicine  would  be  a  quinidine  in  which  one  group 
has  become  inactive  ;  but  in  quinidine  this  strongly 
active  group  is  right-handed  instead  of  left-handed 
as  in  quinine,  and  still  combined  with  that  slightly 
active  and  stable  group  which,  persisting  in  quinicine, 
imparts  to  this  the  slight  right  rotation.  I  could 
repeat  this  word  for  word  with  reference  to  the 
isomers,  cinchonine,  cinchonidine,  and  cinchonicine, 
which  are  constituted  like  the  related  quinine 
isomers;  for  they  present  exactly  the  same  relations.' 

The  only  difference  between  these  views  and  those 

1  Compt.  Rend.  37,  110. 


72  STEKEOCHEMISTBY   OF   CAEBON 

developed  above  is  that  in  the  latter  nothing  has 
been  said  about  the  so-called  groups. 

As  examples  of  transformations  resulting  from 
change  in  one  of  the  asymmetric  atoms,  may  be 
mentioned : 

Borneol. — Prepared  from  ordinary  camphor,  the 
product  is  a  mixture  in  .which  the  left  borneol 
predominates;  on  heating,  almost  the  whole  of  this 
modification  is  transformed  (this  is  the  reason  why 
Moiitgolfier  called  it  unstable)  and  produces  ordinary 
right-handed  borneol,  the  sign  of  the  rotation  being 
reversed. 

Menthol. — This  compound,  which  contains  two 
asymmetric  carbon  atoms, 

HCC3H7 


H2C         CH2 


H2C         CO 


H(7CH3 

behaves  in  the  same  way.  Beckmann  l  observed  a 
transformation  from  left  to  right  rotation  on  heating 
to  30°  in  presence  of  sulphuric  acid. 

Gluconic  and  mannonic  acids  present,  according 
to  Fischer,2  the  same  peculiarities,  an  analogous 
transformation  occurring  on  heating  them  with 
quinoline.  Only  here  in  the  final  condition  both 
isomers  are  present  together,  whereas  in  the  former 
examples  one  of  them  almost  vanished.  Here,  too, 

1  Ann.  250,  322.  -'  Ber.  23,  800. 


SEVERAL  ASYMMETRIC  CARBON  ATOMS     73 

we  must  class  camphoric  acid,  if,  with  Bamberger,1 
we  assume  in  it  two  asymmetric  carbon  atoms.  The 
conversion  of  right  into  left  acid,2  which  takes  place 
on  heating,  would  then  be  traceable  to  the  same 
cause. 

We  may  add,  also,  the  conversion  of  arabonic 
into  ribonic 3  acid,  of  galactonic  into  talonic,4  of  a-  into 
/3-gluco-octonic  acid,5  and  finally,  in  all  probability, 
that  of  left  into  right  ecgonine  (p.  62)  and  of  hyos- 
cyamine  into  atropine  (p.  61),  both  under  the  influence 
of  alkalies.  In  the  last  case  the  complete  disappear- 
'ance  of  the  activity  is  remarkable,  as  in  the  case  of 
such  a  slightly  active  body  we  might  expect  trans- 
formation in  only  one  of  the  asymmetric  groups  ;  and 
recently  Hesse 6  has  announced  the  activity  of  atro- 
pine, which  is  especially  evident  in  the  sulphate. 

It  is  to  be  observed  further  that,  so  far  as  is 
known,  the  transformation  takes  place  in  the  part  of 
the  molecule  richest  in  oxygen,  that  is,  as  near  as 
possible  to  the  carboxyl  group  when  this  is  present. 
This  is  rendered  probable  in  the  case  of  the  conversion 
of  left  into  right  ecgonine  by  the  formation  of  the 
same  anhydrecgonine  and  of  the  same  tropic  acid 
from  both  isomers  ;  in  the  case  of  the  conversion  of 
mannonic  into  gluconic  acid,  and  of  a-  and  /3-gluco- 
octonic  acids  by  the  relations  to  arabinose  and 
heptose.  Moreover,  it  is  well  known  that  in  general 
the  presence  of  oxygen  in  organic  compounds  brings 

1  Ber.  23,  218.  2  Jungfleisch,  Compt.  Rend.  110,  790. 

3  Fischer,  Ber.  24,  4216.  4  Ibid.  2622. 

5  Ann.  270,  64.  6  Ibid.  271,  100. 


74  STEREOCHEMISTRY   OF   CARBON 

about  a  certain  loosening,  which  often  determines  the 
point  at  which  the  molecule  is  attacked  and  also  the 
breaking  up  into  ions. 

It  is  remarkable  that  in  the  transformations  con- 
sidered above,  the  reverse  rotation  is  in  several  cases 
equal  to  the  original  rotation  : 

Stable  borneol  (a)  +  37°  (/3)  -  37° 

Camphoric  acid  (a)  +  46°  (£)  -  46° 

Limonenenitropiperidine      (a)  —68°  (/3)  +  60° 
Mannite  and  sorbite,  both  rotating  feebly. 
Gluconic  and  mannonic  acid,  the  same. 
Arabonic  and  ribonic  acid,  the  same. 
Left  menthone,  —  28°  ;  right  menthone,  +  28°. 
This  equality  is  not  to  be  confounded  with  that 
observed  in  the  case  of  a  single  asymmetric  carbon 
atom,  and  in  derivatives  it  is  lacking. 

D.    SIMPLIFICATION    THROUGH    SYMMETRY    OF    THE 
FORMULA.      INACTIVE    INDIVISIBLE    TYPE 

Tartaric  acid  type. — If  we  have  to  do  with  the 
presence  of  asymmetric  carbon  in  a  symmetrical 
formula,  the  case  is  simplified.  To  begin  with  the 
simplest  case,  CEjE^gCEjEgCg,  the  four  symbols 
given  above  (p.  57)  assume  the  following  form  : 

No.  1  No.  2  No.  3  No.  4 

Ej  O  E3    E3  0  Ej    Ej  0  E3    E3  \j  Ej 
E,  O  Eo    E,  0  Eo    E.,  C>  E,    En  0  E, 

1  o  1  o  o  1  o  1 

E2  E2  E2  E2 

Here,  however,  No.  1  and  No.    4  are  identical,  as 


SEVEEAL  ASYMMETRIC  CARBON  ATOMS     75 

may  be  shown  with  the  models,  but  is  evident  also 
from  these  symbols  if  we  consider  that  a  projection 
of  this  kind  may  be  moved  round  in  the  plane  of  the 
drawing,  and  therefore  may  be  turned  upside  down, 
by  turning  it  through  180°  in  the  direction  of  the 
hands  of  a  watch  ;  when  this  is  done  No.  1  coincides 
with  No.  4.  This  configuration  is  also  characterised 
by  the  fact  that  it  is  symmetrical,  as  is  also  shown 
by  the  model,  but  is  again  expressed  in  very  simple 
fashion  by  the  symmetry  of  the  projections.  There 
is  accordingly  no  activity  to  be  expected  here  ;  it  is, 
"then,  the  '  inactive  indivisible  type  '  which  results 
from  the  symmetry  of  the  formula.  The  symbols 
No.  2  and  No.  3  are  evidently  asymmetrical  images 
of  each  other,  and  correspond  therefore  to  bodies 
of  opposite  activity. 

A  perfect  illustration  of  this  occurs  in  the  isomer- 
ism  of  the  tartaric  acids.  In  this  group  we  are,  in 
fact,  acquainted  with  the  two  isomers  of  equal  and 
opposite  activity,  which  are  represented  by  the  for- 
mulae: 

C02H  C02H 

HOCH  and  HCO  H 

HCOH  HOCH 

C02H 


as  well  as  the  inactive  mixture  of  the  two  —  racemic 
acid  —  which  was  divided  by  Pasteur.  But  what 
especially  characterises  this  case  is  the  existence  of 
an  indivisible  inactive  isomer,  which  was  also  dis- 
covered by  Pasteur,  and  which  some  years  ago 


76  STEREOCHEMISTKY   OF   CARBON 

Przibytek  l  tried  in  vain  to  divide.     In  fact,  such  a 
compound  was  to  be  predicted  from  the  formula : 

C02H 
HCOH 
HCOH 

C02H 

Erythrite,  CH2OH(CHOH)2CH2OH,  maybe  cited 
as  a  second  instance  of  this  inactive  indivisible  type, 
since  Przibytek 2  has  shown  that  this  yields  on  oxi- 
dation the  inactive  non-racemic  tartaric  acid.  From 
the  constitution  of  erythrite  the  possibility  of  in- 
activity without  divisibility  was,  in  fact,  to  be  expected. 
Thirdly,  we  must  now  add  erythrene-  or  pyrrolylene- 
bromide,  CH2Br(CHBr)2CH2Br  (tetrabromobutane), 
since  Griner 3  has  converted  this  into  erythrite  ;  the 
liquid  isomeric  bromine  compound 4  would  then 
represent  the  racemic  mixture. 

Here,  too,  we  must  mention  several  compounds 
whose  constitution  resembles  that  of  tartaric  acid  in 
that  they  possess  a  symmetrical  formula  with  two 
asymmetric  carbon  atoms.  These  compounds  possess 
a  special  interest  because  they  all  present  a  case  of 
isomerism,  which,  inexplicable  according  to  the  old 
views,  is  a  self-evident  necessity  of  our  theory.  As 
in  the  case  of  erythrenetetrabromide,  these  isomers 
correspond  to  the  inactive  indivisible  tartaric  acid 
and  to  racemic  acid.  Most  of  these  compounds 

1  Ber.  17,  1412.  2  Ibid.  20,  1233. 

3  Compt.  Rend.  116,  823. 

4  Henninger,   Compt.  Rend.  104,  144  ;  Ciamician,  Ber.  19,  569 ; 
20,  3061 ;  21,  1430. 


SEVERAL  ASYMMETRIC  CARBON  ATOMS     77 

have  been  investigated  by  Bischoff  in  his  study  of  the 
bisubstituted  succinic  acids  possessing  the  sym- 
metrical formula,  C02H(CHX)2C02H.  Such  are  the 
dibromo-  and  isodibromo-succinic  acids,  dimethyl-,1 
diethyl-,2  diisopropyl-,3  and  diphenyl-succinic 4  acids, 
with  their  derivatives,  ethers,  anhydrides,  &c.,  which 
also  form  isomers.  Eecent  additions  to  the  list  are  the 
dimethyldioxyadipic  acids,5  (C02H.CH3.C.OH.CH2)2, 
and  the  thiodilactylic  acids6  (CO2H.CH3.C'H)2S. 

Although  up  to  the  present  none  of  these  isomers 
has  been  divided,  yet  there  is  such  an  intimate  con- 
nection between  their  formulae  and  those  of  the 
tartaric  acids  that  it  is  difficult  to  doubt  of  ultimate 
success.  We  have  only  to  substitute  methyl,  &c., 
for  the  hydroxyl  of  the  tartaric  acids,  and  it  is  more 
than  probable  that  the  isomeric  relations  of  these 
acids  will  survive  the  substitution. 

To  this  class  belong  also  hydro-  and  isohydro- 
benzoin,  C6H5(CHOH)2C6H5,  with  some  derivatives 
and  homologues.7  These  are  comparable  with  tar- 
taric acid,  the  carboxyl  group  being  now  replaced. 
Finally,  we  must  mention  the  bromides  of  nitrostil- 
bene,  N02C6H4(CHBr)2C6H4N02,8  and  also  bi-  and 
isobi-desyl,  C6H5(CHCOC6H5)2C6H5.9 

1  Ber.  18,  846,  2368 ;  20,  2736  ;  21,  3170  ;  22,  66,  1821. 

2  Bischoff  and  Hjelt,  Ber.  20,  2988,  3078 ;  21,  2089  ;  22,  67  ; 
23,  650. 

3  Hell  and  Mayer,  Ber.  22,  56. 

1  Reimer,  Ber.  14,  1802 ;  15,  2628  ;  Ossipoff,  Compt.  Rend.  109, 
223 ;  Tillmanns,  Ann.  258,  87  ;  259,  61. 

5  Zelinsky  and  Isajew,  Ber.  29,  819.  6  Loven,  I.e.  1132. 

7  Auwers,  Ber.  24,  1778.  8  Bischoff,  Ber.  21,  2074. 

9  Knovenagel,  Ber.  21,  1359  ;  Garett,  21,  3107  ;  Fehrlin,  22,  553. 


78  STEREOCHEMISTBY   OF   CARBON 

Glutaric  acid  type. — What  has  been  said  above 
refers  to  two  asymmetric  carbons  directly  connected. 
If  they  are  joined  by  an  intermediate  atom,  we  must 
make  a  distinction  according  as  this  atom  is  con- 
nected with  similar  or  dissimilar  groups. 

In  the  first  case,  for  the  type  (X)2C((7K1K2E3)2, 
what  has  been  said  above  applies  equally.  We  may 
therefore  apply  it  to  the  two  isomeric  dimethyl-1  and 
dimethyldioxy-glutaric  acids,  H2C(CHCH3C02H)2 
and  H2C((70HCH3C02H)2,2  to  the  dimethyladipic 
acids,2  C2H4(CHCH3C02H)2,  as  well  as  to  the 
isomeric  bromides  of  piperylene,  H2C(CHBrCH2Br)2,3 
and  of  diallyl,  C2H4(CHBrCH2Br)2.4 

But  if  there  is  a  difference  between  the  two  groups 
joined  to  the  middle  carbon  atom.  CXY  (CE^Eg)^ 
then,  as  Fischer 5  has  remarked,  a  second  inactive 
indivisible  modification  occurs  ;  this  is  shown  by  the 
difference  in  the  formulae  : 

E3  E3 

Ej      C      E2  E!      C      E2 

X     C     Y  and  Y     C     X 

E,     C     E2  E!     C     E2 

E3  E3 

This  modification  has,  in  fact,  been  found  in  the  case 
of  the  trioxyglutaric  acids,  C02H((7HOH)3C02H, 
and  of  the  corresponding  alcohols, 

CH2OH(CHOH)3CH2OH. 

1  Zelinsky,  Ber.  22,  2823  ;  Auwers,  23,  1600  ;  26,  4012. 

2  Zelinsky,  Ber.  22,  2823 ;  Auwers  and  V.  Meyer,  23,  295. 

3  Ciamician  and  Magnanini,  Ber.  21,  1434  ;  Wagner,  Ber.  22, 
3057  ;  Oazz.  Chim.  16,  390. 

4  Ciamician  and  Anderlini,  Ber.  22,  2497,  3056. 

5  Ber.  24,  1839. 


SEVERAL  ASYMMETRIC   CAKBON  ATOMS  79 

In  the  former  case  we  have,  besides  the  active 
acid  (\_a]D=  —  23°)  from  arabinose,  the  inactive  acid 
(M.P.  152°)  from  xylose,1  and  the  isomeric  unstable 
inactive  acid  from  ribonic  acid,  which  readily  changes 
into  the  lactone. 

In  the  case  of  the  alcohols  we  have  side  by  side 
the  corresponding  isomers  xylite  1  and  adonite.2 

Also,  Zelinsky 3  has  prepared  three  inactive  modi- 
fications of  dimethyltricarballylic  acid  : 

C02H 

I 
HCCH3 

I 
HCC02H 


HCCH 


C02H 

Saccharic  acid  type.  —  Finally  we  come  to  the  sym- 
metrical compounds,  which  contain  four  asymmetric 
carbon  atoms,  such  as  saccharic  acid.  A  conspectus 
of  their  isomeric  relations  is  afforded  by  the  follow- 
ing symbols,  in  which  the  two  groupings,  HCOH  and 
HOCH,  possible  with  each  asymmetric  carbon,  are 
indicated  by  +  and  —  .  The  sixteen  isomers,  divided 
into  eight  types,  are  then  these  : 

No.  1  No.  2  No.  3  No.  4 


Ber.  26,  635.  2  Ibid.  24,  538.  3  Ibid.  29,  616. 


80  STEREOCHEMISTRY   OF   CARBON 

No.  5  No.  6  No.  7  No.  8 


If  symmetry  exists  the  two  isomers  marked  No.  1 
become  identical  and  inactive  ;  the  same  with  No.  8  ; 
the  pair  No.  2  coincides  with  No.  5,  and  No.  3  with 
No.  4.  Hence  we  have  ten  isomers,  of  which  two 
are  inactive  and  indivisible,  while  the  other  eight  be- 
long to  four  types.  Now,  in  the  case  of  mannite, 
CH2OH(CHOH)4CH2OH,  we  have  : 

Left  and  right  (ordinary)  mannite,1  [a]/,=  +  0-03  ; 
with  boric  acid,  more  strongly  right-handed. 

Left  and  right  (ordinary)  sorbite,2  slightly  active  ; 
with  borax,  [a]fl=l-4. 

Dulcite,  inactive,  indivisible.3 

In  the  case  of  the  corresponding  saccharic  acids, 
indeed,  all  the  six  types  exist  : 

Left  and  right  (ordinary)  saccharic  acid,  [a]D=8°  ; 
as  lactone,  38°.4 

Left  and  right  mannosaccharic  acid,  slightly 
active  ;  as  double  lactone,  202°.  5 

Talomucic  acid,6  [a]n>  +24°  ;  as  lactone,  <  +7°. 

Mucic  acid,  inactive,  indivisible.7 

Allomucic  acid,  inactive,  indivisible.8 


1  Kiliani,  Ber.  20,  2714.  2  Fischer  and  Stahel,  Ber.  26,  2144. 
3  Ber.  25,  2564,  1247.  4  Tollens's  Kohlehydrate. 

5  Ber.  24,  541,  3628.  6  Fischer,  Ber.  24,  3622. 

7  Fischer,  I.e.  25,  1247.  8  Fischer,  Lc.  24,  2136 


81 


CHAPTEK  IV 

DETERMINATION  OF   THE  POSITION  OF  THE 
RADICALS  IN  STEREOMERS 

WHEN  the  number  of  the  isomers  actually  existing 
(which,  in  the  cases  we  have  been  considering,  may 
be  called  stereomers)  agrees  with  the  theory,  we  are 
confronted  with  a  problem  like  that  which  we  have 
to  solve  in  the  aromatic  series,  when  we  assign  to 
each  of  three  derivatives  one  of  the  three  symbols  1,  2, 
1,  3,  1,  4.  At  present  this  problem  can  be  solved  only 
partially  :  which  of  the  two  enantiomorphous  formulae 
corresponds  to,  say,  the  left-rotating  compound,  is 
undecided.  When,  however,  there  are  several 
carbon  atoms  the  case  is  different.  We  have  already 
mentioned  such  types.  In  the  case  of  tartaric  acid, 
e.g.  (p.  75),  the  symbol 

C02H 

HCOH 

HCOH 
C02H 

was  chosen  on  account  of  its  symmetry  as  the  ex- 
pression for  the  'inactive  indivisible  type/  while  the 
two  other  formulae  remained  for  the  right-  and  left- 
acids  ;  to  decide  between  these  last  is,  however, 

G 


82  STEREOCHEMISTRY    OF   CARBON 

impossible.  It  is  especially  in  the  sugar  group  that 
the  determination  of  configuration,  in  this  sense,  has 
been  carried  out  by  Fischer.1  In  now  discussing  the 
special  data  and  results,  since  we  can  choose  the 
formula  for  the  type  only,  and  not  for  the  right-  or 
left-handed  product  in  question,  we  find  that  the 
number  of  symbols  to  be  distributed  is  reduced  by 
half,  which  greatly  simplifies  the  discussion.  In 
what  follows,  therefore,  the  mirror-images,  such  as 

C02H  C02H 

HCOH  HOCH 

HOCH  HCOH 

C02H  C02H 

represent  the  same  tartaric  acid — in  this  case  the 
active  one. 

In  order  now  to  facilitate  the  review  of  the  sugar- 
derivatives  we  will  take  in  succession  first  the 
simplest,  the  tetroses,  COH(CHOH)2CH2OH,  then 
the  pentoses,  COH((7HOH)3CH2OH,  and  finally  the 
glucoses,  COH(CH.OH)4CH2OH.  Then  we  have  4, 
8,  and  16  isomers,  or  2,  4,  and  8  types,  and  the  first 
two  are  directly  connected  with  the  tartaric  acids, 
their  symbols  being 

H2COH  H2COH 

HCOH  HCOH 

HCOH  HOCH 

COH  COH 

and  the  substances  represented  by  the  first  symbol 
giving  inactive,  indivisible  tartaric  acid,  those  re- 
presented by  the  other  giving  the  left-  or  right- 

1  Ber.  24,  1836,  2684. 


POSITION   OF  THE   RADICALS  IN   STEREOMERS        83 

acid.     This  tetrose  has  been  recently  obtained  from 
arabinose.1 

The  following  table  gives,  so  to  speak,  the  develop- 
ment of  the  pentoses  and  glucoses  from  these  two 
tetroses,  according  to  the  experimental  results  of 
Kiliani  and  Fischer. 


Tetroses  (C4H804) 
I 

H2COH 
HCOH 
HCOH 
OCH 
(corresponds  to  inactive 


II 


HCOH 
HOCH 
OCH 
(corresponds  to  active 


tartaric  acid) 


tartaric  acid) 


Pentoses  (C5H1005) 


A 

H.,COH 
HCOH 
HCOH 
HCOH 
OCH 
Ribose 


a 

H.2COH 
HCOH 
HCOH 
HCOH 
HCOH 
OCH 

Allomucic 
acid 


B 

H2COH 
HCOH 
HCOH 

HOCH 
OCH 

Arabinose 


HCOH 
HOCH 
HOCH 

OCH 

Lyxose 


B 

H2COH 

HCOH 

HOCH 

HCOH 

OCH 

Xylose 


Glucoses  (C6H1206) 


IA 


IB 


0 

a 

3 

H2COH 

H2COH 

H2COH 

HCOH 

HCOH 

HCOH 

HCOH 

HCOH 

HCOH 

HCOH 

HOCH 

HOCH 

HOCH 

HCOH 

HOCH 

OCH 

OCH 

OCH 

Talomucic 

Saccharic  acid 

Manno- 

acid 

Glucose 

saccharic 

Talose  ? 

Sorbite 

Mannose 

Mannite 

1  Fischer,  .$er.  56,  740. 


UNIVERSITY 


84 


STEREOCHEMISTRY   OF  CAEBON 


II  A 


Glucoses  (C6H1206)—  continued. 

II  B 

ft 

a 

0 

H2COH 

H2COH 

H2COH 

HCOH 

HCOH 

HCOH 

HOGH 

HOCH 

HOCH 

HOCH 

HCOH 

HCOH 

HOCH 

HCOH 

HOCH 

OCH 

OCH 

OCH 

Talomucic  acid 

Saccharic  acid 

Idosaccharic 

Talose 

Gulose 

acid 

Sorbite 

Idose 

Idite 

a 

H2COH 
HCOH 
HOCH 
HOCH 
HCOH 
OCH 

Mucic  acid 
Galactose 
Dulcite 


The  respective  tetrose  or  pentose  is  enriched  by 
CHOH,  by  addition  of  hydrogen  cyanide,  conversion 
of  cyanogen  into  carboxyl,  and,  finally,  reduction  of 
the  resulting  acid  (or  rather  of  its  lactone) ,  the  group 
OCH  being  converted  successively  into  HOCHCN, 
HOCHC02H,  and  HOCHCOH.  The  formation  of 
two  isomers  is  then  indicated  by  the  symbols  ;  they 
are  distinguished  in  the  case  of  the  pentoses 
by  A  and  B,  in  the  case  of  the  glucoses  by  a 
and/3. 

It  is  noteworthy  that,  thanks  to  the  recent  re- 
searches of  Wohl,1  the  process  has  been  carried  out 
in  the  opposite  direction,  the  oxime  HOCHNOH 
being  formed,  and  hydrogen  cyanide  removed  from 
this  by  ammoniacal  silver  oxide. 

We  have  now  to  find  for  each  of  the  known 
isomers  its  place  in  the  table. 

Pentose  group. — In  the  first  place  we  have  to  refer 
the  four  pentose  types  to  the  symmetrical  acids.  Of 
the  three  possible  types, 

'  Ber.  26,  740. 


POSITION   OF  THE   RADICALS   IN   STEREOMERS        85 


C02H 
HCOH 

C02H 
HCOH 

C02H 
HCOH 

HCOH 

HCOH 

HOCH 

HCOH 

HOCH 

HCOH 

C02H 

C02H 

C02H 

only  the  second  is  active,  accordingly,  for  arabinose, 
which  on  oxidation  yields  this  acid,  the  choice  lies 
between  : 

CH2OH  COH 

HCOH  HCOH 

HCOH  and  HCOH 

HOCH  HOCH 

COH  CH2OH 

i.e.  between  I B  and  II A  in  the  table. 

Now,  in  the  Kiliani-Fischer  reaction  arabinose 
yields  glucose  and  mannose,1  which  therefore  are 
represented  either  by  I  B  a,  ft,  or  by  II  A  a,  ft.  By 
oxidising  these  to  the  symmetrical  acids, 

C02H(OHOH)4C02H, 

we  get  saccharic  and  mannosaccharic  acids 2  respec- 
tively ;  both  are  active,  which  agrees  only  with 
I  B  a,  ft,  since  II A  a  would  give  an  inactive  isomer. 
Accordingly  the  arabinose  formula  must  be  I B  : 

H2COH 

HCOH 

HCOH 

HOCH 

OCH 

1  Ber.  23,  799.  -  Ibid.  24,  539. 


86  STEREOCHEMISTRY   OF   CARBON 

while  to  the  recently  discovered  lyxose  l  which  yields 
mucic  acid  (II A  a)  on  oxidation  we  assign  the  for- 
mula II  A : 

H2COH 
HCOH 
HOCH 
HOCH 
OCH 

Now,  from  arabonic  acid,  H2COH(HCOH)3C02H, 
which  corresponds  to  arabinose,  we  get,  on  heating, 
ribonic  acid,2  and  we  must  assume  that  the  trans- 
formation takes  place  in  the  neighbourhood  of  the 
highly  oxygenated  carboxyl-group.  Eibonic  acid  is, 
then  : 

H2COH 

HCOH 

HCOH 

HCOH 
C02H 

Further,  the  configuration  of  adonite,3 
CH2OH(CHOH)3CH2OH, 

the  reduction-product  of  ribose,  must  be  taken  as 
corresponding  with  the  above  ;  while  for  xylite 4  and 
xylose  the  last  possibility  remains  : 

H2COH 

HCOH 
HOCH 

HCOH 

OCH 

1  Bcr.  29,  581.   2  Ibid.  4214.  a  Ibid.  26,  636.  4  Ibid.  24,  528. 


POSITION   OF  THE   KADICALS  IN   STEREOMERS        87 

As  for  lyxonic  acid,  which  corresponds  to  lyxose, 
it  is  obtained  from  xylonic  acid  just  as  ribonic  from 
arabonic  acid,  by  a  transformation  in  the  neighbour- 
hood of  the  carboxyl  group.  The  formula  above 
given  for  lyxose  is  thus  confirmed. 

In  the  group  of  the  pentoses,  of  the  correspond- 
ing pentatomic  alcohols,  alcohol  acids,  and  trioxy- 
glutaric  acids,  all  the  configurations  are,  then,  deter- 
mined : 

Ribose.  Arabinose. 

Ribonic  acid.  Arabonic  acid. 

Adonite  (inact.).  Arabite  (act.). 

Inact.  trioxygl.  Act.  trioxygl. 

H2COH  H2COH 

HCOH  HCOH 

HCOH  HCOH 

HCOH  HOCH 

OCH  OCH 

Lyxose.  Xylose. 

Lyxonic  acid.  Xylonic  acid. 

Xylite  (inact.). 
Act.  trioxygl.  Inact.  isomeric  trioxygl. 

H2COH  H2COH 
HCOH  HCOH 

HOCOH  HOCH 
HOCOH  HCOH 

OCH  OCH 

Glucose  group. — It  has  already  been  mentioned 
that  glucose  and  mannose  have  the  formulae  I  B  a, 
@.  The  choice  is  rendered  possible  by  the  fact  that 
the  same  saccharic  acid  which  results  from  the 
oxidation  of  glucose  is  obtained  also  from  an 


88  STEREOCHEMISTRY   OF   CARBON 

isomeric  gulose  ; l  only  the  formula  I  B  a  admits  of 
such  an  isomer,  and  therefore  the  configuration  of 
mannose  and  gulose,  of  mannosaccharic  and  sac- 
charic acid,  is  at  once  settled,  as  well  as  that  of  the 
corresponding  mannite  and  sorbite,  which  are  formed 
on  reducing  mannose  2  and  glucose  3  respectively. 

Glucose.  Mannose.  Gulose. 

Saccharic  acid.          Manno-saccharic  acid.          Saccharic  acid. 
Sorbite.  Mannite.  Sorbite. 

H2COH       H2COH  H2COH 
HCOH       HCOH        HCOH 

HCOH       HCOH  HOCH 

HOCH  HOCH          HCOH 

HCOH  HOCH          HCOH 
OCH        OCH          OCH 

At  the  same  time  this  determines  the  configura- 
tion of  levulose.  The  constitution  is,  according  to 
Kiliani,  H2COH(HCOH)3COCH2OH.  Now,  as  this 
yields  on  reduction  sorbite  and  mannite  4 : 

H2COH  H2COH  H2COH 


HCOH 

HCOH 

HCOH 

HCOH 

HCOH 

HCOH 

HOCH 

HOCH 

HOCH 

HCOH 

HOCH 

CO 

H2COH 

Sorbite. 

H2COH 

Mannite. 

H2COH 

Levulose. 

it  must  possess  the  third  formula. 

Glucose  group,  mucic  acid  derivatives. — Since  it  is 

1  Fischer,  Ber.  24,  521.  2  Ber.  22,  365  ;  24,  539. 

3  Meunier,  Delachanal,  Compt  Rend.  Ill,  49,  51. 

4  Ber.  23,  2611. 


POSITION   OF   THE   RADICALS   IN   STEREOMERS        89 

proved  that  mucic  acid,  C02H(H(70H)4C02H,  and 
the  corresponding  dulcite  belong  to  the  '  inactive 
indivisible  type,' l  we  have  only  to  choose  between 
the  two  following  configurations  for  the  acid : 

C02H  C02H 

HCOH  HCOH 

HCOH  -,          HOCH 

HCOH  HOCH 

HCOH  HCOH 

C02H  C02H 

Then  we  have  for  galactonic  acid, 
CH2OH(CHOH)C02H 

(and  galactose),  two  possibilities.  Now,  this  acid  is 
converted  into  talonic  acid  (and  talose)  by  heating 
the  quinoline-  and  pyridine-salt,2  and  the  trans- 
formation must  be  supposed  to  take  place  in  the 
HCOH  group  next  to  the  carboxyl.  Talonic  acid  is 
accordingly : 

H2COH  H2COH 

HCOH  HCOH 

HCOH  HOCH 

HCOH  HOCH 

HOCH  HOCH 

C02H  C02H 

But  this  determines  the  configuration  of  the 
talomucic  acid  obtained  by  oxidation.  Of  the  four 
active  types  we  have  now  determined  three,  saccharic 
acid  by  the  configuration  of  glucose,  mannosaccharic 

1  Ber.  25,  1247.  2  Ibid.  24,  1841. 


90 


STEREOCHEMISTRY   OF   CARBON 


acid  by  that  of  mannose,  and  also  talomucic  acid. 
We  have  then  : 


CO.,H 

CO,H 

CO,H 

C0.2H 

CO,H 

CO,H 

HCOH 

HCOH 

HCOH 

HCOH 

HCOH 

HCOH 

HCOH 

HCOH 

HCOH 

HCOH 

HOCH 

HOCH 

HCOH 

HCOH 

HOCH 

HOCH 

HOCH 

HCOH 

HCOH 

HOCH 

HCOH 

HOCH 

HCOH 

HOCH 

CO,H 

COJ3 

CO,H 

CO,H 

C02H 

CO.,H 

Inactive 

Talo- 

Saccharic 

Manno- 

Inactive 

ido- 

allo- 

mucic  (?) 

acid 

saccharic 

mucic 

saccharic 

mucic 

acid. 

(Sorbite). 

acid 

acid 

acid 

acid. 

(Mannite). 

(Dulcite). 

(Idite). 

Finally,  the  following  table  is  appended  to  afford 
a  conspectus  of  the  relations  thus  established.  It 
contains,  of  course,  only  half  of  the  possible  isomers  ; 
the  other  half  corresponds  to  the  mirror-images. 
Fischer  has  proposed  to  distinguish  by  the  letters  d- 
and  Z-  the  two  groups  which  belong  together,  and  has 
chosen  d-  for  that  which  contains  the  long-known 
dextroglucose ;  the  rotations  given  in  the  table  are 
based  on  this  plan. 

It  must  be  added  that  some  compounds  have 
been  included  of  which  only  the  enantiomorphous 
form  is  known,  e.g.  xylose,  arabonic  and  ribonic 
acid  ;  in  such  cases,  however,  we  need  not  scruple  to 
reverse  the  sign  of  the  rotation.  The  formulae  thus 
obtained  have  done  excellent  service  as  guides  in 
following  out  the  relations  of  these  compounds. 
They  explain,  e.g. : 

1.  That  levulose  is  broken  up  on  oxidation  into 
gly collie  acid  and  inactive  tartaric  acid.1 

1  Kiliani,  Ber.  14,  2530. 


POSITION   OF   THE   RADICALS  IN   STEREOMEKS        91 


H.,COH 

H2COH 

H,COH 

HCOH 

HCOH 

HCOH 

HOCH 

HCOH 

HCOH 

HCOH 

HOCH 

HCOH 

H2COH 

H,COH 

H2COH 

Xylite  (inact.) 

Arabite  (act.) 

Adonite  (inact.) 

^ 

i 

•I' 

OCH 

H.,COH 

H2COH 

HCOH 

HCOH 

HCOH 

HOCH 

HCOH 

HCOH 

HCOH 

HOCH 

HCOH 

H2COH 

OCH 

OCH 

Xylose  (     *  qoj 

(157°\ 
-1040/ 

Ribose  (W^go  ) 

i 

I  . 

\ 

C02H 

H2COH 

H2COH 

HCOH 

HCOH 

HCOH 

HCOH 

HCOH 

HCOH 

HOCH 

HOCH 

HOCH 

HCOH 

HCOH 

HOCH 

H2COH 

CO-^H 

C02H 

Gulonic  acid  \c'ao) 

Gluconic  Aveak\ 
acid       V  68°  / 

1 

Mannonic  /weak\ 
acid       V  54°  / 

H2COH 

H2COH 

HCOH 

HCOH 

HCOH 

HCOH 

HOCH 

HOCH 

HCOH 

H2COH 

HOCH 

H2COH 

HCOH 

H2COH 

Sorbite  (act.) 

HCOH 

Mannite  (act.) 

1 

HOCH 

t—   J 

~*                CO 

H2COH 

Levulose  (lJSp°te90°! 

) 

; 

CO-jH 

HCOH 

HCOH 

CO,H 

Tartaric  acid  (inact.) 

92  STEREOCHEMISTRY   OF   CARBON 

2.  That  glucose,  by  means  of  its  osazone,  can  be 
changed  into  levulose.1 

3.  That  mannite  forms  on  oxidation  mannose  and 
levulose.2 

4.  That  glucose,  on  being  treated  according  to  the 
method  of  Kiliani-Fischer,  gives  a  glucoheptonic  acid 
in  two  isomers,   of  which  one  forms  on  oxidation 
an  inactive,  indivisible  pentoxypimelic  acid,3  and  so 
on. 

1  Ber.  22,  94.  2  Dafert,  ibid.  17,  227. 

3  Fischer,  Ann.  270,  64. 


93 


CHAPTEK  V 

THE  UNSATUBATED   CARBON   COMPOUNDS 

I.  STATEMENT  OF  THE  FUNDAMENTAL  IDEA 

Historical. — In  planning  this  chapter  for  the  new 
edition,  it  was  of  special  importance  to  make  plain 
the  present  position  of  the  theory. 

Having  hitherto  considered  chiefly  the  derivatives 
of  methane,  CH4,  we  have  now  to  do  with  those  of 
ethylene,  C2H4.  The  problem  is  here  more  compli- 
cated, since  there  are  now  six  atoms  whose  relative 
position  is  to  be  considered,  whereas  before  there 
were  only  five  ;  and  accordingly  we  find  the  position 
of  affairs  less  satisfactory. 

With  regard  to  the  asymmetric  carbon  atom,  Le 
Bel's  conceptions  and  mine  led  to  the  same  result. 
There  was  here  at  least  the  possibility  of  a  difference. 
My  fundamental  idea  was  the  tetrahedral  grouping, 
that  is  to  say,  any  force — cause  so  far  unknown- 
proceeding  from  the  carbon  atom  and  tending  to 
drive  the  groups  united  with  carbon  as  far  away 
from  one  another  as  possible,  that  is,  to  bring  them 
into  the  tetrahedral  position.  Although  it  did  not 
necessarily  follow  that  the  tetrahedron  must  be 
regular  because  the  mutual  action  of  the  different 


94  STEREOCHEMISTRY   OF   CARBON 

groups  might  vary  its  form  somewhat,  yet  the  ten- 
dency to  form  the  regular  tetrahedron  remained,  and 
in  the  case  of  identity  among  the  groups,  as  in  CH4, 
the  tendency  was  realised. 

To  Le  Bel,  the  asymmetry  of  the  tetrahedron 
with  different,  and  the  symmetry  with  identical 
groups,  seemed  established,  CH4,  e.g.  might  be  a 
regular  four-sided  pyramid,  with  carbon  at  the  sum- 
mit and  the  hydrogens  at  the  corners  of  the  square 
base.1 

At  present  this  cannot  be  decided.  So  that  as 
regards  methane  derivatives  we  are  practically 
agreed. 

With  substituted  ethylenes  the  case  is  different. 
I  had  at  once  concluded,  as  will  presently  be  set  forth 
in  detail,  that  the  four  groups  are  in  one  plane,  in 
which  lie  the  carbon  atoms  also ;  here,  then,  there 
is  never  any  possibility  of  dissymmetry  but  only  of 
another  kind  of  isomerism,  like  that  of  fumaric  and 
malei'c  acid.  To  Le  Bel  the  question  seemed  an 
open  one  ;  experiment  would  have  to  decide.  It  was 
only  after  some  time 2  that,  influenced  by  the  re- 
searches of  Kekule  and  Auschiitz,  he  declared  himself 
in  favour  of  my  view. 

But  later  another  change  occurred.  Doubts  arose 
in  Le  Bel's  mind  on  account  of  indications  of 
asymmetry,  i.e.  optical  activity  among  substituted 
ethylenes.  He  had  observed3  that  a  solution  of 
citraconic  acid,  CH3C(C02H)=CH(C02H),  acquires 

1  Bull.  Soc.  Chim.  [3]  3,  788  ;  Compt.  Rend.  114,  304. 

2  Bull.  Soc.  Chim.  37,  300.  3  Ibid.  [3]  7,  164. 


THE   UNSATURATED   CARBON   COMPOUNDS  95 

activity  through  the  growth  of  fungi.  If  active 
citraconic  acid  had  been  thus  formed,  the  activity  of 
ethylene  derivatives  was  proved ;  it  was  found,1 
however,  that  the  activity  was  due  to  the  formation, 
by  addition  of  water,  of  methylmalic  acid 
COS.  CH3.  C02H 

I 
OH.  OH.  C02H, 

and  this  no  doubt  accounts  for  the  active  product 
formed  in  the  case  of  mesaconic  acid  also;  allyl 
alcohol  and  a-crotonic  acid  gave  no  active  product ; 
the  results  in  the  case  of  fumaric  and  maleic  acid 
were  doubtful. 

There  could  be  adduced  then  only  the  supposed 
activity  of  styrolene,  C6H5.HC  =  CH2,  and  of  chloro- 
fumaric  and chloromaleic  acid,  C02H.C1C  =  CH.C02H 
(Perkin).2  My  researches  (p.  20)  had,  however, 
already  rendered  the  activity  of  styrol  very  doubtful, 
and  presently  Walden's 3  investigation  showed  the 
observation  of  Perkin  to  be  positively  incorrect.  It 
remains  only  to  state  the  facts  which  make  the 
activity  of  ethylene  derivatives  seem  to  me  improb- 
able. 

In  the  first  place  there  are  numerous  ethylene 
derivatives  occurring  in  nature,  among  them  such 
as  have  two  different  groups  attached  to  each  of  the 
two  carbon  atoms  ;  tiglic  acid, 

CH3CH  =  C(CH3)C02H, 
and  numerous  compounds  of  the  oleic  series,  fumaric 

1  Le  Bel,  Bull  Soc.  Chim.  [3]  11,  292. 

2  /.  Chem.  Soc.  Trans.  1888,  695.  *  Ber.  26,  508. 


96  STEBEOCHEMISTKY   OF   CAKBON 

acid,  cinnamic  acid,  coumaric  acid,  anethole,  asarone, 
pipeline.  They  are  all  inactive. 

In  the  second  place  I  may  mention  the  statements 
published  long  since  as  to  the  formation  of  ethylene 
derivatives  from  active  compounds ;  the  activity 
uniformly  disappears : 

Inactive  fumaric  and  maleic  acids  from  active 
malic  acid  ; 

Inactive  chloro-fumaric  and  maleic  acids  from 
active  tartaric  acid  ; l 

Inactive  crotonic  acid  from  active  /3-oxybutyric 
acid ; 2 

Inactive  furfurol  from  active  arabinose  and 
xylose  ; 1 

Inactive  coniferyl  alcohol  from  active  coniferine. 

In  the  third  place,  fumaric  acid  could  not  be 
divided  by  Auschiitz  and  Hintze,3  while,  according  to 
a  private  communication  from  Walden,  the  growth 
of  microbes  in  maleic  acid  gave  a  similar  negative 
result. 

Finally,  at  my  request,  Liebermann  has  converted 
his  active  cinnamic  acid  dibromide, 

C,;H5(CHBr)2C02H, 

at  a  low  temperature,  into  bromo-cinnamic  acid, 
C6HfiCBrCHC02H,  and  Walden  his  active  chloro- 
succinic  acid  into  fumaric  acid.  Both  derivatives 
proved  inactive.  At  present,  then,  no  reason  for  a 
change  of  opinion  is  apparent. 

1  van  't  Hoff,  Ber.  10,  1620.     Walden,  I.e. 

2  Deichmiiller,  Szymanski,  Tollens,  Ann.  228,  95. 
a  Ibid.  239,  164. 


THE   UNSATUEATED   CARBON   COMPOUNDS 


97 


Relative  position  of  the  groups  attached  to  doubly 
linked  carbon  ;  cessation  of  free  rotation. — The  funda- 
mental idea  that  the  four  groups  connected  with 
carbon  occupy  the  corners  of  a  tetrahedron,  requires, 
in  order  that  it  may  be  applied  to  doubly  linked 


FIG.  9. 


R, 

FIG.  10. 


carbon,  a  clear  conception  of  the  nature  of  this 
linkage.  As  to  this,  we  assume  that  the  relative 
position  of  the  two  connected  tetrahedra  corresponds 
with  that  which  we  assumed  in  the  case  of  the 
single  bond ;  but  now  two  corners  of  the  tetrahedron 
play  the  part  which  formerly  was  reserved  for  one 


98  STEBEOCHEM1STKY   OF   CAKBON 

Farther,  having  regard  to  the  now  universally 
assumed  equality  of  the  carbon  affinities,  each  of  the 
two  tetrahedron  corners  must  play  in  the  act  of 
combination  a  perfectly  identical  part.  In  order  to 
arrive  at  the  grouping  corresponding  to  this  view, 
we  must  find  that  relative  position  of  the  tetrahedra 
which  lies  half-way  between  the  two  cases  of  single 
linking  in  which  the  one  or  the  other  pair  of  corners 
is  joined.  Let  us  consider,  then,  a  compound, 
CE^rCE-^r,  and  represent  it  in  the  two  different 
forms  which  are  obtained  if  we  leave  the  group  CE,E.2 
in  the  same  position,  but  attach  to  it  the  groups  r 
and  CK3R4r  in  two  different  ways,  as  shown  in  figs. 
SA  and  SB. 

Passing  now  to  the  unsaturated  compound 
CR1E2  =  CE3E4,  we  have  to  eliminate  the  two  r 
groups  and  to  place  CE3E4  in  a  position  half-way 
between  the  two  cases.  This  position  is  easily 
perceived  if  we  unite  the  two  cases  in  a  single 
figure  (9).  In  fact  we  arrive  at  the  intermediate 
position  shown  in  fig.  10,  in  which  the  groups  E3 
and  E4,  and  R,,  E2  are  in  one  plane,  with  regard  to 
which  the  two  positions  shown  in  fig.  9  are  sym- 
metrical. 

Graphic  representation.  —  The  grouping  thus  arrived 
at  can  be  represented  with  the  utmost  simplicity  by 
using  the  following  formula  : 


E3CE4 
Prediction    of  cases    of    isomerism,  —  Besides  .the 


THE   UNSATUKATED   CAEBON   COMPOUNDS          99 

above-described  relative  position  of  the  four  groups 
Bj,  B2,  B3,  B4,  there  is  another,  which  also  satisfies  the 
conditions  laid  down,  but  yet  is  not  identical  with 
the  first.  The  groups  Bj  and  B2  may  lie  in  one 
plane  with  B3  and  B4,  each  joined  to  the  same 
carbon  atom  as  before,  but  with  the  difference  that 
Bj  is  opposite  B4,  and  B2  opposite  B3  : 


B4CB3 

Consequently  there  must  be  here  an  isomerism 
unforeseen  by  the  old  formulae,  and  it  is  clear  that  this 
isomerism  must  be  expected  in  every  case  where  the 
groups  attached  to  the  same  carbon,  B15  B2  and  B3,  B4, 
are  different,  and  this  whether  the  groups  attached  to 
different  carbons  are  alike  or  not,  so  that  e.g.  the  same 
isomerism  would  occur  in  the  case  of 


II.  CONFIRMATION  OF  THE  FUNDAMENTAL  IDEA 

General  character  of  the  isomerism  to  be  expected 
in  the  case  of  doubly  linked  carbon.  —  In  the  first 
place  we  must  call  attention  to  the  nature  of  this 
isomerism,  because  a  marked  difference  is  to  be  ex- 
pected between  this  and  the  isomerism  due  to  the 
presence  of  asymmetric  carbon.  For,  according  to 
the  views  just  set  forth,  there  is  here  neither 
dissymmetry  nor  enantiomorphism  in  structure, 
so  that  we  should  not  expect  either  the  rotatory 
power,  in  opposite  directions  in  the  two  cases,  nor 
the  peculiar  hemihedral  crystalline  form  which 

H2 


100  STEREOCHEMISTRY   OF   CARBON 

accompanies  this  optical  behaviour  ;  and,  as  we  shall 
see,  these  two  properties  are  altogether  lacking.  But 
we  must  expect  to  find  a  profound  difference  in  the 
other  properties  of  the  two  isomers.  Whereas  there 
was  in  this  respect  complete  identity  between  the 
two  isomers  of  opposite  activity,  an  identity 
harmonising  perfectly  with  the  assumed  equality  of 
their  molecular  dimensions,  this  identity  must  for 
the  very  same  reasons  be  lacking  in  the  present  case, 
because  on  the  one  hand  we  must  assume  a  difference 
in  the  physical  properties  in  general  (difference  in 
the  quantities  a  and  b  of  van  der  Waals'  theory),  in 
specific  gravity,  melting-  and  boiling-point,  solubility, 
&c.,  while,  on  the  other  hand,  a  chemical  difference  is 
to  be  expected,  that  is  to  say  a  difference  in  stability, 
heat  of  formation,  &C.1 

We  may  classify  the  cases  coming  within  this 
category  as  follows  : 

A.    SIMPLE    ETHYLENE    DERIVATIVES 

Monochloropropylene  -     .         .        .  CH3CHC1  =  CH, 

Bromopseudobutylene 3     .         .         .  CH3CBr  =  CHCH3 

Crotonylenebromide 3        .         .         .  CH3CH,CBr  =  CHBr 

1  CH3CBr  =  CBrCH3 

Tolanechloride5         ....  C6H3CC1  =  CClCtiH5 

Tolanebromide 5         ....  C6H5CBr  =  CBrCtiH5 

1  A  marked  physiological  difference  has  been  observed  by  Fodera 
(Ref.  Ghent.  Ztg.  19,  Repertorium   407).     Injection  of  maleic  acid 
kills  a  dog  quickly,  whereas  the  like  quantity  of  fumaric  acid  has  no 
poisonous  action.     As  to  differences   in   refractive   and   dispersive 
power,  see  Briihl,  Ber.  29,  2902. 

2  Wislicenus,  Ber.  20,  1008.  :i  Holz,  Ann.  250,  230. 

4  Faworsky,  Journ.  f.  prakt.  Ghent.  1890,  149. 

5  Zinin,  Ber.  4,  288  ;   Limpricht,  ibid.  379  ;  Blank,  Ann.  248, 
20  ;  Eiloart,  Am.  Ghent.  J.  12,  231. 


THE   UNSATURATED   CARBON   COMPOUNDS        101 

o-Dinitrostilbene  '     .  C6H4N02CH  =  CHC6H4NO2 

Apiol  and  Isapiol  -    .  C9H904CH  =  CHCHS 

Anethol3 C6H4OCH3CH  =  CHCH3 

Nitrostyrol 4 C6H5CH  =  CHN02 

B.  UNSATURATED  MONOBASIC  ACIDS   (ACRYLIC  ACID 

SERIES) 

£-bromacrylic  acid  5  CHBr  =  CHCOjjH 

0-iod6     „          „       .  CHI=CHC02H 

Furfuracrylic  acid     ....  CHC4H30  =  CHCO^ 

Crotonic  and  isocrotonic  acid   .        .  CH3CH  =  CHC02H 

j3-chloro-  „  „  „     7  CH3CC1  =  CHC02H 

a-chloro-  „  „  „     8  CH3CH  =  CC1CO2H 

a-  and  0-brom-acid 7  CH3CH  =  CBrCO-jH 
8-thioethyl,   thiophenyl,   and    thio- 

benzylacid9      ....  CH3C(SC,,H5)  =  CHCO^ 

Bromomethacrylic  acid  10          .        .  CHBr  =  C(CHa)COM 

Tiglic  and  angelic  acid  "  .        .        .  CH3CH  =  C(CHS)CO2H 

Hydrosorbic  acid  12   .        .        .        .  C3H7CH  =  CHCO.JI 

Hypogaeic  and  gaidic  acid         .        .  CH8CH  =  CH(C,3H2502) 

Oleic  and  elaidic  acid       .    .    .        .  CH3CH  =  CH^C^H^OJ 

Erucic  and  brassic  acid  I3          .        .  CHSCH  =  CH(Ci9H37O2) 

C.  AROMATIC    MONOBASIC    ACIDS    (CINNAMIC    ACID 

SERIES) 

Cinnamic  and  isocinnamic  acid  14  .  C6H5CH  =  CHCOJB. 

a-bromocinnamic  acid  7  ls          .  .  C6HSCH  =  CBrCO-jH 

IB-     „  „  „    7 15        .  .  C6H3CBr  =  CHC02H 

Dibromocinnamic  acid 16  .        .  .  C6H5CBr  =  CBrC02H 


1  Bischoff,  Ber.  21,  2073 ;  Thiele  and  Dimroth,  ibid.  28,  1411. 

2  Ciamician,  ibid.  1621.  3  Beilstein.  4  Ber.  19,  1936. 
5  Michael,  ibid.  1385.                           6  Stolz,  ibid.  542. 

7  Mirbach,  ibid.  1384  ;  Authenrieth,  ibid.  29,  1645,  1670. 

8  Wislicenus,  ibid.  20,  1008. 

11  Authenrieth,  ibid.  1531 ;  29,  1639. 

10  Fittig,  Ann.  206,  16.  »  Ibid.  216,  16. 

12  Ibid.  200,  51 ;  Ber.  15,  618. 

13  Holt,  ibid.  24,  4126.  M  Liebermann,  ibid.  23,  141. 

15  Erlenmeyer,  ibid.  19,  1936.  16  Roser,  ibid.  20,  1576. 


102  STEKEOCHEMISTKY  OF  CAKBON 

a-chlorocinnamic  acid '     .        .        .  C6H5CH  =  CC1CO..H 
o-,   m-    and    p-nitrophenylcinnamic 

acid NOoC6H4CH  =  C(CeH5)CO,H 

Cumaric  acid  2 C6H4(OH)CH  =  CHCO,H 

Methyl-  and  ethyl-cumaric  acid3       .  C6H4(OMe)CH  =  CHC02H 

a-  and  £-hydropiperic  acid  4     .        .  (C7H502)CH  =  CH(C2H4C02H) 

benzalhevulic  acid  5          .        .        .  C6H5CH  =  C(COCH3)CH2C02H 

D.   DIBASIC   ACIDS   (FUMAEIC   ACID    SERIES) 

Fumaric  and  maleic  acid  .        .        .  CO2HCH  =  CHC02H 

Halogen  derivatives  ....  C02HCX  =  CYC02H 

Hydroxyl  derivatives  6      .  C02HC(OH)  =  C(OH)CO,H 

Citra-  and  mesaconic  acid         .        .  CH3CC02H  =  CHC02H 

Dimethylfumaric 7  and  maleic 8  acid  CH3.CC02H  =  C.CH3.C02H 

Diphenylfumaric  and  maleic  acid9   .  C02HC(C6H5)  =  C(C6H5)C02H 
Camphoric  acid  (p.  60). 

Perhaps  in  some  of  the  above  cases  it  is  not 
established  to  the  satisfaction  of  everyone  that  both 
isomers  possess  the  same  constitution  ;  and  in  a  few 
cases  the  existence  of  the  isomerism  is  questioned. 
On  the  other  hand  some  isomers  have  probably  been 
overlooked,  and  all  chemists,  even  those  who  are 
opposed  to  stereochemical  conceptions,  are  convinced 
that  with  doubly  linked  carbon,  when  the  attached 
groups  are  different,  isomerism  results. 

Camphoric  acid  (see  p.  60)  is  included  in  the  list 
because  it  is  possible  that  the  four  known  isomers 
are  due  to  a  combination  of  asymmetry  with  double 
linkage. 

Plochl,  Ber.  15,  1946.  2  Koser,  ibid.  2348. 

Fittig,  Ann.  206,  16.  4  Ibid.  216,  171. 

Erdmann,  ibid.  258,  130. 

Fenton,  J.  Chem.  Soc.  1896,  546.  7  Fittig,  Ber.  29,  1842. 

Exists  only  as  the  anhydride,  pyrocinchonic  acid. 
Riigheimer,  Ber.  15,  1625. 


THE  UNSATURATED  CARBON  COMPOUNDS    103 


ALLYLENE  TTPE — SECOND  CASE  OF  OPTICAL 
ACTIVITY 

The  following  prediction  may  here  be  repeated 
verbatim  from  the  earlier  edition. 

The  combination  (K,E2)C  =  C  =  C(K3E4)  is 
represented  in  fig.  11.  Here,  too,  we  shall  have 
two  isomers,  as  follows  from  the  difference  between 


R4 
FIG.  12. 


R1 


FIG.  11.  Fia.  13. 

figs.  12  and  13,  figures  which  result  from  the  applica- 
tion of  the  graphic  method  above  mentioned.  The 
conditions  with  regard  to  the  equality  or  difference  of 
the  attached  groups  are  the  same  as  in  the  preceding 
case.  The  models  of  the  isomers  are  in  this  case 
e  nant  iomorphous . 

It  is  evident  that  the  case  of 

(E,E2)C  =  C  =  C=C(E3E4), 
or,  in  general, 

(E,E2)C=C2»  =  C(E3E4), 


104  STEREOCHEMISTRY   OF   CARBON 

is  the  same  as  the  case  of 

(R.igc  =  C(K3E4). 

Of  combinations  of  this  kind  there  always  exist 

two  isomers  when  there  is  a  difference  between  the 

groups  E,  and  E2,  as  well  as  between  E3  and  K4. 

The  models  of  the  isomers  are  not  enantiomorphous. 

On  the  other  hand,  the  case  of 

(EtE2)C  =  0  =  0  =  0  =  C(E3E4), 
or,  in  general, 

(R.iyC  =  C21,  t  ,  =  C(E3K4), 
is  the  same  as  the  case  of 

(E1E2)C  =  C=C(E3E4). 

Thus,  of  these  combinations  also,  there  are 
always  two  isomers  when  there  is  a  difference  between 
Ej  and  E2  as  well  as  between  E3  and  E4.  The 
models  of  the  isomers  are  enantiomorphous. 

Treble  linkage. — Two  carbon  atoms,  trebly  linked, 
which,  according  to  the  ordinary  formulae,  are  ex- 
pressed by  the  symbol  0  =  0,  may, 
on  the  hypothesis  of  the  equality  of 
the  bonds,  be  represented  by  two 
tetrahedra  having  three  corners  in 
common,  and  therefore  having  a 
surface  of  each  coinciding,  so  that 
they  form  a  double  three-sided 
pyramid  (fig.  14).  Et  and  E2  are 
the  monad  groups  by  which  the  two 
free  affinities  of  the  system  are 
saturated.  In  this  case  a  differ- 
ence in  the  relative  position  of  the  saturating 


THE    UNSATURATED   CARBON   COMPOUNDS        105 

groups  is  not  possible,  and  the  possibility  of  iso- 
merism  is,  in  accordance  with  the  prevalent  views, 
excluded. 

III.  DETERMINATION  OF  KELATIVE  POSITION  IN 
UNSATURATED  COMPOUNDS 

Whereas,  for  the  isomers  of  opposite  rotatory 
power,  it  is  at  present  impossible  to  decide  which 
structure  a  given  modification  possesses,  the  state  of 
things  is  much  more  favourable  in  this  respect  for 
isomers  which  have  a  double  bond,  like  fumaric  and 
male'ic  acid.  For  these  substances  the  question 
was  settled  at  the  outset,  and  it  is  due  principally  to 
the  development  of  the  subject  by  J.  Wislicenus  * 
that  considerations  of  this  kind  have  met  with 
general  recognition.  We  have  to  do  in  particular  with 
two  principles  which  seem  capable  of  solving  this 
problem,  viz.  with  the  mechanism  of  addition  which 
forms  and  transforms  the  isomers,  and  with  the 
mutual  influence  of  the  groups  within  the  molecule. 

As  regards  the  mechanism  of  addition  we  can 
use  the  same  principle  which  governs  every  deter- 
mination of  chemical  structure  by  the  aid  of  the  for- 
mation and  transformation  of  known  compounds,  and 
which  consists  in  the  assumption  that  in  chemical 
processes  the  atomic  structure  remains  as  far  as 
possible  unaltered. 

According  to  this  principle,  then,  it  must  be 
expected  that  on  making  an  addition  to  bodies  with 
a  triple  carbon  linkage,  two  of  the  three  connected 

1  Ablutndl.  der  KonigL  Sachs.  Oes.  1887. 


106  STEEEOCHEMISTEY  OF  CARBON 

pairs  of  corners  will  remain  unaltered.1  Hence 
follows  that  acetylene  dicarboxylic  acid, 

C(C02H)C(C02H), 
e.g.  on  addition  of  bromine,  will  yield  the  compound 

C02HCBr 

H      • 
C02HCBr 

In  opposition  to  this  Bandrowski 2  had  proved  the 
formation  of  dibromofumaric  acid.  But  Wislicenus, 
guided  by  these  theoretical  views,  repeated  the 
experiments  and  showed  that,  in  fact,  dibromomaleic 
acid  is  formed. 

Later  these  experiments  were  taken  up  by 
Michael ; 3  in  a  detailed  paper,  where  the  theory  in 
question  is  critically  discussed,  the  formation  of 
dibromomaleic  acid  up  to  28  or  33  per  cent,  is  con- 
firmed, but  there  was  found  also  about  double  the 
quantity  of  the  isomeric  substance.  The  objection 
arising  from  the  formation  of  this  latter  is,  however, 
as  Wislicenus  also  observes,  not  important ;  it  is 
well  known,  in  fact,  with  what  ease  male'ic  acid 
changes  into  fumaric  ; 4  under  the  influence  of  light 
and  a  trace  of  bromine,  I  have  myself  seen  this 
transformation  ensue  so  rapidly  that  it  was  possible 
to  take  a  photograph  in  fumaric  acid  from  the  solu- 
tion of  male'ic  acid ;  moreover,  in  Michael's  experi- 
ments the  status  nascens  has  to  be  taken  into 
account. 

1  van  't  Hoff,  Etudes  de  dyn.  chim.  1884,  100. 

2  Ber.  12,  2122.  3  /.  prakt.  Chem.  46,  210. 
4  Compare  Wislicenus,  Ber.  29,  Eef.  1080. 


THE   UNSATURATED   CARBON   COMPOUNDS        107 


In  the  case  of  addition  to  substances  with  a 
double  linkage,  the  principle  above-mentioned  de- 
mands that,  of  the  two  connected  pairs  of  corners, 
one  shall  remain  unaltered.  If,  then,  we  add 
hydroxyl  to  fumaric  and  maleic  acid  we  obtain l 
from 


C02HCH 


HCC02H 


HCC02H 


and 


C02HCH 


C02HCH 
the  compounds 

OH 
C02HCH 


or 


or 


HCCO2H 
OH 


or 


and 


OH 

C02HCH 
C02HCH 

OH 


or 


C02HCH 


HCC02H 

II 
HCC02H 

OH 

HCC02H 
C02HCH 
OH 

OH 

HCC02H 
HCC02H 

OH 


—that  is  to  say,  we  get  racemic  acid  in  the  first  case, 
and  inactive  tartaric  acid  in  the  second  case.  And 
this  has  actually  been  proved  to  be  the  case  by 
oxidation  with  permanganate  of  the  acids  men- 
tioned.2 

If,    on   the  other  hand,  a  saturated   compound 
becomes  unsaturated,  the  constitution  of  the  resulting 

1  Lagerung  der  Atome  im  Raume,  p.  40. 

2  Kekul6  and  Anschiitz,  Ber.  13,  2150  ;  14,  713. 


108  STEREOCHEMTSTKY  OF  CARBON 

body  may  be  foreseen  in  an  analogous  way.  We 
may  consider  the  isodibromosuccinic  acid  1  which  is 
prepared  by  the  addition  of  bromine  to  malei'c  acid, 
and  hence  has  the  formula  : 

Br 

HCC02H 
HCC02H " 

Br 

Let  us  abstract  hydrobromic  acid,  writing  the  above 
formula  in  a  slightly  different  way,  in  order  the 
better  to  follow  the  result : 

H 

C02HCBr 
HCC02H ' 
Br 

it  is  then  clear  that  we  shall  obtain  bromofumaric 
acid : 

C02HCBr 

II 
HCC02H 

The  result  is  noteworthy.  By  addition  of  bromine, 
and  subsequent  splitting  off  of  hydrobromic  acid, 
one  passes  from  the  maleic  to  the  fumaric  series. 
This  transition  is  perfectly  general  and  has  been 
uniformly  confirmed  by  observation. 

Of  course,  as  in  other  cases  where  molecular 
structure  is  to  be  determined,  this  reasoning,  which 
is  based  on  the  stability  of  a  molecule  undergoing 
partial  rearrangement,  encounters  facts  apparently 
contradictory.  Of  these  some,  as  in  the  above 
observation  by  Bandrowski,  have  been  explained  by 

1  Etudes  de  dyn.  cliim.  p.  100. 


THE    UNSATUKATED   CAKBON   COMPOUNDS        109 

the  discovery  of  a  secondary  change.  For  other 
cases  the  explanation  is  yet  to  be  found.  We  may 
mention,  as  of  special  interest,  the  conversion  of  the 
isodibromosuccinic  acid,  made  from  maleic  acid  into 
racemic  acid,1  and  that  of  right-handed  tartaric  acid 
into  chlorofumaric  acid2  (by  the  action  of  phos- 
phorus pentachloride  3) . 

Such  objections,  to  the  number  of  forty-six,  have 
been  recently  collected  in  the  above-mentioned  paper 
by  Michael.  But  their  value  as  a  means  of  judging 
what  has  just  been  said  is  considerably  diminished  by 
the  two  following  observations  : 

1.  All  the  objections  amount  to  this,  that  instead 
of  the  product  to  be  expected,  another  results  which 
is  more  stable  under  the  conditions  of  the  experiment, 
but   in   such   a    case   a   secondary   transformation, 
masking  the  main  result,  is  always  possible,  even  in 
cases  where  this  secondary  action  cannot  be  directly 
realised,  for  we  have  to  take  into  account  the  status 
nascens. 

2.  All  the  objections  refer  to  halogen  derivatives. 
Now,  the  experiments  with  active  compounds  men- 
tioned  on   p.  49,  and  also  the  reactions   on   p.  67, 
show  that  when  e.g.  dichlorosuccinic  acid  is  formed 
from   tartaric,  phenylbrom-   and    chlor-acetic    acid 
from  malic  acid,  a  transformation  occurs.     Here,  too, 

1  Anschiitz,  Ann.  Chem.  Pharm.  226,  191 ;  V.  Meyer,  Ber.  21, 
264. 

2  Kauder,  J.prakt.  Chem.  31,33;  Perkin,  J.  Chem.  Soc.  1888, 
645. 

3  This  substance  has,  however,  a  peculiar  property  of  reversing 
the  position  of  groups  in  a  molecule.     See  ante,  p.  47. 


110  STEREOCHEMISTRY   OF   CARBON 

the  chlorine  compounds  once  formed  are  stable,  as 
is  shown  by  the  fact  that  activity  is  possible  (p.  24)  ; 
during  their  formation,  however,  transformation 
occurs.  The  practical  conclusion  to  be  drawn  from 
Michael's  work  amounts  to  this,  that  in  the  cases 
investigated  by  him  transformation  easily  takes  place, 
and  this  is  always  to  be  expected  where  halogens  are 
concerned  ;  proof  '  for  '  or  '  against  '  the  views  above 
stated  is  therefore  to  be  sought  in  cases  where 
halogens  are  as  far  as  possible  excluded.  Fischer  in 
the  cases  mentioned  (p.  82)  has  done  this  with  most 
favourable  results. 

Let  us  now  consider  the  mutual  influence  of  the 
groups  forming  the  molecule,  so  far  as  this  can 
contribute  to  a  determination  of  the  structure  of  the 
isomers. 

First,  there  is  the  question  of  stability.  Just  as 
our  theory  explained  the  perfectly  equal  stability  of 
the  two  isomers  of  opposite  activity  by  the  absolute 
identity  in  the  dimensions  of  the  molecule,  so  it 
foresees  that  in  general  the  unsaturated  isomers  will 
differ  in  stability,  because  it  assumes  a  difference  in 
their  analogous  dimensions. 

Of  the  formulae  : 


B3CB4  B4CB3 

.it  may,  generally  speaking,  be  maintained  that,  say, 
the  second  represents  the  more  stable  modification  if 
there  is  reason  to  suppose  that  B1  exerts  a  stronger 


THE    UNSATUEATED   CAEBON   COMPOUNDS        111 

attraction  on  R4  and  K2  on  B3.  Thus,  for  fumaric 
acid,  stable  in  comparison  with  the  isomeric  malei'c 
acid,  the  formula  : 

HCC02H 
COJHCH 

seems  justified. 

Apart  from  the  difficulty  of  comparing  these 
attractions,  we  have  here  to  take  the  temperature 
into  account.  Since  a  rise  in  temperature  is 
generally  opposed  to  the  ordinary  action  of  chemical 
affinities,  it  may  happen  that  at  a  given  temperature, 
possibly  at  the  ordinary  temperature,  a  transforma- 
tion occurs  in  the  sense  opposed  to  that  expected, 
the  latter  occurring  only  at  lower  temperatures. 
The  absolute  criterion  of  stability  is,  therefore,  not 
the  transformation  at  a  given  temperature,  but  the 
larger  heat  of  formation.  As  is  well  known,  on 
lowering  the  temperature  the  isomer  with  the 
greater  heat  of  formation  will  always  predominate. 

Moreover  there  are  reactions  which  enable  us  to 
judge  as  to  the  distance  of  two  groups  in  a  molecule. 
If  in  one  isomer  two  of  these  groups  easily  undergo 
a  simultaneous  conversion,  while  in  the  other  the 
opposite  takes  place,  we  may  assume  that  these 
groups  are  nearer  together  in  the  first  case.  For 
example,  malei'c  acid  readily  forms  an  anhydride 
through  the  interaction  of  its  two  carboxyl  groups,1 

1  Substitution  of  a  methyl  group  for  one  or  more  of  the  hydrogens 
attached  to  carbon  in  maleic  acid  facilitates  the  closing  of  the  ring, 
—formation  of  an  anhydride.  The  same  thing  is  observed  in  the 
case  of  succinic  and  glutaric  acids.  In  other  cases,  however,  the 


112  STEREOCHEMISTRY   OF   CARBON 

and  is  thus  distinguished  in  a  very  striking  way 
from  the  isomeric  fumaric  acid.  The  former,  there- 
fore, has  the  formula 

C02HCH 

II      , 
CO,HCH 

in  which  the  two  carboxyls  are  near  together. 

presence  of  methyl  prevents  the  ring  formation,  Sometimes,  indeed, 
in  a  compound  containing  several  methyl  groups,  it  is  easier  to  bring 
about  a  molecular  rearrangement  than  a  simple  ring  formation. 
Thus,  instead  of 

CH3 
CH3-.Cv 

I  >0 
CH3-C/ 
CH3 

we  may  obtain 

CH,        - 
CH3-g-CH3 
CH3-C:0 
II 

To  account  for  such  apparently  irreconcilable  observations  Bischoff 
has  applied  his  '  dynamic  hypothesis,'  according  to  which  those  con- 
gurations  are  the  most  favoured  in  which  the  components  can 
oscillate  most  freely.  Now,  like  atoms  will  have  like  paths  of  oscil- 
lation, and  will  therefore  be  the  most  prone  to  collide  ;  in  a  favoured 
configuration,  then,  they  must  be  far  removed  from  one  another. 
Hence  configuration  II  above,  in  which  this  condition  is  fulfilled  as 
regards  the  methyl  groups,  is  more  stable  than  configuration  I. 

Where,  on  the  other  hand,  the  methyl  groups  cause  closure  of 
the  ring  (e.g.  pyrocinchonic  acid,    CH3CCOv          it  is  again   their 

II       >0) 
CH3CCO/ 

effort  to  gain  room  for  their  oscillations  which  causes  them  to  crowd 
together  the  hydroxyl  groups,  so  that  expulsion  of  water  with  ring 
formation  follows.  For  an  account  of  the  dynamic  hypothesis,  see 
Bischoff  and  Walden,  Handbuch  der  Stercochemic,  Frankfurt  a.  M. 
1893-94.  Bechhold.-Tr. 


?iS 

I  UNIVERSITY^ 
THE   UNSATURATED   CARBON   COMPOUNDS         118 

Also  the  formation  of  certain  bodies  may  help  to 
make  clear  these  relationships.  Thus  it  is  plain 
that  the  closed  chains  occurring  in  benzene,  cincho- 
meronic  acid,  pyromuconic  acid,  and  pyrrol,  approxi- 
mate to  the  arrangement  of  the  four  carbon  atoms  in 
maleic  acid,  and  differ  from  the  arrangement  in  the 
isomeric  compound.  In  fact,  in  energetic  decomposi- 
tions it  is  maleic  acid  (or  its  derivatives)  which 
results  in  such  cases.1 

There  is,  finally,  another,  though  a  less  direct, 
proof  of  the  neighbouring  position  of  the  carboxyls 
in  maleic  acid.  This  acid  is  the  stronger  :  its  dissocia- 
tion constant  is  1-17,  that  of  its  isomer  only  0*093. 2 
It  is  uniformly  observed  that  this  constant  is  raised 
by  the  neighbourhood  of  a  negative  group. 

1  Kekule  and  Strecker,  Ann.  Chem.  Pharm.  228,  170 ;  Hill,  Her. 
13,  734  ;   Bischoff  and  Each,  Ann.  Chem.  Pharm.  234,  86  ;    Cia- 
mician  and  Silber,  Ber.  20,  2594. 

2  Ostwald,  Zeitschr.  physik.  Chem.  Ill,  380. 


114 


STEREOCHEMISTRY    OF   CARBON 


CHAPTEK  VI 
EING  F  OEM  AT  ION 

THE  chapter  devoted  to  ring  formation  in  the 
original  pamphlet  was  omitted  in  the  first  German 
edition,  for  at  that  time  the  isomerism  of  v.  Baeyer's 
hydro-  and  isohydro-mellitic  acids  was  the  only  case 
in  point.  Since  then,  however,  this  branch  of  the 
subject  has,  especially  through  v.  Baeyer's  researches, 
gained  so  much  in  extent  and  interest  that  an 
approximately  systematic  treatment  of  the  whole  is 
possible.  We  observe  that  here  too  the  historical 
development  has  kept  pace  with  the  complexity  of 
the  problem.  After  the  methane  derivatives  had 
been  dealt  with,  came  the  ethylene  and  finally  the 
polymethylene  compounds. 

Rings  of  three  members.  Tri- 
and  trithio-methylene. — Starting 
from  the  tetrahedral  grouping, 
I  developed,  in  the  pamphlet 
referred  to,  the  annexed  con- 
figuration for  the  trimethylene 
derivatives,  remarking  that  a 
transposition  of  the  two  groups 
B!  and  B2,  which  are  attached  to  the  same  carbon, 
would  bring  about  an  isomerism  approximating  to 


RING  FORMATION 


115 


that  of  fumaric  and  maleic  acids,  i.e.  to  that  of  di- 
methylene  derivatives. 

Since  then  two  isomeric  trimethylene  dicarboxylic 
acids,1  CH2.CHC02H.CHC02H,  and  three  isomeric 
phenyltrimethylenedicarboxylic  acids,2 

CHC6HtVCHC02H.CHC02H, 
have  in  fact  been  discovered. 

To  render  the  discussion  clearer  the  scheme  given 
above  may  be  transformed  in  a  way  readily  intel- 
ligible, and  the  isomerism  possible  in  the  case  of  the 
trimethylenecarbonic  acids  may  be  represented  in 
the  following  way  : 


C02II 


C02H 

c 

H 


H 

c 

CO,H 


C02H 


H 


C02H 
HC 


Thus  we  have  three  possibilities,  of  which  the 
second  and  third  are  non-superposable  images,  and 
must  therefore  possess  opposite  activity.  Of  the  two 
known  isomers,  it  is  possible  then  that  one  may  be 
divisible.  If  now  a  methylenehydrogen  be  replaced 
by  phenyl,  as  in  phenyltrimethylenecarboxylic  acid, 
the  first  scheme  leads  evidently  to  two  possibilities 
according  as  phenyl  is  placed  above  or  below ;  the 
second  and  third  schemes  give,  in  this  case,  only  a 

1  Buchner,  Ber.  23,  702. 

2  Buchner  and  Dessauer,  ibid.  25,  1148. 

i  2 


116  STEREOCHEMISTRY   OF   CARBON 

single  isomer  each,  and  these  also  are  mirror  images 
of  each  other.  Of  the  three  isomers  found,  then,  one 
should  be  divisible. 

Thus,  although  the  isomerism  is  not  analogous 
to  that  of  fumaric  and  maleic  acid,  but  rather,  in  the 
first  case  at  least,  to  that  of  inactive  tartaric  acid 
and  racemic  acid,  it  must  be  remembered  that  the 
first  kind  of  isomerism  is  to  be  expected,  as  the 
figure  indicates,  only  when  all  the  methylene  groups 
have  undergone  similar  substitution.  Such  deriva- 
tives have  not  been  prepared  from  methylene ;  but 
in  the  case  of  trithiomethylene  they  have  been 
thoroughly  investigated,  and  in  accordance  with  the 
above  figure  they  may  be  represented  thus  : 

H 
H     ^4^     K 


H  H 

And  Baumann  and  Fromm  ]  have  been   led  by  their 
work  on  the   trebly  polymerised  thioaldehydes  and 
thioacetones,  which  probably  have  the  constitution 
(E,K2)C  -  S  -- 


to  the  following  conclusions  : 

1.  When  the  groups  Et  and  E2  are  alike,  as  in  tri- 
thiomethylene (from  methylaldehyde)  and  trithiodi. 
methylmethylene  (from  acetone),  no  isomerism  occurs. 

1  Per.  24,  1419. 


RING   FORMATION  117 

2.  Two  isomers  occur  when  the  groups  are  dif- 
ferent, as  in  the  aldehyde  thio-derivatives  of  acetyl, 
benzoyl,  anisyl,  methylsalicyl,  isobutylsalicyl,  and 
cinnamyl.1 

The  observed  isomers  would  in  this  case  exactly 
correspond  to  the  configurations  given  in  my  first 
pamphlet,  of  which  one  is  reproduced  above  (fig.  15), 
and  the  other  here  (fig.  16)  .  The  main  point  to  notice 
is  that  here  isomerism  exists 
without  asymmetry;  that  is,  as 
with  fumaric  and  maleic  acids, 
no  division  is  to  be  expected. 
The  plane  of  symmetry  lacking 
in  the  second  and  third  tri- 
methylenedicarboxylic  acids  re- 
presented above  is  here  present.2  FIG.  16. 

1  But  later  researches  show  that  for  substituted  aromatic  alde- 
hydes this  holds  good  only  when  the  substituting  group  is  positive 
or  indifferent.    When  it  is  negative  no  isomerism  is  observed.    Thus 
there  exists  only  one  tri-thio  derivative  of  the  following  :  methoxy- 
benzaldehyde,     benzoylmethoxybenzaldehyde,     methylmetoxybenz- 
aldehyde,  paroxybenzaldehyde,  benzoylparoxybenzaldehyde,  vanillin 
(but  methylvanillin  yields  the  isomers),  benzoylvanillin,  gentisin- 
aldehyde,  metanitro-,  anis-,  and  cumin-aldehyde,  dinitroanisaldehyde 
(Worner,  Ber.  29,  139). 

2  It  is  evident  that  if  the  radicals  R,R2  are  in  the  plane  of  the 
trimethylene  ring  there  must  be  three  inactive  trimethylenedicar- 
boxylic  acids,  of  the  formula  CH2.CHCOOH.CHCOOH. 


COoH.      ,H  Hv      xCO-JI  COM. 


H     /-        -^-H        H-/-          \H     C02H_ 


CO.H  H        C0.2H  H  H  H 

Whereas  we  have  seen  that  according  to  the  tetrahedron  hypothesis 
there  can  be  only  two  inactive  isomers,  of  which  one  should  be 


118 


STEEEOCHEMISTEY   OP   CARBON 


Rings  of  four  members.  Tetramethylene  deriva- 
tives.— Here  too,  especially  through  Liebermann's  l 
investigation  of  the  truxillic  acids,  cases  of  isomerism 
have  been  discovered  which  may  well  be  classed  with 
those  above  mentioned.  The  acids  named,  which 
from  their  transformation  must  be  considered  as 
dicinnamic  acids,  and  from  their  saturated  character 
as  tetramethylene  derivatives,  correspond  to  the  two 
formulae  : 

C6H5CH— CHC02H  C6H5CH— CHC02H 

'II  II 

C6H5CH— CHC02H  C02HCH— CHC6H5 

and  have  been  obtained  in  four,  if  not  in  five,  isomeric 
forms. 

The  first  formula  alone  presents  the  following 
possibilities  : 


divisible.  Buchner's  later  results  are  all  in  favour  of  this  hypothesis. 
He  has  also  prepared  the  stereomers  of  the  tri-  and  tetra-carboxylic 
acids  (Ann.  286,  197).  '  Ber.  23,  2516. 


KING  FOKMATION 


119 


C6H5 


'COaH 

of  which  the  figures  bracketed 
together  are  mirror  images 
without  symmetry.  We  have 
to  expect,  then,  six  isomers,  of 
which  four  are  divisible — that 
is,  altogether,  ten  different 
isomers. 

Next  we  have  to  mention 
the  so-called  a-7-diacipipera- 
zines,1  substitution  products 
and  homologues  of  the  com- 
pound 

COCH2 
C6H5N  NC6H5. 

CH2CO 

Disregarding  for  the  present  the  possibility,  which 
will  be  discussed  later,  that  the  nitrogen  may  cause 

1  Bischoff,  Ber.  25,  2950. 


120 


STEREOCHEMISTRY   OF   CARBON 


isomerism,    there   is  none   to    be    expected   in   the 
derivatives  investigated,  which  belong  to  the  type 

COCH2 
XN  NX 

CH2CO 
and,  in  fact,  for 

X=C6H5,  C6H4CH3  (p  and  o),  C10H7  (a  and  /3), 
none  was  found  ;  nor  even  when  the  X  groups  were 
different  (C6H5  and  C7H7). 

But  if  in  the  two  methylene  groups  a  hydrogen 
is  replaced  by  CH3  or  C2H5,  giving  the  type 

COCHK 

XN  NX, 

(7HECO 

isomerism  results,  and  may  be  considered  as  due  to 
the  two  asymmetric  carbon  atoms. 

The  isomers  found  for 

X=C6H5,  C6H4CH3  (p  and  o),  C10H7  (a  and  £), 
which  have  been  prepared  in  ten  cases,  would  corre- 
spond to  the  two  possible  racemic  mixtures  : 


Rings  of  six  members.     Hexamethylene  derivatives, 

In  the  case  of  the  derivatives  of  hexamethylene  the 
observations  are  no  less  convincing.  While  among 
the  monosubstituted  hexamethylene  derivatives,  such 


RING   FORMATION  121 

as  hexahydrobenzoic  acid,  no  case  of  isomerisni  is  as 
yet  known,  it  is  otherwise  with  the  products  which 
have  undergone  several  substitutions  ;  and  we  owe 
to  Baeyer's  l  researches  a  knowledge  approximately 
complete  of  all  the  details  in  at  least  one  case.  This 
is  the  hydroterephthalic  acid,  especially  the  hexa- 
hydro  derivative,  C6H10(C02H)2  1,  4.  Of  this  two 
modifications  have  been  discovered  which  correspond 
to  the  cases  foreseen  : 

C02H 


C02H 


C02II  C02H 

In  these  figures  the  twelve  groups  linked  in  pairs 
with  carbon  or  the  atoms  of  the  ring  form  the  corners 
of  a  hexagonal  prism  the  edges  of  which  are  indicated 
by  the  vertical  lines.  For  simplicity  the  carbon  atoms 
of  the  ring,  as  well  as  the  hydrogen  atoms  remain- 
ing unsubstituted,  are  again  omitted  in  the  figure. 

Here,  too,  the  hexahydrophthalic  acids, 

C6H10(C02H)2  1,  2, 

which  likewise  occur  in  two  modifications,  may  be 
mentioned : 

C02H  C02H  C02H 


C02H 


1  Ann.  Chem.  Pharm.  245,  103  ;  251,  258 ;  258,  1,  145. 


122  STEREOCHEMISTRY   OF   CARBON 

In  this  case,  however,  it  must  be  added  that  the 
first  arrangement  corresponds  to  an  enantiomorphous 
form,  and  that  accordingly  a  division  into  two  active 
isomers  must  be  possible.1  The  two  compounds 
obtained  would  be  comparable  to  racemic  acid  and 
inactive  tartaric  acid,  for  they  contain  two  asym- 
metric carbon  atoms  in  a  symmetrical  formula.  The 
recent  discovery  of  the  two  isomeric  hexaisophthalic 
acids  by  Perkin  2  has  supplemented  the  above. 

Finally,  we  may  mention  the  a-  and  /3-tetra- 
hydroterpenes,  the  terpines,  and  the  pinenedihydro- 
chlorides  and  bromides,3  which  perhaps  correspond 
in  structure  to  the  hexahydroterephthalic  acids. 

If  more  than  two  hydrogen  atoms  are  substituted 
in  hexamethylene,  the  number  of  possible  isomers 
will  be  increased.  On  this  point,  however,  the 
number  of  researches  is  limited  :  as  cases  of  treble 
substitution,  only  the  bromides  of  tetrahydrobenzoic 
acid  4  can  be  mentioned. 

It  is  only  when  we  come  to  the  sixfold  substitu- 
tion products  that  the  number  of  compounds 
investigated  increases  ;  hydro-  and  isohydro-mellitic 
acids,  C6H6(C02H)6,  having  been  the  first  cases 

1  Such  a  division  has  since  been  effected   in   the  case   of   the 
analogous  compound  cis-trans-hexahydroquinolic  acid, 

H2  H 
H2C— C-CCOOH 

H2C— N— CH 

H     COOH 

(Besthorn,  Ber.  28,  3153). 
-  J.  Chem.  Soc.  1891,  814. 

3  Beilstein,  2nd  ed.  1,  182 ;  Baeyer,  Ber.  26,  2861. 

4  Ber.  24,  1867. 


RING  FORMATION  123 

investigated.1  With  regard  to  the  isomeric  hexa- 
chlorbenzenes,  C6H6C16,  on  which  so  much  work  has 
been  done  recently,  since  the  identity  of  their 
molecular  weights  has  been  proved  2  the  assumption 
of  a  structural  difference  is  scarcely  tenable,  and 
accordingly  Friedel 3  and  Matthews 4  resorted  to  the 
stereochemical  explanation.  This  is  included  in 
what  has  been  said  above. 

Activity  among  hexamethylene  derivatives.  Inosite. 
It  has  already  been  repeatedly  stated  that  among 
polymethylene  derivatives  optical  activity  is  to  be 
expected.  And  it  has  been  proved  to  exist  in  several 
cases,  viz. : 

Hydroshikimic  acid,  [a]^  =  - 18°       Quinic  acid,  [a]^  =  -  44° 

CHOH  CHOH 

H2C       CHOH  H2C       OHOH 

HOHC      CH2  HOHC      CH2 

y  y 

HC02H  HOC02H 

This  might  have  been  at  once  foreseen  as  a  con- 
sequence of  the  asymmetric  carbon  atoms  which  are 
evidently  present.  The  case  of  inosite,  however, 
demands  special  attention : 

1  Baeyer,  Ann.  Chem.  Pharm.  Suppl.  7,  43. 

2  Paterno,  Qazz.  Chim.  19,  195. 

3  Bull.  Soc.  Chim,  [3],  5,  130. 

4  Chem.   Soc.  J.  1891,  165  ;  the  same  author  has  recently  pre- 
pared   two    isomeric    chlorbenzenehexachlorides.      Recently,    too, 
Orndorff  and  Howells  (Am.  Chem.  J.  18, 312)  announce  the  discovery 
of  stereomerism  in  the  case  of  hexabromobenzene. 


124 


STEREOCHEMISTRY  OF  CARBON 


CHOH 
HOHC   CHOH 


HOHC   C 


HOH 


Here  the  absence  of  symmetry  due  to  the  presence 
of  the  asymmetric  carbon  is  not  evident,  or  at  least 
not  sufficiently  so.  It  shows  itself  in  these  cases 
only  on  consideration  of  the  scheme  developed  as 
above,  which  is  therefore  applied  here.  The  ordinary 
long-known  inosite  is  inactive  and  indivisible  (p.  46), 
and  therefore  possesses  a  symmetrical  constitution  : 

H 


OH 


The  right  and  left  inosites,  [a]D  =  65°,  prepared 
by  Maquenne,1  the  first  from  pinite  and  /3-pinite,  the 
second  from  quebrachite — that  is  to  say,  both  from  iso- 
meric  methylinosites,  C6H6(OH)5OCH3 — will  then  cor- 
respond to  the  asymmetric  mirror  images,  such  as,  e.g. : 


OH 


OH 


HL/OH         H 
HI\OH        H/loH 


H        OH  OH        H 

Ann.  Chim.  Phys.  [6],  22,  264 ;  Compt.  Rend.  109,  812. 


KING   FORMATION  125 

These  diagrams  explain  also  how  it  is  that  the 
same  inosite  can  result  from  isomeric  methyl  deriva- 
tives, pinite  and  /3-pinite.  It  may  be  observed 
parenthetically  that  isomers  in  considerable  variety 
are  to  be  foreseen  here,  and  are  perhaps  to  be  found 
in  scyllite,  in  phenose,  &c. 

Finally,  hexahydro-o-toluylic  acid, 


\ 


y<cofi 

has  been  obtained  by  Goodwin  and  Perkin  jun.1  in 
two  modifications  representing  the  cis 2  and  trans  2 
configurations. 

Tetrahydrobenzene  derivatives. — Starting  from  the 
derivatives  of  hexamethylene,  to  which  the  application 
of  stereochemical  conceptions  is  simple,  we  gradually 
arrive — using  Baeyer's  investigations  on  the  tetra-and 
di-hydrides  of  terephthalic  acid — at  the  complicated 
state  of  things  presented  by  the  benzene  nucleus. 

Thus,  if  in  the  isomeric  tetrahydro  derivatives  we 
assume  a  double  bond,  it  is  easy  to  see  that  the 
following  two  forms  must  exist : 

C02H  HC02H 

H2    H  H2    H 

I        I  I       II 

TT  TT  TT  TT 

\/2 


HC02H  HC02H 

1  J.  CJiem.  Soc.  1895,  i.  119. 

-  These  terms  were  introduced  by  Baeyer  to  distinguish  the 
isomer  in  which  the  substituents  are  on  the  same  side,  from  that  in 
which  they  are  on  opposite  sides  of  the  ring. 


126 


STEREOCHEMISTRY   OF   CARBON 


Of  the  latter   formula,    the  two   following   isomers 
are  to  be  expected  : 
C02H 


H 


And,  in  fact,  three  tetrahydroterephthalic  acids  are 
known.  Again,  we  observe  that  the  last  diagram  is 
enantiomorphous,  and  therefore  it  is  to  be  expected 
that  two  of  the  acids  should  stand  to  one  another  in 
the  relation  of  inactive  tartaric  acid  and  racemic 
acid  ;  for  the  formula  to  which  they  correspond 
contains  two  asymmetric  carbon  atoms,  the  constitu- 
tion of  the  whole  being  symmetrical. 

Dihydrobenzene  derivatives.  —  Here,  too,  we  find 
theory  and  observation  in  accord.  Assuming  two 
double  bonds,  the  following  four  structural  formulae 
are  to  be  expected  : 

C02H  HC02H 

H/Nl          H/\H 


C02H 


H 


C02H 

H/NE 


1H, 


HC02H 


C02H 


C02H  HC02H 

Again,  we  may  expect  from  the  last  an  isomerism, 

C02H 


GOaH 


RING  FORMATION  127 

which  probably  corresponds  to  the  fumaric-maleic 
isomerism.  In  fact,  Baeyer  has  described  five  di- 
hydroterephthalic  acids. 

Benzene  derivatives. — When  finally  we  come  to 
the  derivatives  of  non-hydrogenated  benzene,  the 
ethylene  character  is  lacking  and  with  it  the  condition 
determining  isomerism ;  the  acetylene  character  is 
now  assumed,  and  thus  all  ground  for  stereochemical 
speculations  vanishes.  This  point  must  be  specially 
emphasised.  Everything  forces  on  us  the  conclusion 
that  in  these  non-hydrogenated  derivatives  of  benzene 
rotatory  power  is  lacking,  unless  the  side  chain  con- 
tains an  asymmetric  atom.  This  assumption  is  based 
in  the  first  place  on  the  fact  that  the  numerous 
benzene  derivatives  occurring  in  nature,  such  as 
salicylic  aldehyde,  vanillin,  cumarin,  are  without 
exception  inactive ;  and  in  the  next  place  all  attempts 
at  '  doubling  '  have  been  in  vain.  Le  Bel l  has  made 
such  attempts  with  orthotoluidine ;  Lewkowitsch 2 
with  /3-meta-homosalicylic  acid, 

CGH3(CH3)(C02H)(OH)(1,  2,  3,), 
with  ^-ortho-homomethoxybenzoic  acid, 

CGH3(OH)(CH3)(C02H)(1,  2,  3,), 
and  with  methoxytoluylic  acid, 

C6H3(OCH3)(CH3)(C02H)(1,  2,  3) ; 
and   V.    Meyer   and    F.    Liihn3   with    nitro-    and 
formyl-thymotic  acids, 

C6H.OH.COOH.CH3.C3H7.N02 

1  Bull.  Soc.  Chim.  38,  98. 

2  Chem.  Soc.  J.  1888,  p.  791 ;  see  also  Ber.  16,  1576. 

3  Ber.  28,  2795 


128  STEREOCHEMISTRY   OF   CARBON 

and  C6H.OH.COOH.CH3C3H7.CHO,  without  effecting 
a  division.1  Now,  only  those  benzene  formulae  which 
contain  the  carbon  and  hydrogen  atoms  in  one  plane 
can  be  free  from  enantiomorphism,  which  in  the 
prism  formula,  indeed,  would  manifest  itself  even  in 
the  bisubstitution  products. 

Objection. — The  ring-linkage  has  here  been  treated 
in  such  a  way  that,  starting  from  methylene  deriva- 
tives, we  advanced  gradually  to  benzene.  In  this 
way,  however,  a  difficulty  is  concealed  which  must 
now  be  mentioned.  The  construction  of  the  con- 
figurations by  means  of  models  does  very  well  in  the 
case  of  methylene  derivatives,  as  is  shown  by  the 
figures  sketched.  In  constructing  benzene,  however, 
we  encounter,  if  we  take  Kekule's  doctrine  as  a 
basis,  the  well-known  difference2  between  1,  2,  and 
1,  6  ;  while,  with  Ladenburg's  prism,  activity  is  to 
be  expected  even  in  bisubstituted  products.  This 
objection  is  met,  however,  if  we  consider  the  tetra- 
hedral  grouping  as  only  the  cause  of  the  final 
arrangement  of  the  atoms,  which,  in  benzene, 
adopting  a  plane  arrangement,  would  be 

H  H 

C  C 
H  C  C  H 

C  C 
H  H 

The  tetrahedra,  then,  are  to  be   considered  as  the 
cause  of  the  grouping,  not  as  anything  really  present. 

1  According  to  Riigheimer,   however,   active  m-methylic-p-oxy- 
benzoic  acid  possibly  exists  (Ber.  29,  1967). 

2  See  Graebe,  Ber.  29,  2802. 


KINO  FOEMATION  129 

Stability  of  the  ring  formation. — Let  us  apply, 
finally,  the  tetrahedron  theory  from  a  point  of  view 
somewhat  different.  It  is  now  some  years  since 
Victor  Meyer,1  on  the  occasion  of  a  general  review 
of  the  essential  properties  of  carbon  compounds, 
referred  to  the  peculiar  readiness  of  this  element  to 
form  closed  chains  consisting  of  six  atoms,  and  to 
the  extraordinary  stability  of  these  compounds.  In 
view  of  the  difficulty  of  obtaining  closed  chains  with, 
for  example,  three  atoms — such  bodies  were  at  that 
time  not  even  known — this  was  all  the  more  re- 
markable. And  Victor  Meyer  urged  with  justice  that 
such  an  essential  property  should  be  deducible  as  an 
immediate  consequence  from  clearer  views  as  to  the 
structure  of  organic  compounds. 

I  took  this  occasion  to  point  out 2  that  the  new 
tetrahedron  theory  was  capable  of  explaining  this 
peculiarity  up  to  a  certain  point.  However,  these 
considerations  attracted  no  further  notice  ;  and  there 
would  be  no  reason  to  produce  here  those  rather 
tentative  remarks,  but  that  recently  Baeyer,3 
Wunderlich,4  and  Wislicenus,5  each  from  his  own 
standpoint,  have  developed  ideas  of  a  perfectly 
analogous  nature.  It  seems  therefore  desirable  to 
repeat  here  the  observations  referred  to. 

For  the  various  observations  which  have  led  to 
analogous  conceptions  on  the  part  of  the  chemists 

1  Ann.  Chem.  Pharm.  180,  192. 

2  Maandblad  voor  Natuurwetenschappen,  6,  150. 

3  Ber.  18,  2278. 

4  Konfiguration  organischer  Molekille,  Wiirzburg,  1886. 

5  Abh.  der  Konigl.  Sachs.  Akad.  1887,  57. 

K 


130  STEREOCHEMISTEY   OF   CARBON 

named,  possess  one  characteristic  in  common. 
Bodies  containing  a  chain  of  several  connected 
carbon  atoms  are  sometimes  capable  of  remarkable 
transformations,  arising  from  a  preference  for  inter- 
action between  distant  groups.  To  give  an  example. 
Among  the  oxybutyric  acids  it  is  precisely  that  one 
which  most  readily  forms  a  lactone  which  has  the 
carboxyl  and  hydroxyl  groups  apparently  furthest 
removed  from  one  another,  namely,  7-oxybutyric 
acid,  C02HCH2CH2OH.  The  anhydride  results, 
then,  from  the  interaction  of  the  two  outermost 
groups  with  loss  of  water.  This  phenomenon  is 
general ;  the  ^-oxy-acids,  which  have  three  carbon 
atoms  between  hydroxyl  and  carboxyl,  are  always 
those  which  display  a  special  tendency  to  lactone 
formation. 

Now,  our  theory,  so  far  from  seeing  any  difficulty 
in  the  interaction  of  groups  attached  to  the  carbon 
atoms  of  a  long  chain,  finds  here, 
if  not  a  direct  confirmation,  at 
least  the  indication  of  such. 
Let  us  represent  the  grouping  of 
several  carbon  atoms  according 
to  our  views.  The  first  carbon 
atom,  Cj,  with  the  two  groups  it 
connects,  will  be  at  the  corners 
of  an  isosceles  triangle,  the  angle 
at  A  being,  according  to  the  dimensions  of  the  tetra- 
hedron, 35°.  The  second  carbon  atom,  C2,  with  the 
connected  Cl  and  C2,  will  be  arranged  in  an  abso- 
lutely identical  fashion.  The  same  holds  for  a  third 


KING   FORMATION  131 

atom,  C3,  for  a  fourth,  C4,  and  so  on.  Now,  it  is  plain 
that  the  distances  A  C2,  A  C3,  A  C4,  which  represent 
the  distances  of  the  groups  connected  with  the  first, 
with  the  first  and  second,  and  with  the  first  and 
third  atoms,  do  not  continually  increase. 

On  the  contrary,  since  the  ratio  of  these  distances 
is  expressed  by 

sin2A:  sin3A:  sin  4A  :  sin  5A=1  : 1-02  :  0-67  :  0-07, 
there  must  ensue,  as  the  figure  also  shows,  a  consider- 
able decrease  in  the  distances  in  question. 

After  these  general  considerations,  let  us  pass  on 
to  the  discussion  of  details. 

With  regard  to  Baeyer's  l  views,  we  note  first 
that  this  author  assumes  in  the  closed-chain  poly- 
methylenes  a  symmetrical  arrangement  of  the  carbon 
atoms,  and  compares  the  angle  which  two  carbon 
atoms  make  with  a  third  connected  with  them,  with 
the  angle  C2  C1  A  of  fig.  17.  Now,  according  as  we 
have  to  do  with  hexa-,  penta-,  tetra-,  tri-,  or  di- 
methylene,  this  angle  is  120°,  106°,  90°,  60°,  or  0°, 
while  the  angle  C2  Cl  A  of  fig.  17  is  about  109°.  The 
difference  is,  then,  11°,  3°,  19°,  49°,  and  109°  respec- 
tively, and  in  this  difference  the  author  sees  an 
approximate  expression  of  the  tendency  to  satura- 
tion. In  support  of  this  view  may  be  mentioned 
the  extraordinary  difficulty  of  saturating  hexa- 
and  tetra-methylene ;  whereas  trimethylene  unites 
with  bromine,  though  not  with  hydrobromic  acid. 
In  the  case  of  dimethylene  even  the  action  of  iodine 
suffices  to  bring  about  saturation. 

1  Ber.  18,  2278. 

K  2 


132 


STEREOCHEMISTEY   OF   CAEBON 


The  benzene  derivatives  admit  of  similar  treat- 
ment,1 which,  however,  is  influenced  by  the  fact  that 
the  relative  position  of  the  six  carbon  atoms  is  here 
not  quite  settled.  We  assume  Kekule's  hypothesis, 
according  to  which  double  and  single  bonds  alternate, 
and  compare  with  benzene  those  analogous  closed 
chains  of  five  to  eight  carbon  atoms,  which  may  be 
assumed  from  the  valence  of  carbon,  namely, 
(CH)4,  (CH)4CH2,  (CH)6,  (CH)6CH2,  and  (CH)8. 

To  this  end  let  us  place  side  by  side  the  sums  of 
the  angles  which  our  theory  requires  when  two 
carbon  atoms  are  joined  to  a  third  (about  109°  in 
the  case  of  a  single,  and  125°  in  the  case  of  a  double 
bond),  with  the  sums  of  the  angles  of  a  closed  poly- 
hedron : 


Formula 

Sum  of  the  angles 

Polyhedron 
angles 

Difference 

(CH)4     .     . 
(CH)4CH2  . 
(CH)6     .     . 
(CH).OH2  . 
(OH).     .     . 

4x125           =   500 
4x125  +  109=   609 
6x125           =   750 
6x125  +  109=   859 
8  x  125           =  1000 

300 
540 

720 
900 
1080 

140 
69 
30 
-41 

-80 

We  see  that,  in  fact,  the  greatest  approximation 
occurs  in  the  case  of  benzene,  which  accounts  for  the 
stability  of  this  substance  as  well  as  for  the  fact 
that  up  to  the  present  the  others  have  not  been 
prepared. 

1  Wunderlich,  Konfiguration  organischer  Molekiile  ;  van  't  Hoff 
Maandblad  voor  Natuurwetenschappen,  7,  150. 


133 


CHAPTEE   VII 
NUMERICAL    VALUE  OF   THE  ROTATORY  POWER 

WHEREAS  thus  far  we  have  spoken  only  of  the 
absence  or  presence  of  rotatory  power,  we  have 
now  to  do  with  the  magnitude  of  the  rotation.  It  is 
already  a  considerable  time  since  such  determinations 
began  to  be  made,  and  (as  the  expression  of  the 
quantitative  relation)  the  so-called  molecular  rotation 
was  chosen — that  is,  the  specific  rotation,  a,1 
multiplied  by  the  molecular  weight  (and  for  short- 
ness divided  by  100) .  The  chief  results  so  obtained 
are,  firstly,  the  statement  of  Mulder,  Krecke,  and 
Thomson2  that  the  molecular  rotations  within 
certain  groups  of  substances  bear  a  simple  ratio  to 
one  another ;  and,  secondly,  the  observation  of 
Oudemans  and  Landolt  that  different  salts  of  the 
same  active  base  or  acid  in  dilute  aqueous  solution 
possess  the  same  molecular  rotation.  Such  con- 
siderations have  gained  a  new  interest  for  stereo- 
chemistry since  Guye 3  and  Crum  Brown 4  attempted 

1  Eotation  caused   by   1  decim.,   the  substance  being  supposed 
present  in  this  column  with  the  density  one. 

2  Zeitschr.f.  Chemie,  1868,  58  ;  Zeitschr.  f.  prakt.  Chem.  1872,  5 
6  ;  Ber.  1880,  1881. 

3  Theses,  1891 ;  Ann.  Chim.  et  Phys.  [6],  25,  145. 

4  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Edinb.  17,  181. 


134  STEREOCHEMISTRY   OF   CARBON 

to  connect  the  magnitude  of  the  rotation  with  the 
nature  of  the  groups  attached  to  the  asymmetric 
carbon  atom ;  accordingly  the  facts  bearing  on  the 
question  are  here  given  in  detail. 

I.  COMPAEISON  OF  THE  NUMERICAL  KESULTS. 
NECESSITY  OF  AN  EXAMINATION  IN  DILUTE 
SOLUTION  AND  OF  TAKING  INTO  ACCOUNT  THE 
MOLECULAR  WEIGHT 

It  was  a  priori  certain  that  the  relation  between 
the  groups  attached  to  the  asymmetric  carbon  and 
the  rotation  must  be  such  that  when  two  groups 
become  identical  the  rotation  vanishes ;  but  in  at- 
tempting to  go  beyond  this  we  are  at  once  met  by 
the  difficulty  that  the  magnitude  of  the  rotation 
depends  on  the  wave-length  of  the  light,  on  the 
solvent,  and  on  the  temperature.  The  first  thing  is, 
then,  to  determine  the  conditions  in  which  com- 
parable numbers  may  be  obtained. 

And  here  it  seems  most  essential  to  avail  our- 
selves of  the  light  thrown  on  the  subject  by  the  new 
conception  of  the  nature  of  solutions. 

It  is  certainly  inadmissible  to  use  simply  the 
figures  obtained  by  an  examination  of  the  substance 
without  special  precautions,  because  the  size  of  the 
molecule  is  then  uncertain,  and  the  magnitude  of 
the  rotation  seems  to  be  specially  influenced  by  every 
change  of  constitution.  In  this  connection  it  is 
important  to  remember  the  fact  recently  discovered 
by  Eamsay,1  that,  of  fifty-seven  liquids  examined,  no 
1  Chem.  Soc.  J.  1893,  1098. 


NUMERICAL   VALUE   OF  THE   ROTATORY  POWER      135 

less  than  twenty-one  possessed  double  molecules, 
among  them  the  alcohols,  acids,  nitro- ethane,  aceto- 
nitrile,  and  acetone.  Another  objection  is  that  the 
rotation  is  generally  influenced  by  the  solvent,  and, 
indeed,  by  every  solvent  differently,  perhaps  in  con- 
sequence of  the  four  groups  attached  to  carbon  being 
differently  attracted.  If  the  substance  be  used  alone, 
without  solvent,  its  own  molecules  may  be  supposed 
to  exert  a  similar  influence,  an  influence  displayed 
most  prominently  in  the  formation  of  crystals,  and 
which,  in  the  case  of  strychnine  sulphate,  e.g.,  leads 
to  the  almost  complete  annihilation  of  the  rota- 
tion. 

The  objections  mentioned  disappear  completely 
only  when  the  substance  is  examined  in  the  state  of 
rarefied  gas.  As  this  is  impracticable  we  are  driven 
to  adopt  some  other  means,  and  thus  arrive  naturally 
at  the  state  of  dilute  solution.  It  is  also  indispens- 
able, of  course,  to  take  into  account  the  molecular 
weight,  which  can  then  easily  be  determined ;  while 
the  comparability  of  the  results  will  evidently  be  by 
far  the  greatest  when  the  same  solvent  is  chosen  for 
the  different  cases. 

The  influence  of  wave-length  and  of  temperature 
seems  not  to  be  important  if  the  circumstances  of 
each  case  are  duly  taken  into  account.  The  anoma- 
lous rotation-dispersion  in  the  case  of,  say,  tartaric 
acid  in  aqueous  solution — which  is  such  that  the 
rotation  changes  its  direction  with  the  colour — is 
evidently  connected  with  phenomena  of  equilibrium 
which  affect  the  tartaric  acid  in  the  solution ;  it  was 


136  STEREOCHEMISTRY   OF   CARBON 

also  found  by  Biot  in  a  mixture  of  right-  and  left- 
handed  substance.  The  same  holds  for  the  great 
alteration  in  the  rotation  of  tartaric  acid  when  the 
temperature,  the  concentration,  or  the  solvent  is 
changed.  All  these  phenomena  are  connected  to- 
gether and  only  make  necessary  a  careful  use  of  the 
figures  obtained,  but  are  no  argument  against  the 
existence  of  relations  between  rotation  and  constitu- 
tion in  general. 

II.  KOTATORY  POWER  OF  ELECTROLYTES.     LAW 

OF    OUDEMANS-LANDOLT 

Active  bases. — In  perfect  harmony  with  the  new 
views  of  the  nature  of  aqueous  solutions — according 
to  which  electrolytes  undergo,  at  a  sufficient  degree 
of  dilution,  a  division  into  ions  until,  as  Arrhenius 
pointed  out,  a  limit  is  reached — stands  Oudemans' 
observation  concerning  salts  of  active  bases  and 
acids.  At  a  sufficient  degree  of  dilution  the  mole- 
cular rotation  of  quinine,  e.g.,  is  independent  of 
the  salt  observed.  The  following  table  (p.  137)  gives 
the  results  obtained  by  Oudemans l  and  also  by 
Tykociner ;  2  it  gives  the  specific  rotation  [a]L^, 
observed  at  16°  C.,  and  calculated  for  the  base. 

It  may  be  remarked  here  that  the  equality  of 
rotation  which  Wyrouboff3  recently  showed  to  exist 
in  solutions  of  isomorphous  sulphates  and  selenates 

1  Bee.  des  Trav.  Chim.  des  Pays-Bas,  1,  18,  184. 
-  I.e.  I,  144.     For  nicotine,  Schwebel,  Ber.  15,  2850  ;  Carrara, 
Gazz.  Chim.  23,  [2],  593.  3  Compt.  Rend.  115,  832. 


NUMERICAL  VALUE   OF  THE   ROTATORY  POWER      137 


I   I   I   I 


•^  CO  CO  GO  O5 
CO  CD  GO  rH  <M 
CO  (M  rH  (M  (N 


I  S  i 


I    rH 


OS  O  »O  O5  O 
d  00  C^l  *O  00 
<N  iN  CO  (M  rH 


ua  TH  o 

U5          *O  -Tfl  GO  .    ? 

CO        CO  CO  <M  PH 

<N  rH  " 


CD     TH      00 

co    cq     !H 


t^*  O5  O5  d  O5  O  CO  !>•  "^  ^O  00  "^ 
rH(MC^<MXOGOrH  (M  COCOlMCO 
rH(M(MCO<MrHC<J(M  rHrH 


00  CO 
rH  <M 
rH  <M 


§  g  S 

Ol       rH       O5 


CO   O5   O5   GO   rH   -«^   CD 
rH   (M   d   CO   IN   rH   (M 


GO 

CO  CO  iM   CO 


CO   <M   rH 


I     I     I     I 
I   CO   <?Q   CO 


O      00      O5      CD      O5      CD       'M  I  — 

rHCqt>-<MU5t>rH  <M 

rHC<J(MCO<Mi-l(M  Cq 

f        +         I         +         I           I         +  + 


I          I          I          I          * 


•a    •    •  «  .a  a  e  • 

<a  a  ^  °  ,2  a> 

a    <D   .S  'S  '8  'o  3.S 

'3    °   12  j  j  .S  o  § 

fl      21   '3    'S  o  q  '§  ^_fl      P 


:    §   'B   3   .S   .2 

O    O"   O*   O    O 


M     02 


a>  ® 

2  -S 

I  § 

o  £ 


138  STEREOCHEMISTRY   OF   CARBON 

of  strychnine  and  cinchonine,  is  by  no  means  to  be 
considered,  as  he  says,  as  a  consequence  of  a  connec- 
tion between  rotation  and  isomorphism  ;  it  is  simply 
a  confirmation  of  Oudemans'  law. 

Active  acids. — The  same  holds  for  the  salts  of 
active  acids  as  Landolt  found  for  tartaric  acid, 
and  as  is  proved  by  Table  II.,  where  the  specific 
rotation,  calculated  for  the  acid,  is  given  (see 
p.  139). 

The  salts  of  shikimic  acid,  with  alkalies  and 
alkaline  earths,  also  exhibit  equal  rotation,  according 
to  Eykman ;  l  and  the  same  holds,  according  to 
Colson,  for  acetylmalic  acid.2 

Finally,  it  must  be  mentioned,  with  regard  to 
the  remarkably  low  figure  obtained  for  the  barium 
and  calcium  salts  of  methoxy-  and  ethoxy-succinic 
acid,  that  the  very  great  influence  of  concentration 
is  here  to  be  taken  into  consideration.  The  specific 
rotation  of  the  methoxybarium  salt  is,  e.g.,  for  the 
percentage  given  : 

26-1  per  cent.       12-4  per  cent.        5-7  per  cent.        1-15  per  cent. 

—  14.3  _  7-4  _  2-2  +  3-2 

Evidently  the  limit  of  dissociation  is  not  yet 
reached,  and  this  is  probably  true  also  for  the 
gly cerates  of  the  polyvalent  metals.  With  the 
monovalent  metals  the  maximum  seems  to  be 
reached  sooner.  The  gly  cerates  were  investigated 
in  ten  per  cent,  solution. 

In  these  investigations  the  theory  of  electrolytic 
dissociation  is  a  valuable  guide ;  it  enables  the 

1  Ber.  26,  1281.  2  Compt.  Rend.  116,  818. 


NUMERICAL  VALUE   OF  THE   ROTATORY  POWER      139 


5 

Mill 

IMS 

1 

1           1        1      <f    S 

I 

N 

1   5    1     1     1 

ilia 

1 

1           1        1        1        1 

bo 

GO                GO      (M 

|     i>      |     os    Aj 

1     1  .  !    83 

1          '          '       <M 

1 

1           1        1        1        1 

a! 

CO                  O5 

i  J  S  i 

|        «,         |       CO 

CO 

|        «      }     «      | 

n 

A 

A 

A               | 

b 

00 

i  i  i   i   i 

Ml* 

1 

1           1        1        1        1 

g 

i  S  i  S  i 

ills 

CO 

1     3    1     1     1 

A 

A 

ss^ 


CO      t-        I       CJ     <M      GO      i— I 


O5         CO      C- 


I  s  c    I 

+    I 


»p  cp  »p  os  cp 

II          I       O5  GO  GO  CO  CO  Ol 

I          I        T-H  CO  01  rH  (M 

+  +  +  !  I  I 


n-i  i=«  --i  .S     .z;  ^      o  •• 

S3          .2.2       'o      c3        s*i 
'    fl         o3      o 


'      <T3  '      'd  <P        O       ' 

N  .S        ^  "S 

I  .s  -  a  *  s  *       .  s  s  § 

•9  ?  §  .2  §    s  fg    =  §  g  g 

&  2  ^  ^  -g      § 

'      u     'S       c8       ft     S  o 

i     O      fl     »— '        3-5         r    '** 

2 12 II    1 


."      ^      -§S2 


O        -> 

1 1 


"o  S  -  *  o  "C 

CG     CQ     C3     rl  £f 

p,  >»  5  a  ^3 

§§^S  fr 


STEREOCHEMISTRY   OF   CARBON 


Diff.  14 


Diff.  14 


Diff.  14 


Oudemans-Landolt  law  to  be  predicted,  and  sees 
in  the  equality  of  rotation  of  the  different  salts 
the  consequence  of  the  existence  of  the  same  ions. 
Table  II.,  then,  may  be  condensed  thus : 

[a]/,  for  the  ion  COO(CHOH),COO  43° 

COO(CHOH)2C02H  29° 

COOCHOHCH2COO  14° 

COOGHOHCH2CO_2H  9° 

CH2OHCHOHCOO  22° 

COOCHOCH3CH,COO  15° 

COOCHOCH3CH,C02H  29° 

COOCHOC2H.CH2COO  23° 

COOCHOC,H5CH2CO,H  37° , 

From  this  we  see  at  once  that,  when  the  rotation 
alters  on  dilution,  only  the  values  at  the  limit  are  to 
be  taken,  and  doubtful  cases  may  be  decided  by  a 
determination  of  the  conductivity — i.e.  of  the  mole- 
cular weight — accompanying  the  observation  of  the 
polarisation.  Then  the  objection  recently  brought 
by  Frankland  against  Oudemans'  law,  based  on  the 
abnormally  large  rotation  of  tartar  emetic,  at  once 
breaks  down  ;  for  this  salt,  according  to  determina- 
tions of  the  molecular  weight  and  to  the  chemical 
reactions,  is  present  in  solution  in  a  form  quite 
different  from  the  other  tartrates.1 

Alcoholic  solutions  of  electrolytes. — Of  alcoholic 
solutions,  at  least  some  have  been  investigated.  It  is 
probable  that  here  division  into  ions  is  not  of  such 
frequent  occurrence.  Also,  the  results  vary  more  (for 
quinates,2  e.g.,  they  lie  between  —9°  and  —40°,  while 
in  water  the  extremes  are  —43°  and  —49°)  ;  how- 

1  Hadrich,  Zeitschr.  f.  physik.  Chem.  12,  476. 

2  Cerkez,  Conipt.  Bend.  117,  173. 


NUMERICAL  VALUE   OF  THE   ROTATOEY  POWER      141 


ever,  the  hydriodide,  perchlorate,  and  nitrate  of 
quinamine  are  equal.  All  that  is  to  be  inferred  from 
this  is  that  here,  as  in  other  instances,  bodies  capable 
of  undergoing  division  into  ions  often,  without  being 
actually  divided,  show  in  their  physical  properties 
an  approximation  to  the  products  of  division. 

The  influence  which  may  be  exerted  by  electro- 
lytic dissociation  is  evident  from  the  following 
conspectus  of  the  results  in  alcohol  and  in  water? 
which  contains  the  limiting  values  obtained  for 
various  salts : 


Alcohol 

Diff. 

Water 

Diff. 

Quinamine  salts 

130  to  135 

5 

117  to  118 

1 

Conquinamine 

200  ,    234 

34 

228  „  229 

1 

Quinidine    . 

233  ,    255 

22 

322  „  329 

7 

Cinchonine  . 

206  ,    240 

34 

258  „  289 

1 

Cinchonidine 

-114  ,    -161 

47 

176  „  180 

4 

Quinic  acid  salts 

-9  ,    -40 

31 

-43  ,,-49 

6 

Quinine  sulphate 

-212 

— 

-279 

— 

Nicotine  acetate  . 

-  65 

— 

+  13-8 

— 

The   change  of   sign  in  the  case   of  nicotine   salts 
(with  the  sulphate  ]  also)  is  of  especial  interest. 

III.  KOTATION  OF  IMPERFECT  ELECTROLYTES. 
ORGANIC  ACIDS 

These  substances  demand  separate  treatment 
because,  representing  as  they  do  the  transition  stage 
between  electrolytes  and  non-electrolytes,  they 
exhibit — in  aqueous  solution  at  least— complicated 
phenomena,  which,  however,  have  already  been 
partially  accounted  for.  In  view  of  the  alteration  of 
1  Nasini,  Gazz.  Chim.  1893,  43, 


142  STEREOCHEMISTRY   OF   CARBON 

the  molecular  conductivity  and  of  the  lowering  of 
the  freezing-point  with  the  concentration  of  their 
solutions,  it  is  evident  that  water  effects  a  funda- 
mental change  in  their  molecular  structure — dissocia- 
tion, in  fact.  The  salts,  especially  those  of  strong 
acids  and  bases,  show  this  at  degrees  of  dilution 
which  admit  of  an  optical  examination,  and  then 
Oudemans'  law  holds.  With  the  acids  this  is  not 
the  case. 

While,  e.g.,  the  non-electrolyte  sugar,1  at  a 
strength  of  from  70  to  O2  per  cent.,  shows  a  scarcely 
noticeable  alteration  of  [a]z,=64'5  to  65-2,  and  for 
disodium  tartrate2  the  rotation  for  concentrations 
(c)  between  5  and  15  per  cent,  is  expressed  by 

[ay°=27-85-O17c  (25-3  to  27), 
for  tartaric  acid 3  we  have 

0]^=:  14-98  -  0-1303  c  (8*5  to  14-3) 

between  c  =  50  and  5  ;  while  the  rotation  between 
4-7  per  cent,  and  0'35  per  cent,  rose  from  14*2  to  16'3 
(at  20°) .  Malic  acid  even  changes  from  left  to  right 
according  as  dilute  or  concentrated  solutions  are  used.4 

The  laws  which  govern  these  complex  phenomena 
are  the  following : 

1.  The  alteration  in  rotation  effected  by  change 
of  concentration  is  parallel  with  that  effected  by 
change  of  temperature,  dilution  and  rise  of  tempera- 

1  Schmitz,   Tollens,   Ber.    10,  1414,   1403;  Pribram,   Sitz.-Ber. 
preuss.  Akad.  1887,  505. 

2  Hesse,  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  176,  122. 

3  Arndtsen,  Ann.  Chim.  et  Phys.  [3],  54,  403  ;  Pribram,  l.c. 

4  Schneider,  Ann.  Chem.  207,  257. 


NUMEKICAL  VALUE   OF  THE  EOTATOEY  POWER       143 

ture  acting  in  the  same  direction,  as  in  general  both 
have  the  same  effect  on  dissociation.  For  sugar l 
and  the  tartrates  2  the  alteration  with  the  tempera- 
ture is  scarcely  perceptible. 

With  tartaric  acid,3  warming,  like  dilution,  effects 
a  rise : 

Temp.  40  per  cent.          20  per  cent.          10  per  cent. 

0°          an=   5-53        aD=  8-66      a0=  9-95 
100°          „  =17-66         „  =21-48       „  =23-97 

In  the  case  of  malic  acid,  Pasteur  found  in  the 
dilute  left-handed  solution  an  increase  of  rotation  to 
the  left  on  warming,  which  is  the  result  Schneider 
obtained  by  dilution.  With  mandelic  acid  Lewko- 
witsch 4  observed  a  decrease  in  the  rotation  on 
diluting  and  on  warming ;  with  rhamnose  Tollens 
found  the  same  thing. 

2.  The  change  of  rotation  with  the  concentration 
is  parallel  with  that  effected  by  the  solvent,  so  that 
the  rotations  in  other  solvents  approximate  to  those 
in   concentrated    aqueous    solution.     Tartaric   acid, 
which  in  water  gradually  rotates  less  to  the  right  as 
the  concentration  increases,  exhibits  in  other  solvents 
now  a  weak  right-handed  rotation,  now  even  left- 
handed  rotation,  as  in  alcohol.5 

3.  The  change  of  rotation  on  dilution  is  in  the 
direction  of  the  numbers  obtained  for  the  (acid)  salt, 
and  appears  to  be  limited  by  these  numbers.     It  is, 
again,  in  the  case  of  tartaric  acid  that  the  subject  has 

1  Tuchschmid,  J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  2,  235. 

2  Krecke,  Arch.  NecrL  7,  97.  3  Ber.  16,  1567. 

4  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  271,  64. 

5  Pfibram,  Wien.  Acad.  97,  460. 


144  STEREOCHEMISTKY   OF   CAKBON 

been  most  thoroughly  investigated.  The  gradual 
increase  of  [a]/,25  from  8- 5°  to  14' 3°  between  50  and 
5  per  cent,  is  evidently  in  the  direction  of  the  value 
found  for  the  acid  salt,  29°  ;  Pf ibram,  indeed,  obtained 
for  0-35  per  cent.  [a]7,20  =  16-3°,  and  Krecke  at  100° 
and  10  per  cent,  observed  23-97°. 

Malic  acid,  right-handed  in  the  concentrated 
solutions  (70  per  cent.  [a]D=  +3*34)  and  left-handed 
in  dilute  solutions  (8-4  per  cent.  [a]n=  —  2*3),  also 
shows  an  approximation  to  its  (left-handed)  salts ; 
though  their  (extreme)  value  (\_a]D=  —  9)  is  not 
attained. 

Lactic  acid,  the  right  rotation  of  which  is 
diminished  by  dilution  (21-24  per  cent.  [a]^  =  2-66  : 
15-75  per  cent.  [«.]#  =  2-06),  possesses  accordingly 
left  rotation  in  its  salts. 

4.  The  acids  which  undergo  no  change  of  rotation 
on  dilution  are  also  those  which  rotate  as  strongly 
as  their  acid  salts.  Methoxy-  and  ethoxy-succinic 
acids  l  exhibit  rotations  which  scarcely  alter  with 
the  concentration  : 

Methoxy-acid     11  per  cent.  [o]D  =  33-3°     5-6  per  cent.  [d]D  =  33° 
Ethoxy-acid       11         „  „     =  33°        5-6         „  „     =  32-5° 

These  numbers  are  almost  the  same  as  those  ob- 
tained for  the  acid  salts,  viz.  [a]y>=29°  and  37° 
respectively. 

For  quinic  acid,2  also,  the  rotation  is  the  same, 
from  2  to  53  per  cent.  [a]D=  —  43*9°,  while  for  the 
salts  it  is -49°. 

1  Chem.  Soc.  J.  Trans.  1893,  217,  229. 

2  Hesse,  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  176,  124. 


NUMERICAL  VALUE    OF   THE   ROTATOKY   POWER    145 

The  rotation  of  shikimic  acid ]  also  alters  but 
little  (36-26  per  cent.  \a\D=  -204° ;  4'03  per  cent. 
[a]7>=  — 183'8°),  while  for  the  ammonium  salt  it  is 
-189°. 

The  hypothesis  of  electrolytic  dissociation  ex- 
plains these  facts  to  this  extent,  that  it  demands 
that  dilution  of  an  acid  and  salt  formation  shall  bring 
about  equal  activity,  since  both  cause  the  formation 
of  the  same  ion.  For  dibasic  acids  the  same  holds 
for  the  acid  salts,  because  dilution  of  these  acids  first 
liberates  a  single  hydrogen  atom. 

Evidently,  however,  there  is  something  else  con- 
cerned besides  electrolytic  dissociation,  and  that  is 
the  point  of  attack  offered  to  the  carboxyl  group  in 
another  part  of  the  molecule,  as  appears  from  the 
following. 

5.  Great  change  of  rotation  on  dilution  manifests 
itself  specially  with  the  oxy-acids.  Malic  acid  is 
remarkable  in  this  respect.  The  change  of  rotation 
which  we  have  observed  to  characterise  this  acid  is 
no  longer  found  in  methoxysuccinic  acid  and  in  the 
corresponding  ethyl  derivative,  nor  in  chlorosuccinic  2 
and  acetylmalic 3  acids*. 

C02HCHOHCH,C02H          70%[a]Z)=+    3-34°  8-4%[a]1,=  -    2-3° 

C02HCHOCH3CH2CO,H      .11  „    „     =     33-3°  5-6  „    „  33° 

C02HCHOC2H5CH2C02H    11  „   „     =     33°  5-6  „   „  32-5° 

C02HCHC1CH2C02H  16  „    „     =  +  20-6°  3-2  „    „        +  21-3° 

CO,HCHOC2H3OCH2C02H  16  „   „     =-11°  3-2  „   „        -10° 

Thus    when    the    hydroxyl   group    disappears    the 

1  Eykman,  Ber.  24,  1280,  1297.  2  Ber.  26,  215. 

3  Guye,  Arch.  Sc.phys.  nat.  [3],  29,  430  ;  Colson,  Compt.  Rend. 
116,  818. 


146  STEEEOCHEMISTRY   OF   CARBON 

rotation  becomes  more  constant.  The  peculiar  part 
played  by  this  group  is,  however,  still  more  plainly 
manifested  in  the  gradual  change  which  often  occurs 
in  oxy-acids  after  a  change  of  concentration  or  of 
temperature.  This  was  first  observed  in  the  case  of 
lactic  acid,1  the  rotation  of  which  decreased  on 
simple  standing  of  the  freshly  prepared  solution  ;  it 
was  recently  proved  in  the  case  of  glyceric  acid,2  and 
is  due  to  etherification  or  lac  tone  formation,  as 
Wislicenus  showed.  This  will  be  considered  in  the 
next  section. 

In  the  oxy-acids,  then,  the  alteration  of  the  rota- 
tion on  dilution  may  be  due  to  a  phenomenon  akin 
to  lactone  formation,  which  also  is  probably  in- 
fluenced by  electrolytic  dissociation.  Finally,  several 
acids,  and  not  oxy-acids  only,  possess  a  double  mole- 
cule,3 and  accordingly  on  changing  the  concentration 
they  may  break  up  in  a  way  which  will  affect  the 
optical  examination.  Comparable  results  for  acids 
are  therefore  scarcely  to  be  obtained  except  by  an 
investigation  of  dilute  solutions  of  the  alkali  salts. 

IV.  INFLUENCE  OF  EING  FORMATION  ON  KOTATION 

The  interaction  of  several  of  the  groups  attached 
to  the  asymmetric  carbon  atom,  which  may  be  accom- 
panied by  ring  formation,  appears  to  have  a  quite 
extraordinary  influence  on  the  magnitude  and  the  sign 
of  the  rotation.  In  the  phenomena  mentioned  above 

1  Wislicenus,  Ann.  167,  302. 

2  Chem.  Soc.  J.  Trans.  1893,  296. 

3  Bineau,  Ramsay,  ibid.  1893,  1098. 


NUMERICAL  VALUE   OF  THE   ROTATORY  POWER    147 


we  have  already  had  indications  of  this,  and  below 
the  fundamental  facts  are  given. 

Lactone  formation. — The  change  of  rotation  was 
first  observed  in  the  case  of  lactic  acid, 

CH3CHOHC02H  [>]„=  +2°  and  +3°, 
while    the   lactone   CH3CH— CO    (lactid)    has    the 

V 

enormous  rotation  [a]D=—  86°. *  The  same  change 
has  been  observed  for  glyceric  acid,2  and  in  the  sugar 
group  has  indeed  become  a  simple  test  to  distinguish 
between  the  isomeric  saccharic  acids,3  e.g.,  of  which 
one  forms  a  lactone,  a  second  a  double  lactone,  a 
third  no  lactone.  The  following  table  illustrates  this  : 


Lactone  formation 

[a]  D  of  the  acid 

[a]jr>  of  the  lactone 

Arabonic  acid, 

1 

C02H(CHOH)3CH.,OH 

<  -  8-5  4 

-  73-9°  5 

Ribonic  acid,           „                   Cd  salt  +  0*6°  5 

-  18°  5 

Xylonic  acid,           „ 

-7° 

+  21°  " 

Gluconic  acid, 

CO,H(CHOH)4CH2OH 

_  1-740  e 

+  68-2°  7 

Galactonic  acid,         „ 

<   -  10-56°  ti 

-  70-7°  8 

Mannonic  acid,          ,, 

weak  7 

+  53-8°  9 

Saecharinic  acid,  CtiH12Ou  . 

Na  salt  -  17-2° 

+  93-6°  10 

Isosaccharinic  acid,     ,, 

left-handed 

+  62°  10 

Rhamnonic  acid,          ,, 

-  7-67° 

-  38-7°  8 

Talomucic  acid, 

C02H(CHOH)4C02H 

>  +  24° 

<    7on 

Saccharic  acid,              „ 

+  8° 

-f  38°  12 

Mannosaccharic  acid,  „ 

weak5 

+  201-8° 

(Double  lactone)  " 

I  Wislicenus,  Ann.  167,  302.      2  Chem.  Soc.  J.  Trans.  1893,  296. 
3  Ber.  23,  2614.  4  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  260,  313. 

5  Ber.  24,  4217-4219.  6  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  271,  78-85. 

7  Ber.  23,  2626.  s  Ibid.  23,  2992. 

9  Ibid.  22,  3218.  10  Tollens,  Kohlehydrate,  293-295. 

II  Ber.  24,  3628.     12  Tollens,  Kohlehydrate,  309.    13  Ber.  24,  541. 

L  2 


148 


STEEEOCHEMISTEY    OF   CAEBON 


Where  the  figures,  especially  those  'for  the  acid, 
are  uncertain,  because  they  are  strongly  influenced 
by  the  time  and  probably  also  by  the  concentration, 
we  cannot  avoid  the  conclusion  that  lactone  forma- 
tion exerts  an  influence  equally  profound  ;  for  lactic 
acid  the  difference  amounts  to  about  90°,  for  arabonic 
acid  to  70°  or  more,  the  same  for  gluconic  acid,  for 
saccharinic  acid  100°,  and  for  the  double  lactone  200°. 
If  the  acids  had  been  investigated  as  sodium  salts, 
and  the  lactones  pure,  some  relation  would  perhaps 
have  been  found.1 

Multi-rotation. — The  phenomenon  at  first  known 
as  bi-rotation — where  immediately  after  solution  a 
rotation  is  observed,  which  for  glucose  is  twice  as 
large  as  afterwards — has  been  shown  by  further  in- 

1  As  the  result  of  an  investigation  made  in  accordance  with  this 
suggestion,  the  following  table  has  been  published.  Here  the 
'  molecular  rotation  '  is  the  specific  rotation  multiplied  by  the  mole- 
cular weight  and  divided  by  1000. 


Acid 

Molecul 
Ion 

ir  rotation 
Lactone 

Difference 

Bibonic 

+  0-2 

-  3-0 

3-2 

Gluconic  (d) 

+  1-3  to  +  1-8 

+  11  to  12-1 

10-8  to  9-2 

Mannonic  (d  and  1) 

+  2 

-  9-5  to  -  9-8 

11-7 

Saccharinic  . 

-  1-1 

+  15-3  to  +  15-1 

16-3 

Isosaccharinic 

-  1-1 

+  10-2 

11-3 

Saccharic  (d) 

-  2-6 

+  7-3  to  +  8-0     9-9  to  10-6 

Mannosaccharic    . 

+  0-2 

+  35-1  to  +  35-6         35-2 

(Double  lactone) 

a-Khamnohexonic 

+  1-3 

+  16-1  to  +  16-5 

15-0 

o-Glucoheptonic   . 

+  1-6 

-  10-9  to  -  11-5 

12-8 

Gulonic  (d  and  1)  . 

±  2-7 

±  9-9 

12-6 

See  W.  Alberda  van  Ekenstein,  W.  P.  Jorissen,  and  L.  Th.  Eeicher, 
Zeitschr.  physik.  Chem.  21,  383. 


NUMEKICAL  VALUE   OF  THE   ROTATORY   POWEE    149 


vestigations,  especially  those  of  Tollens,1  to  be  a 
change  of  rotation  which  only  in  the  case  of  glucose 
amounts  to  a  decrease  of  about  one-half ;  in  other 
cases  there  is,  indeed,  an  increase. 


Rotation 

Initial 

Final 

Dextrose,  CH2OH(CHOH)4COH  . 

105-2 

52-6 

Galactose,                  „ 

117-5 

80-3 

Levulose,  CH2OHCO(CHOH)3CH2OH 

-  104 

-  92-1 

(-  53  at  90°) 

Lactose,  C^H^On 

82-9 

52-5 

Maltose,         „               ... 

118-8 

136-8 

Arabinose,  CH2OH(CHOH)3COH  . 

156-7 

104-6 

Xylose,                        „ 

78-6 

19-2 

Bhamnose,  C6H1206 

-3-1 

+  8-6 

+  92-7 

+  87-5 

The  phenomenon  of  multi-rotation  corresponds 
completely  to  that  observed  in  the  case  of  the  lactone- 
forming  acids  ;  if  these  (galactonic  acid,  e.g.)  are  set 
free  from  their  salts  in  solution,  the  gradual  change  of 
rotation  manifests  itself  here  also,2  only  it  proceeds 
faster  in  the  case  of  the  acids.  Moreover,  the  lactone- 
forming  bodies  and  those  possessing  multi-rotation 
are  most  intimately  related  to  one  another ;  the' 
aldehydes  exhibiting  multi-rotation — glucose,  galac- 
tose,  arabinose,  xylose,  rhamnose — correspond  to  the 
lactone-forming  acids,  gluconic  and  saccharic,  galac- 
tonic, arabonic,  xylonic,  and  rhamnonic  acids. 

Then  the  multi-rotating  compounds  and  the  oxy- 
acids  have  the  hydroxyl  and  carboxyl  groups  in  com- 
mon. Finally,  since  the  lactone  formation,  which  is 
accompanied  by  the  closing  of  a  ring,  in  general 

1  Ann.,  257,  160 ;  271,  61. 

2  Tollens,  Ber.  23,  2991. 


150  STEREOCHEMISTRY   OF   CARBON 

brings  about  an  increase  of  rotation,  and  in  the  cases 
now  under  consideration  (maltose  excepted)  there  is 
a  decrease,  there  is  perhaps  here  a  ring  opened  up. 
Thus  xylose  may  have  been  at  first 

CH2OHCH(CHOH)2C(OH)H, 
1 0- 

and  later,  HOCH2(OHOH)3C(OH)2H,  corresponding 
to  CH2OH(OHOH)3COH.1 

And  it  may  be  observed  that  the  marked  changes 
of  rotation  with  the  concentration  and  temperature, 
observed  with  glucose,  galactose,  and  rhamnose,2 
and  especially  with  levulose  and  the  lactone-forming 
acids,  are  to  be  attributed  to  changes  of  equilibrium. 

Other  internal  anhydrides. — There  are  other 
isolated  cases  of  great  change  of  rotation  through 
ring  formation  which  are  also  related  to  lactone 
formation. 

Propyleneglycol  ( --  4°  55'  22  mill.)  changes  the 
sign  of  the  rotation  on  being  transformed  into 
propyleneoxide  (  +  1°  10'  22  mill.).3  The  same  is 
the  case  with  left  diacetyltartaric  acid,  aD=— 19-23, 
which  forms  a  right-handed  anhydride,  an=  +  62-04. 4 
Finally,  phenylbromolactic  acid  yields  a  much 
stronger  phenoxacrylic  acid  of  reverse  rotation.5 

1  In  the  case  of  glucose,  according  to  Trey,  hydration  does  not 
take  place  (Zeitschr.  physik.  Chem.  18,  193). 
-  Tollens,  Kohlehydrate,  and  Ann.  271,  61. 

3  Jahresber.  1881,  513. 

4  Ibid.  1882,  856.     [This  change  of  sign  does   not  occur  with 
acetylmalic  acid.     (Bcr.  26,  K.  371,  492.)] 

5  Ber.  24,  2830. 


NUMERICAL  VALUE   OF  THE  ROTATORY  POWER    151 

The  dibromoshikimic   acid,   C7H10Br205  aD  =  —  58, 
gives  a  right-handed  bromo-lactone, 

C7H9Br05(  +  22°).1 

Boric  acid  and  polyatomic  alcohols, — Now  that  the 
increase  of  rotation  through  ring  formation  has  been 
established,  the  very  considerable  rise  of  rotation 
observed  on  addition  of  boric  acid  is  seen  in  another 
light.  Such  is  the  effect  of  this  addition  that,  as  is 
well  known,  it  was  only  by  this  means  that  activity 
could  be  demonstrated  in  the  case  of  mannite, 
sorbite,  arabite,  &c.  If  we  consider  now  the  more 
recent  observations,2  especially  those  of  Magnanini, 
we  see  in  the  first  place  that  the  proved  diminution 
of  the  number  of  molecules  involves  the  hypothesis 
that  an  addition  product  is  formed.  In  the  next 
place,  in  view  of  the  fact  that  only  polyatomic 
alcohols  (including  erythrite) 3  and  oxy-acids  are 
affected  by  boric  acid,  while  mannite  with  six 
hydroxyl  groups  demands  three  molecules  of  boric 
acid,  there  must  be  two  hydroxyl  groups  connected 
with  one  boric  acid  molecule,  and  we  come  of 
necessity  to  the  hypothesis  that  the  following  ring  is 
formed  : 

|        \B_0-H, 
C— (K 

1  Eykman,  Ber.  24,  1293.     See  also  the  high  rotation  of  methyl- 
glucoside,  &c.  (Fischer,  Ber.  26,  2400). 

2  Zeitschr.physik.  Chem.  6,  58 ;  Gazz.  Chim.  11,  8,  9 ;  1891.  <Ref. 
Zeitschr.  physik.  Chem.  9,  230.) 

3  Klein,  Compt.  Rend.  86,  826  ;  99,  144. 


152  STEKEOCHEMISTKY   OF   CAKBON 

which  is  in  harmony  with  the  other  properties  (acid 
character,  depression,  conductivity). 

Tartar  emetic  and  analogous  substances.— The 
enormous  increase  of  rotation  which  tartaric  acid  in 
its  salts  ([«]#= 20  to  30)  undergoes  on  transforma- 
tion into  tartar  emetic,  and  the  analogous  pheno- 
menon in  the  case  of  malic  acid  (salts,  [a]z,=  —10  to 
20  ;  antimony  derivative,  +  115  l)  suggest  similar 
considerations.  The  fact  that  only  oxy-acids  yield 
compounds  of  this  kind,  the  formula  of  tartar  emetic 
(C4H406K)2Sb202.H20,2  the  anomalous  reactions,  the 
depression  (^  =  li)3  are  in  the  most  perfect  harmony 
with  the  following  hypothesis  as  to  the  constitution  : 

C02K  C02K 

HOOH  CHOH 

HC— Ox  /O— CH        +  2H20. 

|        \sb-0— Sb<         | 
OC— (X  \0-CO 

Salts  of  polyvalent  metals  and  polybasic  acids,—  The 

change  of  rotation  in  the  salts  of  polyvalent  metals, 
to  which  we  have  already  called  attention,  is  partly 
due  to  the  fact  that  in  general  they  do  not  undergo 
electrolytic  dissociation  to  the  same  extent  as  the 
alkali  salts. 

But  this  change  of  rotation  is  especially  notice- 
able when  the  acid  is  polybasic,  so  that  here  too 
interaction  of  the  two  carboxyl  groups  (ring  forma- 
tion) is  possible.  The  observed  alterations  in  such 

1  Landolt,  Opt.  Dreh.-vermogen.  221.  -  Ber.  16,  2386. 

3  Zeitschr.  physik.  Chem.  9,  484. 


NUMERICAL   VALUE   OF  THE  ROTATORY  POWER    153 


cases  are  therefore  collected  here.     First  we   have 
Schneider's  values  for  aD  for  malates  : 


Ba 


K, 


20  per  cent. 


Na2 


Li,          (NH4)2 


>   +15    -  9-6    -  8-2    -  8-6    -  8-7 
-   5    -11-5    -13-1    -13-9     -11-2 

Then  the  striking  results  with  methoxy-  and  ethoxy- 
succinic  acid  : 


Salts 

Methoxy-acid 

Ethoxy-acid 

(NH4)2 

5-76  per  cent. 

15-2 

5-22  per  cent. 

22-2 

M 

2-82 

15-1 

1*48        „ 

22-8 

K2. 

12-16 

14-3 



5-02 

14-2 

— 



Ca 

5-31 

-  12-7 

3-04  per  cent. 

+  10-4 

2-21 

+    5-2 

1-79 

+  14-1 

Ba 

26-12 

-27-3 

25-08 

-    8 

n 

1-15 

+    6-1 

4-56 

+  11-7 

V.  ROTATION  OF  NON-ELECTROLYTES.   HYPOTHESES 

OF   GUYE   AND   CRUM   BROWN 

In  the  case  of  non-electrolytes,  the  most  important 
fact  concerning  the  material  that  has  been  collected 
is  that  as  a  rule  all  exact  comparison  of  results  is 
impossible.  These  compounds  have  not  yet  been 
examined  in  the  same  solvent,  diluted,  and  with  due 
regard  to  the  molecular  weight  and  to  the  possible 
action  of  the  solvent. 

That  a  determination  of  molecular  weight  must  be 
made  follows  from  the  observation  of  Haller,1  who 
finds  for  left  isocamphol  (borneol)  in  alcohol,  a^=33°  ; 
in  benzene  and  its  homologues,  a^=19°.  According 
to  Paterno,  hydroxyl  derivatives  possess  in  benzene  a 

1  Compt.  Bend.  112,  143. 


STEKEOCHEM1STBY   OF   CAEBON 

double  molecule.  The  known  borneol  according  to 
Beckmann,1  does  not  do  this,  and  has  also  the  same 
rotation  in  benzene  as  in  alcohol,  a7,  =  37°.  And 
Freundler 2  has  recently  shown  that  in  the  case  of 
ethereal  tartrates  the  change  of  rotation  by  the 
solvent  is  accompanied  by  a  change  of  molecular 
weight. 

The  views  of  Guye  and  of  Crum  Brown  deserve 
especial  notice.  The  latter3  proposes  to  establish 
by  experiment  a  function,  K  (which  perhaps  alters 
for  the  temperature,  &c.),  for  each  of  the  groups 
attached  to  the  asymmetric  carbon ;  the  rotation 
would  be  determined  by  the  difference  of  these 
functions.  From  the  material  at  hand  he  thinks  it 
may  be  concluded  that  the  function  for  any  group 
rises  as  the  group  increases. 

The  objection  to  this  hypothesis  is,  as  the  author 
himself  observes,  that  in  it  the  mutual  action  of  the 
groups  plays  no  part.  But  in  view  of  what  has  just 
been  said  about  the  influence  of  the  solvent,  and  of 
ring  formation  on  the  rotation,  this  mutual  action 
must  be  essential.  Guye  4  starts  on  a  broader  basis, 
viz.  the  whole  configuration  of  the  molecule,  and  he 
proceeds  to  determine  numerically  its  degree  of 
disymmetry,  by  the  displacement  of  its  centre  of 

1  Zeitschr.  physik.  Chem.  6,  440.     In  accordance  with  this  view 
the  hydroxyl-free  phenylurethane,  obtained  from  isocamphole,  shows 
no  change  of  rotation. 

2  Compt.  Rend.  117,  556.        ••  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Edinb.  June  1890. 
4  Compt.  Rend.  March  1890 ;  Ann.  Chim.  phys.  [6],  25,  145  ; 

Arch.  Sc.  phys.  Nat.  [3],  26,  97,  201,  333;  Rev.  scientifique, 
49,  265. 


NUMEKICAL  VALUE   OF  THE  ROTATORY   POWER    155 

gravity  in  relation  to  the  six  planes  of  symmetry  of 
the  regular  tetrahedron.  Six  values,  dl  .  .  .  .  d6,  are 
thus  obtained,  the  product  of  which,  called  product 
of  asymmetry,  determines  the  rotation  : 

P=dl  d2d3d4d5d6. 

This  product  satisfies  the  main  condition,  that  when 
only  two  of  the  groups  are  equal,  one  of  the  dis- 
placements (the  one  referred  to  the  plane  of  sym- 
metry between  the  two  groups)  becomes  nil,  and 
consequently  P  is  also  nil,  which  corresponds  with 
inactivity. 

These  values  d,  however,  are  difficult  to 
determine ;  they  are  certainly  influenced  by  the 
weights  of  the  groups  and  by  their  distances,1  and 
the  first  thing  is  to  determine  the  part  played  by  the 
weight.  The  displacement  is  then  determined  by 
the  difference  of  weight,  and  we  have  as  a  concrete 
expression  of  this  : 

-P =(0i—02)  (ffi—gj  (9 \— #4)  (9—gJ  (#2—04)  (03—04)* 

where  gl  .  .  .  .  g4  are  the  group-weights  in 
question. 

This  expression  is  not  a  necessary  consequence  of 
Guye's  conception,  but  only  a  formulation  of  it  upon 
certain  assumptions  made  for  the  sake  of  simplicity. 
It  is  to  be  regarded  as  a  special  case  of  the  view 
of  Crum  Brown,  according  to  which  K  and  g 
are  identical.  Finally,  we  may  repeat  that  the 

1  Compare  Frankland  and  Wharton  (./.  Chem.  Soc.  1896,  1309) 
on  the  methyl  and  ethyl  esters  of  o-,  m-,  and  p-ditoluyltartaric  acid ; 
also  Guye,  Bull.  Soc.  Chim.  Paris,  [3],  15,  1187. 


156  STEEEOCHEMISTEY   OF   CAKBON 

essential  requisite,  that  P=o  when  two  groups  are 
identical,  is  fulfilled  ;  and  that  if  two  groups, 
<73  and  g4,  e.g.,  change  places,  the  sign  of  P  is 
simply  reversed,  its  numerical  value  remaining  the 
same. 

From  this  view  the  following  novel  and  essential 
consequences  result.  If  the  groups  are  in  the 
following  order  : 

9,  >  £3  >  £2  >  ffi, 

and  the  substance  is,  say,  right-handed,  then  when 
g4  is  replaced  by  smaller  and  smaller  groups,  we  may 
expect : 

1.  Diminution  of  the  right  rotation  for  g4>g3  ; 

2.  Inactivity  when  g4=g3  ; 

3.  Left  rotation,  increasing  to  a  maximum  and 
then  diminishing,  when  gz  >  g4  >  g2  ; 

4.  Inactivity  when  <74  =  <?2  ; 

5.  Eight  rotation,  increasing  to  a  maximum,  and 
then  diminishing,  when  g^>g4>g}  ', 

6.  Inactivity  when  g4  =  gl ; 

1 .  Left  rotation,  increasing,  when  g±    gr 
Thus,  when  one  of  the  groups  gradually  passes 
from  the  maximum  to  the  minimum  the  sign  of  the 
rotation  will  change  four  times. 

Let  us  consider  first  the  derivatives  of  active 
amylalcohol,  C2H5(=29)CH3.CH.CH2OH.  The  sub- 
stances are  arranged  in  the  order  of  the  magnitude 
of  the  radical  replacing  CH2OH,  and  it  is  seen 
that,  in  general,  increase  of  the  largest  group  leaves 
the  sign  of  the  rotation  unaltered : 


NUMERICAL  VALUE   OF   THE   ROTATORY  POWER    157 

1.  Aldehyde,  COH  =  29     oJD=+0°  42'  (10  Dec.) 

2.  Ainine,  CH2NH2=30     aD=-3°  30'  (10  Dec.) 

3.  Alcohol, CH2OH  =  31  [«]„=- 5°  2'. 

4.  Nitrile,   CH2CN  =  40     an  =  +1°  16'  (10  Dec.) 

5.  About  sixty  compounds  between  4  and  6,  all 
right-handed. 

6.  Iodide,  CH2I=141         an=  4-  8°  20'  (10  Dec.) 
The  change  of  sign  observed  in  the  case  of  the 

amine  and  the  alcohol  should,  however,  not  occur 
till  below  29°. 

It  follows  that  change  of  sign  can  be  brought 
about  by  causes  other  than  change  of  weight.  In 
this  connection  the  cases  where,  as  in  amylaldehyde, 
there  are  two  groups  of  equal  weight  are  especially 
convincing.  Here  we  do  not  find  inactivity,  which 
Guye's  formula  wrould  demand.  Such  cases  are  : 
Dimethylic  diacetyl  tartrate, 

C02CH3(CHOC2H30)2C02CH3  : 
C02CH3 = OC2H30  =  59  (left-handed) . 
Diethylic  dipropionyl  tartrate, 
C02C2H5  =  OC3H50  =  73  (slightly  right-handed). 

Dipropylic  dibutyryl  tartrate, 
C02C3H7  =  OC4H70  =  87  (right-handed) . 

Acetylmalic  acid,  C02HCHOC2H3OCH2C02H : 

OC2H30  =  CH2C02H=59  (left-handed). 
Ethylmalic  acid,  C02HCHOC2H5CH2C02H : 

C02H=OC2H5  =  45  (right-handed). 
The  following  table  of  such  esters  of  tartaric,1 

1  Pictet,  Arch,  des  Sc.  phys.  ct  nat.  [3],  7,  82 ;  Freundler,  Compt. 
Rend.  115,  509. 


158 


STEREOCHEMISTRY  OF  CAEBON 


glyceric,1  and  valerianic2  acids  as  have  been  investi- 
gated yields  the  same  result,  namely,  that  the  weight 
of  the  groups  acts  in  the  sense  demanded  by  Guye's 
fundamental  conception,  but  not  strictly  according  to 
the  formula  chosen  by  him  as  a  first  approximation.3 


i 
CH:1        C.,H3        O.H,       C£JJ» 

I 

C4HU 

iso'J 

C7H7 

Tartaric  acid 
Acetyltartaric  acid 
Propionyltartaric  acid 
Butyryltartaric  acid    . 

2-1             7-7  1         12-4       14-9 
-14-3             5               13-5 
—  12                0-8              7-9 
-  13          -    1                  5-4       — 

15-9 
17-8 

11-3 
9-2 
7-1 

— 

Benzoyltartaric  acid    . 

-  88-8      -  60  |  -<~!J9  [ 

— 

-42 

— 

Glyceric  acid 
Valerianic  acid 

-    6-8      -    9-2        -12-9  '-11-8 
16-8          13-4  |         11-7       — 

-  11          -14-2 
10-6           IU'5 

'  5-31 

In  the  glyceric  acid  derivatives,  CH2OHCHOHC02X, 
the  rotation  is  seen  to  rise  as  the  largest  group, 
C02X,  becomes  larger. 

The  case  of  tartaric  acid  is  somewhat  more 
complicated.  In  the  first  place  there  are  two 
asymmetric  carbon  atoms,  but  these  being  perfectly 
identical  we  may  confine  ourselves  to  the  considera- 
tion of  one.  But,  further,  in  the  derivatives  there 
are  always  two  groups  which  alter.  If  we  set  out 
the  groups  thus  : 

H  =  l  cOH  =  17  <C02H  =  45<CHOHC02H  =  75, 
we  see  that,  in  the  esters  in  which  carboxyl  hydro- 

1  Frankland  and  MacGregor,  Chem.  Soc.  J.  Trans.  1893,  524. 

-  Guye,  Compt.  Rend.  116,  1454.  Is  the  decrease  of  rotation  with 
the  group-weight  due  to  the  increased  formation  of  the  racemoid 
form  on  distillation,  caused  by  the  higher  boiling-point  ? 

3  In  confirmation  of  this  see  Walden,  Zeitschr.  physik.  Chem.  15, 
638 ;  I.  Welt,  Compt.  Rend.  119,  885 ;  Ann.  Chim.  Phys.  [7],  6,  115  ; 
Ph.  A.  Guye  and  L.  Chavanne,  Compt.  Rend.  119,  906 ;  120,  452. 
Compare  J.  W.  Walker,  J.  Chem.  Soc.  67,  914,  and  Purdie  and  Wil- 
liamson, I.e.  p.  957. 


NUMERICAL  VALUE   OF  THE   ROTATORY   POWER    159 

gen  is  replaced,  the  two  largest  groups  increase,  and 
therefore  the  rotation  ;  in  those  in  which  hydroxyl 
hydrogen  undergoes  substitution,  OH  =  17  increases, 
and  also  the  largest  group  :  a  change  of  sign  is 
therefore  to  be  expected,  and  at  the  same  time  an 
increase  in  the  numerical  value.  Both  occur  ;  only 
the  change  of  sign  does  not  exactly  correspond  with 
the  equality  of  the  group-weights. 

Further,  we  must  emphasise  the  fact  that,  in 
isomeric  compounds,  groups  of  equal  weight  do  not 
correspond  to  equal  rotations.  Among  gly  eerie  esters, 
propyl-  and  iso-propyl,  butyl-  and  iso-butyl  have  not 
the  same  action  ;  with  tartaric  acid  the  case  is  the 
same,  but  not  with  valerianic  acid.  But  whether  in 
the  first  two  cases  the  difference  is  as  great  as  the 
figures  indicate  is  uncertain,  as  it  is  doubtful  how  far 
they  can  be  compared.  Thus  Freundler  found  that 
ethylic  diacetyl  tartrate  rotates,  in  alcohol,  +  1-02 
instead  of  +  5. 

Finally,  it  is  a  striking  fact,  in  agreement  with 
Guye's  conception,  that  the  very  high  rotations 
are  observed  among  compounds  of  high  molecular 
weight.  One  example  of  this  is  seen  in  methylic 
benzoyl  tartrate,  —88-8°.  Then  we  have  the  small 
rotation  of  +  2°  for  lactic  acid,  as  compared  with 
—  21°  for  oxybutyric,  and—  11°  for  leucic  acid,  71° 
for  tropaic  acid,  —156°  for  mandelic  acid,  and  —135° 
for  isopropylphenylglycollic  acid.  Perhaps  in  the 
last  the  effect  of  ring  formation  is  superadded.  It 
ia  a  fact  that  the  highest  known  rotations  are  found 
among  the  alkaloids  and  santonine  derivatives  (over 


UNIVERSITY 


160  STEREOCHEMISTEY   OF   CARBON 

300°  for  quinidine,  700°  for  santonine) ,  where  several 
rings  and  high  molecular  weight  coexist.  Of  course, 
the  converse  of  this  rule  does  not  hold.  Even  when 
the  molecular  weight  is  high,  identity  among  the 
groups  annihilates  the  rotation,  and  similarity  among 
the  groups  perhaps  reduces  it  to  small  proportions. 

VI.  MORE  COMPLICATED  CASES 
Several  asymmetric  groups  in  one  molecule. — So  far 

we  have  dealt  chiefly  with  the  simplest  cases,  with 
a  single  asymmetric  carbon  atom.  It  remains  to 
add  a  few  words  on  more  complicated  compounds, 
which  may  throw  some  light  on  the  subject.  In  the 
first  place  we  may  consider  the  idea  expressed  in 
my  former  pamphlet l  that  when  there  are  several 
asymmetric  carbon  atoms  their  action  is  to  be  added 
or  subtracted.  Thus  for  the  four  pentose  types, 
COH(CHOH)3CH2OH,  we  should  have  the  following 
rotations  : 

No.  1  No.  2  No.  3  No.  4 

+  A  +  A  +  A  -A 

+  B  +  B  -  B  +  B 

+  C  -  G  +  C  +  C 

and  since  the  sum  of  No.  2,  No.  3,  and  No.  4  is  equal 
to  A  +  B  -j-  C,  the  rotation  of  arabinose  (probably  the 
highest)  should  be  equal  to  the  rotations  of  xylose, 
ribose,  and  the  expected  fourth  type 2  taken  together. 
For  the  asymmetric  compounds  of  the  saccharic 
acid  group  a  similar  conclusion  may  be  drawn.  The 
four  active  types  would  have  the  following  rotations  : 

1  See  Preface. 

2  Discovered  since,  and  called  lyxose. 


NUMEKICAL  VALUE   OF  THE   ROTATORY  POWER    161 


No.  1 

No.  2 

No.  3 

No.  4 

+  A 

+  A 

+  A 

+  A 

+  B 

+  B 

+  B 

-B 

+  B 

+  B 

-  B 

-B 

+  A 

-  A 

+  A 

+  A 

ZA 


C02H 
HCOH 

C02H 

HCOH 

C02H 
HCOH 

C02H 
HCOH 

HOCH 

HOCH 

HOCH 

HCOH 

HCOH 

HCOH 

HOCH 

HOCH 

HOCH 

HCOH 

HOCH 

HOCH 

C02H 

C02H 

C02H 

C02H 

Idosaccharic 
acid 

Saccharic 
acid 

8° 

Talomucic 
acid 
29° 

Manno- 
saccharic 
acid  ;  weak. 

The  large  rotation  2(A+B)  might  belong  to  the 
first  type  and  would  amount  to  37°.  This  corre- 
sponds to  the  constitution  in  that  neither  the  inner 
nor  the  outer  asymmetric  carbon  atoms  are  sym- 
metrically opposed.  Then  saccharic  acid  corresponds 
to  2.B,  because  in  its  configuration  the  two  outer 
carbon  atoms  are  symmetrically  opposed  ;  for  similar 
reasons  talomucic  acid  corresponds  to  %A.  For 
mannosaccharic  acid  we  should  then  have  about  20° 
(29°  —  8°) ;  all  that  is  known  is  that  it  possesses 
slight  activity.  Since  the  acids  readily  form  lactones 
an  exact  investigation  of  the  sodium  salts  in  not  too 
concentrated  solution  seems  to  be  the  only  way  to 
arrive  at  definite  results. 

Further,  it  is  to  be  noted  that  the  outer  asym- 
metric carbon  atoms  cause  a  rotation   of   29°,  the 


162  STEREOCHEMISTKY   OF   CARBON 

inner  a  rotation  of  8°,  and  this  greater  influence  of 
the  excentric  carbons  accords  with  Guye's  theories. 

Influence  of  the  type. — In  the  second  place  we 
must  note  the  fact  that  the  magnitude  of  the 
rotation  is  to  a  certain  extent  determined  by  the 
type  of  the  compound. 

We  have  already  observed  (p.  147)  what  an  effect 
lactone  formation  has  on  the  rotation,  an  effect  which 
often  amounts  to  about  80° ;  and  how  ring  formation 
in  other  cases  causes  a  fairly  definite  change  of  rota- 
tion. We  saw,  further,  that  in  many  cases  stereomers 
though  not  enantiomorphous  possess  equal  rotation 
(p.  74).  Now  it  has  been  observed  that  in  chemically 
related  compounds  there  are  often  found  rotations 
of  a  similar  order  of  magnitude. 

1.  Thus,  the  alcohols  of  the  type 

CH2OH(CHOH)nCH2OH 

have  a  remarkably  small  rotation,  often  noticeable 
only  after  addition  of  borax  : 

Arabite     .         .         .  CH,OH(CHOH)3CH,OH  -  5°  in  borax 

Mannite   .         .         .  CH~OH(CHOH)4CH,OH  almost  nil 

Sorbite     ...  „  1° 

Perseite  >  .         .         .  CH,OH(CHOH)5CH,OH  8°  in  borax 

a-Glucosectite  -         .  CR!OH(CHOH)6CH,OH  2° 

It  is  very  remarkable  that  in  the  hexatomic  alcohol 
inosite,  C6H6(OH)6--which  in  composition  resembles 
mannite,  but  as  a  hexamethylene  derivative  belongs 
to  another  type — we  observe  at  once  a  compara- 
tively strong  rotation  of  65°  (caused  by  the  ring 
formation) . 

1  Bcr.  23,  2226.  2  Ann.  270,  64. 


NUMEKICAL  VALUE   OF  THE   KOTATORY   POWER    163 

2.  The  amido-acids  exhibit  rather  low  rotations  : 

Leucine     .        .  C4H9CHNH,CO,,H  14°HC1;6°NH3 

Phthalyl  deriva- 
tive        .        .  C4H9CHN(C6H4C202)C02H  -  22°  C2H60 

Cystine      .         .  CH3C(NH2)(SH)C02H  -  8°  H2O 

Phenylcystine    .  CH3CS(C6H5)NH2C02H  <  -  4°  NaOH 

Bromine  deriva- 
tive       .        .  CH3CS(C6H4Br)NH.)C02H  -  4°  NaOH 

Acetyl derivative  CH3CS(CeH5)NHAcCO,H  -  ?  C,H60;  5°  NaOH 

Bromacetyl    de- 
rivative .        .  CH3CS(C6H4Br)NHAcC02H  -  7°  C2H60  ;  8°  NaOH 

Tyrosine    .        .  C6H4OHCH,CHNH2CO,,H  -  8°  HC1 ;   -  9°  KOH 

Phenylamido- 

propionic  acid  C(jH5CH.,OHNH.,CO.,H  -  35°  H2O 

Asparagine        .  C02HCHNH2CH2CONH2  -  8°  H20;   +  37°  HC1 

Aspartic  acid     .  COoHCHNH.CH.CO^  -  4°  H20 ;    +  25°  HC1 

Glutamic  acid    .  CO,HCHNH2C2H4C02H  10°  H20 ;  26°  HC1 ; 

-  5°  CaO,H2 

Glutamine         .  CO.,H(C3H5NH2)CONH2  slightly    right-handed, 

H2SO, 

Chitamic  acid    .  C6H,3N06  +  1-5°  H20 

The  weak  activity  of  the  amido-acids  is  probably  the 
reason  why  no  rotation  has  as  yet  been  discovered  in 
the  case  of  serine,  alanine,  &c. 

3.  Among  the  lactones  of  the  sugar  group,  &c., 
larger  variations  occur ;  the  values,  however,  do  not 
exceed  90°,  which  amount  is  attained  by  the  simplest, 
lactid.     This  is  probably  due  to  the  fact  that  the 
oxy-acids   have  generally   a  low  rotation,  and  that 
between  acid  and  lactone  there  is  usually  a  difference 
of  80°.     The  lactones  of  the  following  oxy-acids  may 
be  cited : 

Lactic  acid    ....  CH2CHOHC02H  -  86° 

Arabonic  acid        .        .        .  CH2OH(CHOH)3C02H   -  74° 
Ribonic  acid ....  „  -  18° 

Xylonic  acid ....  „  +  21° 

M  2 


164 


STEREOCHEMISTRY   OF   CARBON 


Saccharinic  acid    . 
Isosaccharinic  acid 
Rhamnonic  acid 
Gluconic  acid 
Galactonic  acid 
Mannonic  acid 
Talomucic  acid 
Saccharic  acid 
Mannoheptonic  acid 
o-Glucoheptonic  acid 
j3-Glucoheptonic  acid 
Gluco-octonic  acid 
Mannononic  acid    . 


For  the  double  lactone  of  mannosaccharic  acid  the 
more  than  double  value  of  202°  is  attained. 

The  small  rotations  of  the  oxy-acids  are  shown 
in  the  following  table  : 


C6H,A 

+  94° 

,, 

+  62° 

t1 

-  38° 

CH2OH(CHOH)4CO,H 

+  68° 

,, 

-  71° 

55 

+  54° 

C02H(CHOH)4C02H 

7° 

55 

38° 

CH,OH(CHOH)5CO,H 

-  74° 

55 

-  68° 

}> 

+  23° 

CH,OH(CHOH)6C02H 

+  46° 

CH,OH(CHOH);C02H 

_  41° 

Malic  acid      . 
Tartaric  acid 
Oxyglutaric  acid    . 
Trioxyglutaric  acid 
Arabonic  acid 
Ribonic  acid 
Xylonic  acid 
Isosaccharinic  acid 
Rhamnonic  acid    . 
Gluconic  acid 
Galactonic  acid     . 
Mannonic  acid 
Talomucic  acid 
Saccharic  acid 
Mannosaccharic  acid 


.  CO,HCHOHCH2CO,H      weak  +  or  - 
.  CojH(CHOH),CCvH 
.  C02HCHOHC2H4CO,H      -  2° 
.  C02H(CHOH)"3CO.,H~          -  23° 
.  CH,OH(CHOH)3cb,H       less  than  -  8° 
Cd  salt  +  1° 

-  7° 

Na  salt  -  17° 

-  8° 

-  2° 

less  than  -  11< 

weak 

29° 

8° 

weak 


.  C6H1407 

.  CH2OH(CHOH)4CO.,H 

.  CO,H(CHOH)1CO,H 


For  the  acids  of  the  type  CH4OH((7HOH)4C02H, 
beginning  with  gluconic  acid,  the  rotations  seem  to 
be  extremely  small.  It  is  a  striking  fact  that  if  a 


NUMERICAL  VALUE   OF  THE  ROTATORY  POWER    165 

benzene  nucleus  (ring  formation)  is  introduced  into 
these  oxy-acids  relatively  high  values  result  : 

Lactic  acid   ....  CI^CHOHCO^  +  2° 

Oxybutyric  acid    .        .        .  CH3CHOHCH2C02H     -  21° 
Leucic  acid  ....  C4H9CHOHC02H  -  4° 

Mandelic  acid       .        .        .  C6H5CHOHCO2H  ±  156° 

Tropaic  acid         .        .        .  C6H5CH(CH2OH)C02H  +  71° 
Propylmandelic  acid     .        .  C^C^CROUCO^i   ±  135° 


4.  Among  the  aldehyde  sugars,  pentoses,  glucoses, 
heptoses,   &c.,  a  difference  amounting  frequently  to 
50°  is  caused  by  multi-rotation,  and  the  maximum 
value,  somewhat  above  150°,  is  thus  attained  ;  other- 
wise the  values  are  below  100°,  as  with  the  lactones  : 

Arabinose      .        .        .  COH(CHOH)3CH2OH  105°  (158°) 

Xylose   ....  „  19°  (79°) 

Dextrose        .        .        .  COH(CHOH)4CH,OH  53°  (105°) 

Galactose       ...  „  80°  (118°) 

a-Glucoheptose      .        .  COH(CHOH)5CH2OH  -  20°  (-  25°) 

Mannoheptose       .        .  „  85° 

a-Gluco-octose       .        .  COH(CHOH)6CH2OH  -  50° 

Manno-octose         .  „  —  3° 

Mannononose         .        .  COH(CHOH)7CH2OH  50° 

5.  Remarkable   cases.      Cystine    derivatives,  —  The 

determinative  action  of  the  type  is  especially  striking 
in  the  case  of  cystine,  CH3C.NH2.SH.C02H.  The 
small  rotation  (—8°)  characteristic  of  the  amido- 
acids  is  maintained  when  the  hydrosulphyl  hydrogen 
is  replaced  by  phenyl,  and  by  bromophenyl  (group 
weight,  C6H4Br=156),  also  .in  the  corresponding 
acetyl  derivatives  (  —  7°,  p.  163).  Upon  oxidising  to 
cystin,1  CH3CNH2.C02H.SSC02H.NH2.CCH3,  how- 

1  Baumann,    Zeitschr.  physiol.   Cliem.   8,   305;    Mauthner,   I.e. 
7,  222. 


166  STEREOCHEMISTKY  OF   CARBON 

ever,  we  get  at  once  the  enormous  value  [a]n=  —214° 
(group  weight,  S.C02H.NH2.CCH3  =  120). 

Shikimic  acid,1 — The  remarkably  high  rotation  of 
the  derivatives  of  this  acid— 

HC70H 

iCHOH 


HOHCl     JCH 

C 
C02H 

appears  to  be  connected  with  the  partial  saturation 
of  the  benzene  ring,  as  the  following  table  shows  : 

Without  saturation          [a]7;  After  saturation              [a]D 

Acid     ....  -  184°  Dihydrogen  product  .   -  18° 

Ammonium  salt  .        .  —  166°  Dibromine        .        .  .   —  58° 

Triacetyl  acid      .        .        191°  Bromolactone  .         .  .   +  22° 

Triacetylethylic  ester  .  -  174°  Dioxy-acid        .        .  .   -  28° 

It  is  noteworthy  that  here,  too,  the  lactone  forma- 
tion has  the  very  considerable  influence  already  men- 
tioned (p.  147),  and  indeed  to  about  the  same  extent. 

Limonenenitroso  chloride  and  derivatives,2 — The 
striking  fact  here  is  that  substitution  of  amine 
residues  for  the  chlorine  in 

C1CCH 


HC 

HCCH 

1  Eykman,  Ber.  24,  1285. 

2  Wallach,  Ann.  252,  151. 


NUMERICAL  VALUE   OF  THE  ROTATORY  POWER    167 
reduces  the  remarkably  high  rotation  : 

o-Nitrosylchloride   -  315°        a-Nitrolepiperidine          -  68° 

a-Nitrolebenzylamine     —  164° 
0-Nitrosylchloride    -  242°         0-Nitrolepiperidine          +  60° 

Nitro-camphor  and  derivatives.1 — In  connection 
with  the  amount  of  the  rotation,  the  nitro-derivative 
of  camphor,  perhaps, 


H.C 


CO 


HCCH3 


is  highly  interesting. 

Probably  no  compound  undergoes  such  a  sudden 
change  of  rotation  with  the  solvent  and  the  concen- 
tration : 

a}  =  —  140°  (O7  per  cent,  in  benzene) 
a,  =  -  102°  (5-2  „  „  „  ) 
a}  =  -  7°  (3  „  „  alcohol) 

Further,  the  salts  rotate  very  strongly,  and  in  the 
opposite  direction  : 

Zinc  salt  .      .      .  a,  =  +  275° 
Sodium  salt    .      .«,•=+  289° 

Santonine  derivatives,2 — Although  their  constitu- 
tion has  not  yet  been  sufficiently  investigated,  the 

1  Cazeneuve,  Compt.  Rend.  103,  275  ;  104,  1522  ;  Jahresber.  1888, 
1636. 

2  Carnelutti,  Nasini,  Per.  13,  2210 ;  22,  Ref.  732  ;  24,  Ref.  909  ; 
25,  Ref.  938. 


168  STEREOCHEMISTEY  OF  CAKBON 

members  of  this  group  are  remarkable  on  account 
of  their  enormous  rotations,  which  in  the  case  of 
santonid  and  parasantonid  are  as  high  as  [a]^=745 
and  892.  Lactone  formation  plays  here,  as  in  the 
whole  santonine  group,  its  usual  part,  raising  the 
rotation,  as  the  following  table  shows  : 

Acids  aD                        Lactones                   a.D 

Santoninic  acid,  C15H.WO4  -  26°  Santonine,  CHHi803  -  174° 

Santonic  acid,  C^H^O,  -  70°  Santonid,  CJ5H1803  +  745° 

Santononic  acid,  C30H3806  +  37°  Santonone,  C30H3404  +  129° 

Isosantononic  acid,    „  —  40°  Isosantonone,     „  +  265° 

Finally,  it  may  be  observed  that  the  cause  of  the 
remarkably  high  rotation  appears  to  be  akin  to  the 
cause  of  the  colour  of  organic  compounds. 


STEREOCHEMISTRY   OF   NITROGEN 
COMPOUNDS 

SINCE  on  the  one  hand  the  isomeric  benzildioxine 
discovered  by  Goldschmidt l  was  proved  by  Meyer 
and  Auwers  2  to  be  structurally  identical  with  the 
one  formerly  known,  and  since  on  the  other  hand 
Le  Bel 3  obtained  active  ammonium  derivatives,  the 
stereochemistry  of  nitrogen  compounds,  which  I 
have  already  had  occasion  to  deal  with,4  has  acquired 
practical  interest. 

To  begin  with  that  which  is  simplest,  let  us  in 
the  first  place  consider  the  compounds  of  trivalent 
nitrogen. 

I.  TRIVALENT  NITROGEN 

A.  TRIVALENT  NITROGEN  WITHOUT  DOUBLE  LINKAGE 

Here,  where  we  have  to  do  with  the  configuration 
of  four  atoms  or  groups,  NXYZ,  the  case  is  still 
simpler  than  with  carbon,  where  there  were  five, 
C(K1K2K3K4),  to  consider.  Putting  the  matter  quite 

1  Bar.  16,  1616,  2176.  2  Ibid.  21,  784. 

3  Compt.  Rend.  112,  724. 

4  Maandblad  voor  Natuurwetenschappen,  1877;  Ansichten  itber 
org.  Chemie,  80,  1878. 


170      STEREOCHEMISTRY   OF  NITROGEN   COMPOUNDS 

generally — that  is,  without  for  the  present  calling  in 
the  aid  of  the  tetrahedron — we  may  say  in  the  latter 
case  that,  given  the  identity  of  two  groups,  e.g. 
E3  and  E4,  a  mechanical  necessity  demands  that 
these  two  groups  shall  be  similarly  situated  with 
regard  to  the  whole,  which  only  happens  if  they  are 
symmetrically  arranged  with  regard  to  the  plane 
passing  through  CEjEg.  This  brings  us  at  once  to 
the  tetrahedral  arrangement ;  only  it  may  as  well  be 
Ej  or  E2  as  the  carbon  which  occupies  the  centre. 
The  latter  is  only  the  case  on  the  assumption  of 
directive  forces  proceeding  from  the  carbon  atom. 

In  the  case  of  nitrogen  derivatives,  NXYZ,  we 
should  from  general  mechanical  considerations  arrive 
at  a  tetrahedron  of  some  form,  which  of  course 
would  be  unsymmetrical  and  would  lead  to  optical 
isomerism.  Attempts  at  '  doubling,'  made  by  Kraft l 
and  by  Behrend  and  Konig  with  NH(C2H5)=C7H7, 
p-tolylhydrazine,  hydroxylamine  bases  (NHEOH),2 
gave  negative  results.  It  is  therefore  not  improbable 
that  the  groups  NXYZ  lie  in  one  plane,3  which 

1  Ber.  23,  2780. 

-  Ann.  263,  184.  Also  Ladenburg  (Ber.  26,  864)  tried  in  vain  to 
obtain  optically  active  methylaniline,  tetrahydroquinoline,  and  tetra- 
hydropyridine. 

3  Further  evidence  of  this  has  been  supplied  by  the  discovery  of 
two  stereomeric  compounds  of  the  ammonia  type,  which  proved  to  be 
inactive. 

Isomers  having  the  plane  formulae, 

X\     /Y  X\     /Z 

\N/  \N/ 

I  I 

Z  Y 

are  of  course  impossible,  because  these  configurations  are  identical. 


STEREOCHEMISTRY  OF  NITROGEN  COMPOUNDS      171 

again  points  to  the  existence  of  directive  forces,  in 
this  case  proceeding  from  the  nitrogen. 

B.    TEIVALENT   NITROGEN  DOUBLY  LINKED   WITH 
CARBON 

The  oximes. — The  first  remarkable  isomerism 
among  nitrogen  isomers,  which  indicated  the  ex- 
istence of  stereochemical  relations,  was  that  of  the 
oximes,  which  are  known  to  contain  the  group 
C=NOH. 

It  was  found  to  be  a  perfectly  general  rule  that 
isomerism  occurs  when  the  groups  attached  to  carbon 
are  different,  as  the  following  table  shows  : 

Aldoximes  HXCNOH 

Ethylaldoxime '    .        .        .        .  CH3HCNOH 
Propionaldoxime 2         .        .        .  C2H5HCNOH 

But  if  X,  Y,  Z  are  bunched  together  by  their  mutual  attraction,  then 

X        -TT  X,         r/ 

I/Y      and        |/Z 

N— Z  N— Y 

represent  two  different  configurations.  Accordingly  the  stereomers 
in  question,  which  are  condensation  products  of  acetaldehyde  with 
asyni.  m-xylidene,  may  be  represented  by  the  formulas : 

CH(CH3).CH2CHO  CH(CH3).CH2CHO 

N.C6H3(CH3)2  and          N.H 

H  C6H3(CH3)2 

(v.  Miller  and  Plochl,  Ber.  29,  1462,  1733).  The  presence  of  an 
asymmetric  carbon  indicates  that  each  isomer  should  be  divisible 
into  two  active  forms.  It  must  be  noted  that  the  persistence  of  the 
isomerism  in  the  compounds  of  the  two  substances  has  not  yet  been 
established. 

1  Franchimont,  Versl.  Kon.  Akad.  Amsterdam,  1892  ;  Bee.  Pays- 
Bas,  10,  236. 

2  Dunstan,  Chem.  Soc.  J.  Proc.  1893,  76  ;  Ber.  26,  2856. 


172      STEREOCHEMISTRY   OF  NITROGEN   COMPOUNDS 

Aldoximes  HXCNOH 

Furfuraldoxime '  .         .         .         .  C4H3OHCNOH 
Thiophenaldoxime '      .        .        .  C4H3SHCNOH 
Aldoximeacetic  acid  2  .        .        .  C02HCH2HCNOH 
Benzaldoxime 3     .         .         .         .  C6H5HCNOH 
p-,  o-,  and  m-Nitrobenzaldoxime 4  C6H4(N02)HCNOH 
o-,  m-,  and  p-Chlorbenzaldoxime 5  C6H4C1HCNOH 
3-,  4-Dichlorbenzaldoxime  6         .  C,;H3C12HCNOH 
Cuminaldoxime 7 .         .         .         .  C6H4(C3H7)HCNOH 
Anisaldoxime  8     ....  C6H4(OCH3)HCNOH 

Ketoximes  XYCNOH 

Oxiraidosuccinic  acid !)          .         .  C02HCNOHCH,C02H 
Phenylchlorphenyl 10    .         .         .  C6H5.C6H4C1CNOH 
„       bromphenyl 10  .         .         .  C6H5.C6H4BrCNOH 
„       lolyl11       ....  CGH5.C7H7CNOH 
„       anisyl8     ....  CfiH5.C6H4(OCH3)CNOH 
„       ethylphenyl      .         .         .  C.H^C.H.C.H.CNOH 
„       propylphenyl    .         .         .  CUH5.C6H4C3H7CNOH 
,,       isopropylphenyl        .         .  ,, 

„  araidophenyl  .  .  .  C6H5C6H4NH2CNOH 
„  oxyphenyl >2  .  .  .  C0H5.C6H4OHCNOH 
„  xylylphenyl >3  .  .  .  Cfa.H5.C8H9CNOH 

Benzoin14 C6H5.CNOHCH,C6H5 

Benzil15 C6H5.CNOHCOC6H5 


1  Goldschmidt  and  Zanoli,  Bar.  25,  2573. 

2  Hantzsch,  ibid.  25,  1904. 

3  Beckmann,  Ber.  22,  429,  514 ;  23,  1531,  1588. 

4  Goldschmidt,  ibid.  23,  2163  ;    24,  2547  ;  Behrend,  I.e.  3088 ; 
Hantzsch,  I.e.  23,  2170 ;  Goldschmidt  and  v.  Rietschoten,  I.e.  26,  2100. 

5  Behrend  and  Niessen,  Ann.  269,  390  ;  Erdmann  and  Schwech- 
ten,  ibid.  260,  60. 

6  Ibid.  260,  63. 

7  Goldschmidt  and  Behrend,  Ber.  23,  2175. 

8  Beckmann,  Ber.  23, 1687  ;  vide  also  Goldschmidt,  ibid.  23,  2163 ; 
Hantzsch,  ibid.  24,  36,  3479. 

9  Cramer,  ibid.  24,  1198. 

10  Auwers  and  Meyer,  ibid.  23,  2063.    n  Wegerhof,  Ann.  252,  11. 

12  Hantzsch,  Ber.  24,  5,  3479. 

13  Smith,  ibid.  24,  4029.  I4  Werner,  ibid.  23, 

15  Auwers  and  Meyer,  ibid.  22,  537 ;  Beckmann,  ibid.  22,  514. 


STEKEOCHEMISTKY  OF  NITROGEN  COMPOUNDS      173 

Ketoxiraes  XYCNOH 

Carvoxime1  ....  C9HUCNOH 

Thienylphenyl2    ....  C4H,8CNOHCfH, 

Acetacetic  ester 3  .         .         .         .  CH3CNOHCO,C,H5 
Papaveraldoximes 4      .  C6H3(CH30),CN6HC(JNH5(CH30), 

Phenylketoximepropionic  acid  5   .  CUH5CNOHCH,CH,C02H 
Phenylketoximecarboxylic  acid 6 .  CtiH5CNOHC02H 
Hydroxamic  acid          .        .        .  HOXCNOH 
Ethylbenzhydroxamic  acid 7         .  C2H5O.C6H3CNOH 

It  must  be  mentioned  that  the  only  possible 
aldoxime  which  contains  two  similar  atoms  attached 
to  carbon,  H2CNOH,  exhibits  no  isomerism,  nor 
does  the  diphenyl  derivative  among  the  ketoximes. 
But  if  substitution  occurs  in  one  of  the  phenyl 
groups,  the  two  forms  regularly  appear.8 

The  dioximes. — When  the  peculiar  oxime  group- 
ing occurs  several  times  in  the  molecule,  the  number 
of  the  isomers  rises,  amounting  to  three  when  the 
formula  is  symmetrical,  as  with  benzildioxime, 
(C6H5CNOH)2.  Dioximidosuccinic  acid, 

(C02HCNOH)2, 

camphor-,  anisyl-,  nitrobenzil-,  and  ditolyl-dioxime, 
probably  also  the  simplest  gly oxime,  (HCNOH)2, 
and  phenylgly oxime,9  occur  in  two  forms.  Kecent 

Goldschmidt,  Ber.  26,  2084.  -  Hantzsch,  ibid.  24,  5,  3479. 

Jovitschitsch,  ibid.  28,  2683. 

Hirsch,  Monatsh.f.  Chem.  16,  831. 

Ber.  24,  41.  6  Dollfus,  ibid.  25,  1932. 

Lessen,  Ann.  175,  271 ;  186,  1 ;  252,  170. 

With  the  oximes  must  be  ranked  the  anil  compounds, 
XYC:NC6H5,  since  v.  Miller  and  Plochl  (Ber.  27,  1296)  have  pre- 
pared, by  the  action  of  acetaldehyde  on  aniline,  twoisomeric  ethylidene 
anilines  (CH3.HC  :  NC6H5)2.  See  also  Ber.  29,  1733.  L.  Simon,  how- 
ever, attempted  in  vain  to  prepare  these  isomers  (Bull.  Soc.  Ckim. 
[3],  13,  334).  »  Ber.  24,  25. 


174      STEKEOCHEMISTKY   OF  NITROGEN   COMPOUNDS 

additions  to  this  list  are  the  dioximes  of  quinone 
and  thymoquinone. 

The  facts  concerning  the  oximes  are,  then,  very 
simple :  regular  occurrence  of  two  isomers 1  for 
compounds  of  the  formula  XYCNOH  ;  disappearance 
of  this  isomerism  when  X  and  Y  become  identical ; 
increase  in  the  number  of  isomers  when  the  above- 
mentioned  group  occurs  more  than  once  in  the  same 
molecule. 

The  observations  concerning  allied  bodies  may 
now  be  given.  The  groups  to  be  considered  where 
nitrogen  occurs  doubly -linked  with  carbon  are  these  : 

The  hydrazones 2  and  carbazides.3 — Just  as  oximes 
are  formed  by  the  action  of  hydroxylamine  on  alde- 
hydes or  ketones,  &c.,  i.e.  on  compounds  containing 
the  group  CO,  so  the  hydrazones  are  formed  by  a 
corresponding  action  of  hydrazines  on  these  com- 
pounds. And  if  the  group  CO  is  first  replaced  by 
CC12,  there  are  again  formed  two  isomers,  provided 
the  groups  linked  with  carbon  are  different.  The 

1  There  are,  however,  many  exceptions — cases  in  which  only  one 
isomer  has  been  isolated.     There  is  only  one  oxime  of  pyruvic  acid, 
of  thienylglyoxylic  acid,  of  the  ortho-substituted  aromatic  acids,  of 
the  mixed  ketones  containing  an  aliphatic  and  an  aromatic  radical 
(Glaus  and  Hafelin,  J.  -prakt.  Cliem.  54,  391).    But  if  we  compare 
this  single  oxime  with  two  stereomers  of  analogous  constitution  and 
of  known  configuration,  we  find  that  in  its  chemical  and  physical 
properties  it  resembles  one  of  the  two  isomers,  and  totally  differs 
from  the  other.     These  are,  then,  extreme  cases  of  the  instability  of 
one  isomer. 

2  Fehrlin  and  Krause,  Ber.  23,  1574,  3617  ;  Hantzsch  and  Kraft, 
ibid.  24,  3511 ;  Hantzsch  and  Overton,  ibid.  26,  9,  18. 

3  Marckwald,   ibid.    24,    2880;    Dixon,    J.    Chem.   Soc.    Trans. 
1892,  1012. 


STEREOCHEMISTRY   OF  NITROGEN   COMPOUNDS     175 

substances  at  present  known  have  been  prepared 
from  phenyl-  and  diphenyl-hydrazine,  and  correspond 
therefore  to  the  formulae 

XYCNNHC6H5          and        XYCNN(C6H5)2. 

The  following  derivatives  of  this  kind  have  been 
obtained  in  two  forms  : 

Phenylhydrazone  of  XYCNNHC6H5 

o-Nitrophenylglyoxylic  acid  .        .        .  CaH4NO,(C0.2H)CNNHC6H5 
Anisylphenylketone       ....  C6H5(CtiH4OCH3)CNNHC6H5 

Carbazide      ...         .         .         .  C6H3NH(SH)CNNHC,.H5 

p-Tolylcarbazide  ......  C7H7NH(SH)CNNHC,.H5 

Phenyl-p-tolylcarbazide       '.         .         .  C6H5NH(SH)CNNHC7H7 
o-Tolyl-p-tolylcarbazide        .         .         .  C.H.NH(SH)CNNHC7H7 
Di-p-tolylcarbazide       .         .         .         .  . ,  ,, 

Benzylphenylcarbazide         .         .         .  C7H7NH(SH)CNNHCtiH5 

Diphenylhydrazones  of  ,     XYCNN(C6H5), 

Anisylphenylketone       ....  CtiH5(C6H4OCHa)NN(C6H5), 
Tolylphenylketone        .        .        .         .  C6H5(C(jH4CH3)NN(CtjH5)2 

The  carbodi-imides. — By  abstracting  hydrogen 
sulphide  from  sulphocarbanilide,  SC(NHC6H5)2, 
Weith  l  obtained  a  carbodiphenylimide,  C(NC6H5)2, 
which  according  to  Schall's  2  researches  occurs  in 
three  modifications  of  equal  molecular  weight. 
According  to  Miller  and  Plochl,3  however,  there  are 
only  two  modifications,  of  which  one  has  thrice  the 
molecular  weight  of  the  other. 

The  diazotates. 

C6H5.N2.X.(X=C1,  OMe,  S03Me,  CN). 
Besides  the  structural  isomers, 

(1)  C6H5.N.X        and         (2)  C6H5N  :  NX, 

N 

1  Ber.  7,  1306. 

2  Ibid.  25,  2880  ;  26,  3064  ;  Zeitschr.  physik.  Chem.  12,  145. 

3  Ber.  28,  1004. 


176      STEEEOCHEMISTKY   OF  NITEOGEN   COMPOUNDS 

there  is  evidence l  to  show  that  the  compounds 
possessing  the  formula  (2)  exist  in  two  forms,  to 
which  Hantzsch  attributes  the  stereomeric  formulae 

CBHaN  C6H5N 

XN  and  NX 

syn-diazotate  anti-diazotate 

The  question  of  the  constitution  of  these  substances 
is  still  in  dispute.2 

The  isomerism  of  the  bodies  H2N2O2  is  also 
attributed  by  Hantzsch  3  to  doubly  linked  nitrogen  : 

HO.N  HO.N 

(1)     HO.N  (2)  N.OH 

syn-  anti-hyponitrous  acid 

The  isomer  (1)  is  that  which  readily  breaks  up  into 
N20  and  water. 

C.    TEIVALENT   NITROGEN   IN    CLOSED   EINGS 

Just  as  in  the  case  of  carbon  the  double  linkage 
and  the  fumar-maleic  isomerism  were  treated  in 
connection  with  ring  linkage  and  the  isomerism  of 
the  hydrophthalic  acids,  so  here  some  remarkable 
observations  by  Ladenburg  and  by  Giustiniani  should 
be  mentioned. 

The  former,  having  shown  that  there  are  pro- 
bably five  isomeric  piperidinemonocarboxylic  acids,4 

1  Hantzsch,  Ber.  28,  1734 ;  Hantzsch  and  Gerilowski,  ibid.  28, 
2002  ;  29,  743,  1059. 

-  Bamberger,  Ber.  29,  564,  1388 ;  Blomstrand,  J.  prakt.   Chem. 
54,  305. 

3  Ann.  292,  340 ;  Hantzsch  and  Kaufmann,  ibid.  292,  317. 

*  Ber.  25,  2775. 


STEREOCHEMISTRY    OF  NITROGEN   COMPOUNDS      177 

proved1  that  conine  (an  =  ~L&8°) ,  on  heating  the 
chlorhydrate  with  zinc  dust,  is  transformed  into  an 
isomer  (a/)=8'20),2  and  that  this  was  also  the  case 
with  the  active  a-methylpiperidine.3 

As  the  rotation  alone  indicates,  it  may  be  sup- 
posed that  this  is  not  a  case  of  isomerism  caused  by 
the  asymmetric  carbon  atom. 

Giustiniani 4  found  that  benzylmalimide  occurs 
in  two  isomeric  forms,  of  which  one  is  distinguished 
from  the  other  by  having  about  double  the  rotation  : 

a-Imide  aD=  -24-3°  (2-28  %)       £-Imide  aD  =  -48-2°  (2-255  %) 
aD=  -21-4°  (0-244%)          „        a^^-430     (0-226%) 

This  isomerism  is  maintained  in  the  acetyl  and 
benzoyl  derivatives,  but  is  lacking  in  the  benzyl- 
malamic  acid,  which  is  formed  by  treatment  with 
potash. 

If  we  compare  the  constitutional  formulae 

CH2— CH2  H2C— CO 

HC/  \NH  \NC7H7 

CH2— CHX  UOHC— CO 

we  find  here  a  structure  analogous  to  the  above  cases 
of  double  linkage,  since  here  symmetry  is  lacking  in 
the  carbon  radical  attached  to  the  nitrogen.  Perfectly 
analogous  cases  of  isomerism  have  been  recently 

1  Preuss.  Akad.  1892,  1057. 

2  Wolffenstein  accounts  this  a  mixture  of  inactive  and  dextro- 
conine  (Bar.  27,  2616 ;   29,   195).      But   see  Ladenburg,  ibid.   29, 
2706. 

3  But  see  Marckwald,  Ber.  29,  43,  1293;    and  Ladenburg,   I.e. 
p.  422. 

4  Gazz.  Chim.  1893,  168. 

N 


11 '8      STEREOCHEMISTRY   OF  NITROGEN   COMPOUNDS 

discovered    by   Ladenburg l    among    the    imides  of 
tartaric  acid. 

D.    CONFIGURATION   IN    THE   CASE  OF  DOUBLY  LINKED 
NITROGEN  2 

Combining  the  two  ideas,  that  from  carbon  there 
proceed  four  directive  forces  as  divergent  as  possible— 
that  is,  directed  to  wards  the  tetrahedron  corners — and 
also  from  nitrogen  three  forces  in  one 
plane  directed  towards  the  corners  of 
a  triangle,  we  arrive  at  the  annexed 
fig.  18  in  the  same  way  as  we  deduced 
the   figure   for  doubly  linked  carbon. 
The  essence    of   this    arrangement  is 
that,  as  in  ethylene  derivatives,  all  the 
components,  ANCXY,  must  be  arranged 
in  one  plane.     Under  the  influence  of 
the  attractive  forces  proceeding  from 
X  and  Y,  the  radical  at  A  appears  to 
find  its  position  of  equilibrium  either  nearer  to  X  or 
nearer  to  Y  ;  but  as  one  of  these  positions  will  be 
more  favoured  than  the  other,  we  can  always  dis- 
tinguish a  stable  and  a  labile  modification.  Hantzsch 
and  Werner  represent  this  very  suitably  thus  : 3 

1  Ber.  29,  2710. 

2  Willgerodt,   J.  prakt.  Ghent.  37,  449 ;    Marsh,  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
1889,  654  ;  Hantzsch  and  Werner,  Ber.  23,  11 ;  Werner,  Raumliche 
Anordnung     der    Atome    in     stickstoffhaltigen    Molekulen,    1890 ; 
Beitrdge  zur  Theorie  der  Affinitat  und  Valenz,  1891  ;  Vaubel,  Das 
Stickstoffatom,  1891 ;  V.  Meyer  and  Auwers,  Ber.  24,  4229  ;  26,  16. 

3  But  compare  Behal,  Actualitts  Chimiques,  1,  76  ;  Jovitschitsch, 
I.e.  167. 


STEREOCHEMISTRY  OF  NITROGEN  COMPOUNDS      179 

NA  AN 

II  and  || 

XCY  XCY 

The  three  isomers  of  benzildioxime  would  then  be 
represented  thus : 

...  xc- — cx       xc- — ex        xc— -ex 


AN        NA 


AN     AN 


NA  AN 


For  the  corresponding  isomerism  in  ring  com- 
pounds the  relations  would  be  expressed,  according 
to  Ladenburg,  by  the  symbols  used  on  p.  121,  as 
follows  : 


and 


C3H7 


Nitrogen  linked  with  nitrogen. — It  must  not  be 
overlooked  that  Willgerodt l  has  observed  in  the  case 
of  the  picrylhydrazines  formed  from  dinitrochloro- 
benzene  and  phenylhydrazine, 

C6H3(N02)HNNH(C6H5) 

— as  well  as  in  the  case  of  picryl-a-  and  -/3-naphthyl- 
hydrazine,2  which  are  constituted  according  to  the 
formula  EjHNNEgH — an  isomerism  which,  on 
oxidising  these  compounds  to  the  azo-derivative 
g,  disappears. 


J.  prakt.  Cliem.  37,  449. 


2  Ibid.  43,  177. 

N  2 


180      STEREOCHEMISTRY  OF  NITROGEN  COMPOUNDS^ 

The  explanation  given,  which  is  based  upon  the 
difference  between  the  symbols 


and  ! 

K2NH  HNK2 

would  indicate  that  free  rotation  is  stopped  by  a 
single  nitrogen-nitrogen  linkage,  as  by  a  double 
carbon  linkage. 

The  cause  of  this  might  be  found  in  the  supple- 
mentary valences,  and  doubly  linked  nitrogen  would 
then  be  analogous  to  trebly  linked  carbon  and  cause 
no  isomerism. 

II.  COMPOUNDS  CONTAINING  PENTAVALENT 
NITEOGEN 

Besides  these  researches  on  derivatives  where  the 
nitrogen  is  trivalent,  there  are  some  observations  of 
Le  Bel's  on  ammonium  compounds.  In  the  first 
place  he  succeeded  l  in  obtaining  two  isomeric 
trimethylisobutylammonium  chlorides,  a  result 
which  calls  to  mind  the  isomerism  which  Ladenburg2 
stated  to  exist  in  the  trimethylbenzyl  derivative, 
but  which  Meyer  3  doubted.  The  isomerism  dis- 
covered by  Le  Bel  shows  itself  in  the  chloroplatinate, 
which  at  first  forms  in  needles,  but  after  recrystallisa- 
tion  from  alcohol  in  octahedra.  This  second  type  is 
regained  unaltered  after  treatment  with  silver  oxide 
and  reconversion  to  chloroplatinate  ;  but  if  the  ex- 
periment lasts  some  time  the  needles  result  on  re- 

1  Compt.  Rend.  110,  144.  2  Ber.  10,  43,  561,  1152,  1634. 

3  Ibid.  309,  964  978  (Corrp.),  1291. 


STEKEOCHEMISTKY  OF  NITROGEN  COMPOUNDS      181 

formation  of  the  platinate.  One  compound  there- 
fore is  the  more  stable  as  chloroplatinate,  the  other 
as  hydroxide.  It  is  to  be  observed  that  if  the  sub- 
stituted groups  are  smaller  (trimethylpropyl,  tri- 
propylmethyl)  the  isomerism  in  question  does  not 
occur,  probably  in  consequence  of  an  intra-molecular 
transformation,  which,  in  fact,  is  favoured  by  the 
mobility  of  the  smaller  groups.  The  same  thing  is 
observed  among  the  oximes  ;  ethylaldoxime  is  easily 
transformed,  and  probably  for  the  same  reasons  the 
simplest  members  of  the  ketoximes  are  lacking  (e.g. 
phenylmethylketoxime) .  Schry ver l  made  similar 
observations.  While  the  corresponding  ethyl  and 
methyl  derivatives  showed  no  isomerism,  it  was 
found  that  on  treating  methylethylisoamylamine 
with  ethyliodide  a  chloroplatinate  results,  which  on 
warming  is  converted  into  the  compound  obtained 
direct  from  methyl  iodide  or  amyl  iodide  and  the 
appropriate  amine.  Here,  then,  we  have  isomerism 
in  the  case  of 

(H3C)3C4H9NC1  and  (H3C)(C2H5)2C5HUNC1. 

Finally,  Le  Bel 2  has  made  the  most  impor- 
tant observation,  that  isobutylpropylethylmethyl- 
ammonium  chloride  may  be  '  doubled,'  and  yields 
active  compounds,  numbering  probably  four.  The 
chlorides  of  ethylpropyldimethyl,  ethyldipropyl- 
methyl,  ethyldipropylisobutyl,  and  ethylpropyldiiso- 
butyl  ammonium  could  not  be  '  doubled.' 

The  only  conclusion  at  present  to  be  drawn  from 

1  J.  Chem.  Soc.  Proc.  1891,  39.  ~  Compt.  Rend.  112,  724. 


182      STEKEOCHEMISTEY   OF  NITKOGEN   COMPOUNDS 

what  has  just  been  said  is  that  in  ammonium 
chloride,  in  view  of  the  activity  among  its  deriva- 
tives, all  the  atoms  do  not  lie  in  one  plane  ;  while  in 
view  of  the  isomerism  of  the  trimethylisobutyl 
derivative,  the  four  hydrogen  atoms  have  not  identi- 
cal positions  in  the  molecule.  The  inactivity 
observed  when  two  groups  are  identical  would  indi- 
cate that  the  similar  groups  are  symmetrically 
situated  with  regard  to  the  plane  passing  through  the 
two  others,  the  nitrogen  and  the  chlorine. 

For  graphic  representation  I  will  reproduce  here 
that  cube  which  I  long  ago  proposed  (p.  169).     The 
nitrogen  is  supposed  to  be  in  the 
centre    and    the    five    connected 
groups  in  five  of  the  corners  (fig. 
19).     Of  these  1,  2,  and  3,  which 
have  equivalent  positions,  corre- 
spond to  the  alkyls  attached  to 
FIG.  19.  the  three  chief  valences.     When 

the  nitrogen  is  trivalent  they  lie  in 
one  plane  with  it ;  here  they  are  somewhat  displaced 
through  the  influence  of  the  chlorine  situated  in  4  ; 
in  5  lies  the  fourth  alkyl. 

If  one  of  the  alkyls  is  different  from  the  three 
others,  which  are  identical,  so  that  the  type 

(E,)3E2NC1 

results,  as  in  (H3C)3C4H9NC1,  there  is  the  possibility 
of  isomerism  according  as  C4H9  is  in  5  or  in  1  to  3. 
And  this  isomerism  has  actually  been  observed.  As 
yet  there  is  no  reason  to  expect  optical  activity. 


STEKEOCHEMISTKY   OF  NITKOGEN  COMPOUNDS     183 

The  stability  of  one  isomer  has  been  found  to  be  very 
slight. 

If  two  different  alkyls  have  entered  the  molecule, 
which  would  give  the  type  (K1)2R2R3NC1,  then  be- 
sides asymmetric  (i.e.  active)  configurations  (Rj  in  5), 
there  is  always  a  symmetrical  configuration  possible 
(R2  or  R3  in  5) ;  and  the  slight  stability  above  men- 
tioned leads  to  the  symmetrical  type,  which  always 
corresponds  to  the  favoured  position  of  equilibrium. 
Accordingly  '  doubling  '  has  not  succeeded  here,  e.g. 
in  the  case  of 

C2H5(CH3)2C3H7NC1. 

If  three  different  radicals  have  entered  the  mole- 
cule (type  R1R2R3R4NC1),  internal  symmetry  is 
impossible.  The  '  doubling '  succeeded  here  in  the 
case  of  (C4H9)(C3H7)(C2H5)(CH3)NC1,  of  which 
already  several  isomers  have  been  prepared.  Of  these, 
four  types  should  exist,  according  as  one  or  the 
other  of  the  four  different  groups  occupies  5  ;  each 
of  the  four  types  would  be  divisible  into  two  isomers 
of  opposite  activity. 


185 


APPENDIX 


STEREOCHEMICAL  ISOMEEISM  OF 
INOEGANIC    COMPOUNDS 

NOTE  BY  ALFBED  WERNEB 

Professor  of  Chemistry  in  the  University  of  Zurich 

To  facilitate  the  study  of  the  stereochemical  isomerism 
presented  by  certain  classes  of  inorganic  compounds,  we 
must  glance  briefly  at  the  constitution  of  these  substances. 
They  are  molecular  compounds  whose  constitution  can 
hardly  be  represented  with  the  aid  of  the  idea  of 
valence,  unless  we  resort  to  several  secondary  hypotheses, 
each  applicable  to  only  a  limited  number  of  compounds. 

The  constitution  of  the  molecular  compounds  may  be 
established  on  the  basis  of  a  relation  between  those  known 
as  ammoniacal  metallic  compounds  and  the  double  salts, 
such  as  the  double  chlorides,  fluorides,  nitrites,  &c. 
Indeed,  the  two  extreme  groups  may  be  connected  by  a 
certain  number  of  intermediate  bodies  of  mixed  character, 
thus  forming  a  continuous  series  in  which  the  molecular 
combinations  of  the  first  class  gradually  pass  into  the 
double  salts. 

Let  us  consider  this  remarkable  transition  in  one  of 
the  most  simple  series.  In  the  study  of  the  compounds 
in  question  the  fact  that  certain  electro-negative  radicals 
in  the  molecule  behave  in  a  peculiar,  an  abnormal  manner, 


186  APPENDIX 

is  of  great  importance.  To  emphasise  this  peculiarity,  let 
us  take  a  special  case.  We  are  acquainted  with  two 
ammoniacal  compounds  of  cobalt,  the  one  corresponding 
to  the  formula  Co(NH3)6Cl3,  the  other  to  the  formula 
Co(NH3)5Cl3.  It  is  seen  that  the  two  bodies  differ  only 
by  a  molecule  of  ammonia,  and  yet  their  chemical 
properties  are  very  different  and  characterised  by  the 
following  reactions.  On  adding  a  solution  of  nitrate  of 
silver  to  a  solution  of  the  first  salt,  it  is  found  that  the 
three  atoms  of  chlorine  are  precipitated  as  silver  chloride, 
a  nitrate,  Co(NH3)6(N03)3,  being  formed.  In  the  case  of 
the  second  salt,  the  nitrate  of  silver  precipitates  only  two 
atoms  of  chlorine,  the  third  differs  entirely  in  its  chemical 

(~n 

function  ;  a  chloronitrate,  Co(NH3)5/1VTr>  v  ,  results. 

(1NU3J2 

This  difference  in  reaction  is  observed  also  in  the  case 
of  other  reagents.  Thus,  when  acted  on  by  concentrated 
sulphuric  acid,  the  first  salt  loses  its  three  atoms  of 
chlorine  as  hydrochloric  acid,  while  the  second  in  the 
same  circumstances  loses  only  two  molecules  of  hydro- 
chloric acid. 

Thus  the  three  chlorine  atoms  of  the  second  salt  have 
not  the  same  chemical  function ;  one  of  them  behaves  in 
a  special  way  like  the  chlorine  in  certain  organic  com- 
pounds. Arrhenius'  hypothesis  of  electrolytic  dissociation 
accounts  for  this  anomaly.  The  two  atoms  of  chlorine 
which  have  the  same  properties  as  the  chlorine  in  the 
ordinary  chlorides  (chloride  of  potassium,  &c.)  behave  as 
ions,  while  the  third  does  not. 

As  is  well  known,  one  of  the  factors  of  the  electric 
conductivity  of  a  saline  solution  is  the  number  of  ions 
which  it  contains ;  the  properties  of  the  two  salts 
Co(NH3)6Cl3  and  Co(NH3)5Cl3  indicated,  then,  that  there 
would  be  a  difference  in  the  conductivity  of  the  solutions 
of  these  compounds.  Experiment  confirms  this  prevision. 


APPENDIX  187 

For  a  dilution  of  1,000  litres  the  molecular  conductivity 
of  the  first  salt  has  been  found  equal  to  432'6,  and  that  of 
the  second  to  261'3. 

There  can  then  be  no  doubt  that  the  first  salt  contains 
three  atoms  of  chlorine  identical  in  properties  and  acting 
as  ions,  while  the  second  contains  only  two  which  can 
act  in  this  way. 

What  chiefly  interests  us  is  to  find  the  difference  of 
constitution  to  which  we  should  refer  the  various  pro- 
perties of  the  negative  groups  forming  part  of  the  mole- 
cules in  question. 

All  the  chemists  who  have  worked  at  this  subject, 
whatever  their  theories  as  to  the  constitution  of  the 
ammoniacal  metallic  compounds,  consider  this  difference 
of  constitution  as  the  consequence  of  a  different  connection 
of  the  negative  group  with  the  metallic  atom,  which 
connection  may  be  either  direct  or  indirect. 

When  the  connection  is  direct — that  is,  when  the 
negative  group  is  directly  united  with  the  metal — this 
group  does  not  behave  as  an  ion.  When  the  connection  is 
indirect — that  is,  when  the  negative  group  is  united  to  the 
metal  indirectly  by  means  of  anjmoniacal  molecules — this 
group  behaves  as  an  ion.  The  difference  between  the  two 
kinds  of  connection  is  indicated  by  the  following  formula  : 

r  ^Cl 
0<NH3C1 

Although  this  way  of  looking  at  the  constitution  of 
these  compounds  does  not  harmonise  very  well  with  the 
ideas  which  we  ordinarily  hold  concerning  the  state  of 
salts  in  solution,  it  is  so  thoroughly  confirmed  by  all  the 
facts  observed  with  regard  to  the  class  of  ammonio- 
metallic  compounds,  that  it  is  hardly  possible  to  doubt  it, 
and  we  shall  adopt  it  in  the  following  discussion. 

One  of  the  simplest  series  of  bodies  which  we  have  to 
consider  is  that  of  the  derivatives  of  bivalent  platinum. 


188  APPENDIX 

The  platinum  atom  combines  with  four  molecules  of 
ammonia  to  form  a  compound,  Pt(NH3)4X2,  the  letter  X 
representing  a  monovalent  acid  radical.  The  reactions  of 
these  salts,  and  their  molecular  conductivity,  prove  that 
the  two  acid  groups  act  as  ions  ;  they  represent  the  acid 
radicals  of  a  salt  of  which  the  positive  part  is  the  radical 
Pt(NH3)4. 

The  second  term  of  the  series  is  a  compound, 
Pt(NH3)3X2  ; 


the    old    constitutional    formula      Pt  <          'v  Hs'X     is 

JN±i3X 

not  at  all  in  accord  with  the  observed  molecular  con- 
ductivity, which  indicates  that  only  one  of  the  chlorine 
atoms  behaves  as  an  ion.  The  formula  should  then  be 

Pt(NH3)3X 
X 

The  third  term  of  the  series,  Pt(NH3)2X2,  is  found  in 
two  isomeric  forms,  the  salts  of  platosammine  and  the 
salts  of  platosemidiammine.  The  formulae  attributed  by 
Cleve  and  Jorgensen  to  these  salts  are  the  following  : 

p      NH3.C1  ,       p      NH3.NH3.C1 

<NH3.C1  <C1 

Now,  neither  of  these  formulae  accounts  for  the  chemical 
properties  and  the  electric  conductivities  of  these  salts. 
Indeed,  these  substances  no  longer  behave  at  all  like  salts 
of  strong  bases  ;  but  the  chlorine,  in  such  salts  as 


2 

has  properties  analogous  to  those  possessed  by  this 
element  in  chlorinated  organic  bodies  ;  the  electric 
conductivity  approaches  zero,  and  it  is  with  great  difficulty 
that  any  chemical  reactions  can  be  brought  about.  From 
all  this  it  follows  that  their  formulae  must  be 


APPENDIX  189 

the  two  negative  radicals  being  in  direct  union  with  the 
platinum  ;  in  this  case  the  ammonia  molecules  must  be 
united  similarly  ;  the  rational  formula  will  be  then  : 

NH 


The  negative  groups  being  attached  by  means  of 
valences,  as  it  is  usually  called,  the  ammonia  molecules 
by  means  of  secondary  forces,  I  shall  indicate  this 
difference  by  saying  that  the  molecules  of  ammonia  are 
co-ordinated,  that  is  to  say,  that  they  must  be  directly 
connected  with  the  metallic  atom,  the  platinum,  although 
this  linkage  is  not  due  to  what  are  ordinarily  called 
valences. 

The  next  term  of  the  series  is  a  compound, 

PtNH3Cl2ClE, 

E  representing  a  monovalent  positive  group  ;  it  is  a  double 
salt  in  the  ordinary  sense  of  the  word.  Supposing  E  to 
represent  an  atom  of  potassium,  the  formula  would 

ordinarily  be  written  thus  :  Pt^3  +  KC1.      But  the  sub- 

stance does  not  behave  at  all  as  this  formula  would 
indicate;  on  the  contrary,  its  molecular  conductivity  proves 

that  it  contains  a  complex  radical,  Ft™    3,  which  acts  as 

a  negative  ion,  the  potassium  being  the  electro-positive 
ion.  The  compound  in  question  is  a  salt  of  a  peculiar 

kind,  of  which  the  acid  radical  is  the  group  Ft™    3  and 

the  basic  radical  the  potassium. 

The  final  term  of  the  series  is  the  compound 
PtCl2-f2KCl, 

the  addition  product  formed  by  platinous  chloride  and 
potassium  chloride.  This  salt,  again,  has  not  the  properties 


190  APPENDIX 

which  the  above  formula  assigns  to  it,  th&  molecular 
conductivity  proving  beyond  doubt  that  we  have  to  do 
with  a  salt  of  which  the  acid  radical  is  formed  by  the 
group  PtCl4,  the  basic  radicals  being  the  two  potassium 
atoms  ;  the  negative  ion  is  PtCl4,  the  positive  ions  are 
K2,  and  the  rational  formula  is  (PtCl4)K2. 

To  resume.      These  substances  form   the    following 
series  : 

[Pt(NH3)4]Cl2; 


In  this  series  we  observe  that  all  the  compounds 
contain  a  special  radical  (PtA4),  of  which  the  character 
varies  with  the  nature  of  the  groups  A.  In  the  first 
terms  this  radical  has  a  basic  function  ;  in  the  middle  of 
the  series  it  is  neutral,  and  in  the  last  terms  it  has  an  acid 
function.  The  constitution  of  this  radical  PtA4  is  of 
much  interest.  Everything  tends  to  show,  as  we  have 
pointed  out,  that  the  four  groups  A  are  directly  connected 
with  the  platinum  atom.  If  these  four  radicals  are  in 
the  same  plane  with  the  platinum  atom  the  constitution 
of  these  complex  radicals  will  be  represented  by 


Admitting  this  arrangement  of  groups  in  one  plane, 
we  get,  when  two  of  the  radicals  A  are  different  from  the 
other  two,  a  case  of  geometrical  isomerism  expressed  by 
the  formulae  : 


We  must  refer  to  these  theoretical  formulae  certain  cases 
of  isomerism  observed  among  the  compounds  of  platinum. 


One   of   the    most    characteristic    examples    is    the 

V 

isomerism  of  the  salts  of  platosemidiammine, 


•jr 

with  the  salts  of  platosammine,  Pt  /-J  TT  \  . 

ViN±13J2 

The  two  series  of  compounds  correspond  to  the  same 
formula,'  PtL      3'?,  and  we  can  explain  their  isomerism 

A2 

only  by  the  stereochemical  formulae, 
and 


We  can  even  allot  the  proper  formula  to  each  of  the  two 
series. 

Let  us  assume  that,  say,  the  first  formula  represents 
the  compounds  of  platosemidiammine,  the  second  formula 
the  compounds  of  platosammine, 

01>PWNH3  C1>Pt<;NH= 

Cl>Pt<NH3  NH^    t<:Cl 

Chloride  of  platosemidiammine        Chloride  of  platosammine 

then   the   analogous    compounds    formed    by   platinous 
chloride  with  pyridine  will  have  the  formulas  : 


ClPy  Py 

By  treating  the  chloride  of  platosemidiammine  with 
pyridine,   and  the  chloride  of  platosemidipyridine  with 

ammonia,  we  obtain  the  same  compound,    Ptjp      3^2  C12, 
which  we  shall  call  a  and  which  is  formed  thus  : 


L2 

•a 


Similarly,    by   treating   the    chloride    of    platosammine 
with  pyridine,  and    the   chloride  of  platopyridine  with 


192  APPENDIX 

ammonia,  we  obtain  a  compound,    P^p    3'2  C12,    differ- 

ing from  a,  and  which  we  shall  call  (3  ;    this  is  stereo- 
meric  with  a. 

It  is  formed  thus  : 


NHCl 


<       4-m-FM  - 

PyCl  H3)2-        Py 

On  warming  the  compounds  a  and  /3  they  lose  ammonia 
and  pyridine  and  change  into  compounds  of  the  platos- 
ammine  series,  that  is,  into  bodies  corresponding  to  the 
general  formula  : 


On  considering  the  formulae  of  a  and  /3,  it  will  readily 
be  seen  that  the  substance  «  will  undergo  such  a  trans- 
formation, on  losing  a  molecule  of  ammonia  and  a  mole- 
cule of  pyridine  according  to  the  equation  : 

FNH3    p      Py-|cl        NH3     NH3     p      Cl 
[NH3>It<PyJU2  ~  Py  cP      <Py 

The  compound  a  should  yield,  then,  in  this  reaction  a 

?y 

substance,  Pt.NH3 

C12 

The  compound  /?,  on  the  other  hand,  could  undergo 
the  transformation  into  salts  of  the  platosammine  series 
in  two  different  ways,  either  by  losing  two  molecules  of 
ammonia,  or  by  losing  two  molecules  of  pyridine,  as 
shown  by  the  following  equations  : 


APPENDIX  193 

On  warming  /?,  then,  we  should  obtain  a  mixture  of  two 
substances,         A  >  Pt  <  MTr    and 


These  reactions,  which  may  be  deduced  from  the 
stereochemical  formulae  of  the  compounds  of  platosam- 
mine  and  of  platosemidiammine,  are  in  fact  those  which 
occur  on  warming  the  substances  «  and  /?,  of  which  the 
formulae  are  thus  settled. 

It  can  be  shown  that  if  we  give  to  the  platosammine 

A  X 

salts  the  formula  ^>Pt<y,  and  to  the  platosemidiam- 

X  A 

mine  salts  the  formula  ^  >  Pt  <  -^-  ,  we  shall  arrive  at  con- 

clusions which  are  no  longer  in  accord  with  the  facts. 
For,  on  adding  to  platosammine  chloride, 

Cl  NH 


two  molecules  of  pyridine,  and  to  platopyridine  chloride, 
™>Pt  <p^»  two  molecules  of  ammonia,  we  should  get  a 

compound     -^  g3  >  Pt  <  p^  C12  ;  but  this  compound  could 

change  into  salts  of  the  platosammine  series  in  three 
different  ways  :  first,  by  losing  two  molecules  of  ammonia  ; 
second,  by  losing  two  molecules  of  pyridine  ;  third,  by 
losing  one  molecule  of  ammonia  and  one  molecule  of 
pyridine  ;  we  should  obtain,  then,  a  mixture  of  the  .three 

Pv 

substances,  Pt  ^2,  Pt^H^2,  Pt.NH3.  Now,  this  has  never 
A2  A2  Xa 

been  observed  in  a  single  case,  even  when  the  amines  of 

a-2 
the  compound.  Ptb2  are  quite  analogous  in  character,  e.g. 

X2 
ethylamine  and  propylamine. 


194  APPENDIX 

The  two  isomeric  series  must,  then,  correspond  with 
the  following  formulae  : 

X  ^  Pf  ^  A 
x>Pt<A 

Salts  of  platosemidiamraine  Salts  of  platosammine 

The  number  of  stereomeric  compounds  of  dyad 
platinum  is  already  considerable.  A  special  interest 
attaches  to  the  compounds  of  sulphurous  acid,  having  the 
formulae  : 

Cl  NH3  d  Cl^          NH3 


and  to  the  compounds 

H03S     p      NH3  d      HO.,S     p      NH3 

H03S>I    <NH3  NH3>    t<:S03H 

The  substances  thus  far  considered  contain  a  radical 
MA4.  There  exists  also  a  large  number  of  inorganic  com- 
pounds whose  molecules  are  characterised  by  the  pre- 
sence of  a  radical  MA6,  and  which  may  be  arranged  in 
series  having  characters  analogous  to  those  which  we 
have  developed  in  detail  for  dyad  platinum. 

To  give  an  idea  of  these  series,  here  are  the  formulae 
of  the  compounds  of  tetrad  platinum  and  of  dyad  cobalt  : 


[Pt(NH3)6]Cl4, 

[Pt$H3),]C1' 

[PtCl6]K2  Co(NH3)6Cl3, 

2)2-|n       rr(N02) 

(NH3)4JC1'         L     (NH4)3-  (NH3)2 


2)  [Co(N02)6]K3.. 
Just  as  in  the  radicals    MA.,  the  four  groups  A  are 


APPENDIX 


195 


directly  connected  with  the  atom  of  the  metal,  so  in  the 
compounds  containing  the  complex  radical  MA6  the  six 
groups  are  in  direct  union  with  the  metal ;  the  proof  is 
afforded  by  the  amount  of  the  molecular  conductivity. 

We  have  now  to  get  an  idea  of  the  configuration  of 
these  groups  MAG ;  the  most  simple  hypothesis  that  can 
be  formulated  is  an  octahedral  arrangement ;  the  metallic 
atom  occupying  the  centre  of  the  octahedron,  the  six 
groups  A  will  have  their  places  at  the  corners. 

It  is  evident  that  this  arrangement  should  give  rise  to 
certain  cases  of  stereomerism,  of  which  we  shall  consider 
at  present  only  one,  which  experiment  confirms. 

Let  us  consider  a  radical  MA6  of  which  four  groups 
are  alike  and  the  two  others  different  :  we  have  then  a 

group     M  *  /     .       In  this  case  the  two  radicals  A'  may 

occupy  different  positions ;  they  may  occupy  two  corners 
of  the  octahedron  joined  by  an  axis,  or  two  corners 
joined  by  an  edge,  as  the  following  figures  show  : 


that  is  to  say  that  the  compounds  containing  a  radical 
M  A  j     ,  should  present  two  isomeric  forms. 

The  radical     M^/       is  found  in  certain  ammoniacal 


196 


APPENDIX 


derivatives  of  cobalt,  salts  of  praseocobaltammine, 
answering  to  the  general  formula  CO/-NTTT  \  X  ;  these 

salts  should,  then,  if  our  theory  is  correct,  present  a 
special  isomerism.  And,  as  a  matter  of  fact,  this  is  what 
we  find.  We  know  by  the  beautiful  researches  of  Jorgen- 
sen  that  there  exist  two  series  of  salts  of  the  formula 

The    two    series     scarcely  differ,    from    a 

chemical  point  of  view  ;  of  the  three  acid  radicals,  only 
one  acts  as  an  ion.  But  the  two  series  are  distinguished 
by  a  characteristic  property  ;  the  salts  of  the  praseo- 
cobaltammine series  are  green,  while  the  salts  of  the 
isomeric  series,  the  salts  of  the  violeocobaltammines,  are 
violet,  as  their  name  indicates  (see  figs.  22  and  23). 


1TH 


This  interesting   case  of  isomerism  is  a  first  proof  in 


favour  of  the  stereomerism  of  the  radicals 


Mt: 


another  series,  also,  cobalt  presents  this  special  isomerism. 
For  a  long  time  there  has  been  known  a  group  of  salts  of 
cobaltammine,  called  salts  of  croceocobaltammine,  and 


answering  to  the  formula    Co^H)     X  ;  these  also,  then, 


APPENDIX  197 

contain  a  radical  M  ^ 2  .  Quite  recently  Jorgensen 
has  discovered  a  new  series  of  compounds  having  the 
same  formula,  ^°(jirf)  r^'  an(^  Differing  fr°m  the 

first  only  in  physical  properties.  He  calls  them  salts  of 
flaveocobaltammine,  and  it  is  impossible  to  doubt  that 
this  isomerism  of  the  two  series  arises  from  the  presence 

of  two   isomeric   radicals,    ^o/-^-g-2y     .     To   represent 

the  positions  occupied  by  the  two  NO2  groups,  one  may 
imagine  the  following  formulae  : 


Among  the  ammoniacal  derivatives  of  tetrad  platinum 
we  find  a  case  of  isomerism  perfectly  analogous  to  those 
observed  among  the  cobalt  compounds. 

We  know,  in  fact,  two  series  of  bodies  answering  to 

the  general  formula  Pt'  v  ;  they  are  the  salts  of 
platinosemidiammine  and  the  salts  of  platinammine  ;  here 
again,  then,  we  encounter  the  radical  M^  . 

Here,  too,  the  isomerism  is  doubtless  due  to  the 
same  cause  as  with  the  cobalt  compounds,  and  would  be 
represented  by  the  following  formulae : 


198 


APPENDIX 


We  can  even  determine,  with  a  certain  degree  of  proba- 
bility, the  space  formula  corresponding  to  each  of  the  two 
series. 

The  compounds  of  the  platinosemidiammine  series 
and  of  the  platinammine  series  are  formed  by  the  addition 
of  two  negative  groups  to  the  salts  of  platosemidiammine 
and  of  platosammine;  the  dyad  platinum  transforming 
itself  into  tetrad  platinum  : 


For  the  compounds  of  bivalent  platinum  WQ  have 
arrived  at  plane  formulae ;  for  those  of  tetravalent  platinum 
wre  have  given  octahedral  formulae.  The  most  simple 
hypothesis  is,  then,  that  the  negative  groups  add  them- 
selves to  the  salts  of  divalent  platinum,  so  as  to  occupy  two 
corners  united  by  the  diagonal  of  an  octahedron,  which 
is  formed  by  the  four  radicals  joined  to  the  platinum,  and 


APPENDIX  199 

by  the  two  added  radicals  which  complete  the  mole- 
cule. 

This  transformation  is  explained  by  the  above  formulae, 
which  also  give  us  the  stereochemical  formulae  of  the  two 
isomeric  series. 

In  the  short  sketch  here  given  of  the  stereochemical 
isomerism  of  certain  classes  of  inorganic  compounds 
we  have  been  able  to  consider  only  the  principal  points 
of  the  new  theory  ;  we  believe,  however,  that  we  have 
proved,  by  well-established  facts,  that  it  is  possible  to 
explain  these  cases  of  isomerism  only  by  stereochemical 
conceptions. 


BlBLIOGEAPHY 

A.  Werner,  '  Contribution  to  the  Constitution  of  Inorganic  Com- 
pounds,' Zcitsclir.  f.  anorg.  Chcm.  3,  267. 

A.  Werner  and  A.  Miolati,  Zeitschr.  f.  pliysik.  Chem.  12,  35  ; 
13,  506. 


INDEX 


ACETYLMALIC  ACID,  117,  138,  157 

Acetylene    dicarboxylic     acid,     on 

addition   of    bromine    yields   di- 

bromomalei'c  acid,  106 
o-Acrose,    divided     by    means    of 

yeast,  32 

Acrylic  acid  series,  101 
Active   derivatives  formed  by  the 

action   of    hydrochloric  acid  on 

albuminoids,  48 

—  substances,  list,  14 

Activity,     disappearance      of,     in 
derivatives,  21 

—  in    which   compounds   it   is   re- 

tained, 21 

—  optical,  9, 10 

—  prediction  of,  confirmed,  19 

—  refutation  of  supposed,  20 

—  what  is  a  sufficient  cause  for,  23, 

25 
Addition,    mechanism    of,    in    the 

formation  and  transformation  of 

isomei's,  105 
Adonite,  79,  86 
Alanine,  no  rotation  as  yet  observed, 

163 
Aldehyde  ammonia,  25 

—  thio  derivatives  of  acetyl-,  &c., 

117 

Aldoximes,  stereomeric,  172 
Alkaloids  exhibit  the  highest  known 

optical  rotation,  159 
Allyl  alcohol,  inactivity,  95 
Allylene  type,  second  case  of  optical 

activity,  103 

Amido  acids,  slight  activity,  163 
Ammonium  bimalate,  11,  52 

—  chlorides,   substituted,    inactive 

(except  methylethylpropyliso- 
butyl),  181 


Ammonium  chlorides,  trimethyliso- 
butyl,  two  isomers,  180 

—  —  methyldiethylisoamyl,       two 

isomers,  181 

—  compounds,  substituted,  stereo- 

merism  of,  180 
Ammoniums,    substituted,    stereo- 

merism  of  salts  of,  180 
Amyl  alcohol,  16,  31 
active  rotation  of  derivatives, 

Guye's  theory,  156 
chloride  of  secondary,  active, 

24 

iodide  of  secondary,  active,  24 

secondary,  20 

—  alcohols,  inactive,  obtained  from 

active  carbohydrate  by  fermen- 
tation, 23 

—  chloride,  16 

Amyl  hydride,  found  to  be  inactive, 
21 

—  iodide,  16 

Amylmalic  acids,  preparation  of 
four,  57 

Amyl  series,  activity  among  mem- 
bers, 21 

Amylene,  found  to  be  inactive,  21 

Anethol,  101 

Angelic  acid,  101 

Anil  compounds,  173 

Apiol,  111 

Apocinchonine,  specific  rotation, 
137 

—  hydrochlorate,  specific  rotation, 

101 
Arabinose,  85,  86 

—  r-  and  1-,  64 

—  multi-rotation,  149 

Arabite,  its  strikingly  small  rotation, 
162 


202 


INDEX 


Arabonic  acid,  64 

—  its  rotation  and  that  of  its 

lactone,  148 
-  —  conversion  into  ribonic  acid, 

73 

Asparagine,  poisoning  power  of  r- 
and  1-,  12 

—  inactive,  doubling  by  crystallisa- 

tion, 39 

Aspartic  acid,  15,  22,  32,  47 
inactive,  obtained  by  mixing 

the  dextro-  and  lasvo-rotatory, 

53 

—  rotation,  163 
Astracanite,    formation    from    the 

simple  salts,  39 

Asymmetric    carbon,   character    of 
the  isomerism  due  to  the,  9     . 

—  conditions  of  formation  of  com- 

pounds, 45 

Asymmetry,  manifested  in  chemi- 
cal, crystallographical,  physical, 
and  physiological  properties,  10, 

Atropine,  its  activity,  73 

—  contains  at  least  two  asymmetric 

carbon  atoms,  61 

—  its  modifications,  61 
Atrophies,  dextro-    and   laavo-rota- 

tory,  61 


BENZALLEVTJLIC  acid,  102 
Benzene,  configuration,  1,  128 

—  derivates,  127 

—  its   acetylene  nature,   hence   no 

prospect  of  stereomers,  127 

—  the  problem  of  the  relative  posi- 

tion of  the  six  carbon  atoms  is 
not  yet  completely  solved,  128 

—  stability  of,  accounted  for,  132 
Benzildioximes,    configurations    of 

the  three  isomers,  179 

Benzoin,  hydi'o-  and  isohydro-,  their 
constitution,  77 

Benzylmalimide,  two  isomers,  177 

Bi-  and  isobi-desyl,  constitution,  77 

Bi-rotation,  148 

Boiling  point,  of  racemic  com- 
pounds, 43 

Boric  acid,  effect  on  rotation  of 
polyatomic  alcohols,  151 

Borneol  as  example  of  a  transforma- 
tion caused  by  changing  one  of 
the  asymmetric  atoms,  72,  74 


Borneol,  rotation    in   benzene   and 

in  alcohol,  153 

Borneols,  four  active,  and  their  de- 
rivates   prepared     by     reducing 
camphor,  58,  59 
Brassic  acid,  101 
j8-Bromacrylic  acid,  101 
Bromethylenes,  Paterno's  explana- 
tion of  their  isomerism,  1 
Bromine,  addition  of,  to  cinnamic 
acid,  giving  an  example  of  race- 
mic compound   containing  two 
asymmetric  atoms,  68 

—  addition  products  (of  crotonic  and 

iso-crotonic  acids,  hypogeeic  and 
gaidic   acids,  oleic  and  elaidic 
acids,  erucic  and  brassic  acids, 
mesaconic  and  citraconic  acids), 
as  examples  of   racemic   com- 
pounds as  yet  undivided,  69 
Bromnitroethane,  25 
Bromobenzene,  inactive,  converted 
in      the    animal    organism    into 
active     bromophenylmercapturic 
acid,  45 

Bromocinnamic  acid  from  cinnamic 
acid  dibromide,  96 

—  inactivity  of,  3,  96 

a-  and  ^-Bromocinnamic  acids,  101 

a-  and  |8-Bromocrotonic,  and  brom- 
isocrotonic  acids,  101 

Bromoglycollic  acid,  25 

Bromomalic  acid,  24 

Bromomethacrylic  acid,  101 

Bromophenylcystine,  18 
j    Bromopheiiyl-lactic    acid,    division 
of,   as  example    of    division  of  a 
compound  containing  two  asym- 
metric carbon  atoms,  69 
I    Bromopropionic  acid,  24 

Bromopseudobutylene,  100 

Bromosuccinic  acid,  24 

—  formation  from  malic  acid,  24 

—  from  malic  acid,  inactivity,  49 
Butyl  alcohol,  14 

—  secondary,  division,  31 

—  alcohols,     inactive,      obtained 

from   active  carbohydrate  by 
fermentation,  23 
Butylene  glycol,  division.  31 


CAMPHOK,  19 

—  modifications,    two      camphoric 
acids  coiresponding  to  each,  66 


INDEX 


208 


Camphor      series,      synthesis      of 
racemic  bodies,  40 

—  yields  two  isomeric  borneols,  6C> 
Camphoric  acid,  60,  102 

anhydride  of  the  active,  49 

—  specific  rotation,  139 

—  acids,  GO,  0(5 
Carbazides,  174 
Carbodi-imides,  probably  not  stereo- 

ineric,  175 

Carbohydrates,   formed   by   plants 
from  inactive  material,  45 

—  conspectus,  91 

Carbon  atom,  asymmetric,  represen- 
tation by  models,  8 

—  atoms,  graphic  representation  of 

several  connected,  54 

asymmetric,  formation  of  iso- 

mers  containing  several,  65 

—  doubly  linked,  99 

—  graphic  representation,  98 

—  prediction  of  isomerism, 

99 

Carboxyls,  proof  of  their  neighbour- 
ing position,  113 

Carvol,  19 

Catalytic  influence,  bringing  about 
inactivity,  48 

Catalysis,  racemising  by,  48 

Chitamic  acid,  163 

Chloral  alcoholate,  25 

—  bornylates,    prepared     in    four 

modifications,  63 

—  hydrocyanide,  25 

—  sulphydrate,  25 
Chlorethylidene  oxide,  26 
Chlorobromomethanesulphonic 

acid,  25 

a-Chlorocinnamic  acid,  102 
a-  and  j8-Chlorocrotonic  and  chlori- 

socrotonic  acids,  100 
Chlorofumaric  acid,  20,  96 

obtained  by  treatment  of  tar- 

taric  acid  with  PCI,-,,  22 
Chloromalei'c  acid,  20,  96 
Chloromalic  acid,  24 
Chloroplatinates     of      substituted 

ammoniums,  isomeric,  180 
Chloropropionic  acid,  24 
Chlorosuccinic  acid,  15,  22,  48,  96 
Cholalic  acid,  specific  rotation,  139 
rhmamic  acid,  101 

—  addition  of  bromine  to,  68 
dibromide,  68 

division,  25 


Cinnamic  acid,  dichloride,  25 

—  series,  101 
Cinchonicine,  rotatory  power  an 

constitution,  71 

Cinchonidine,  rotation  in  alcoho 
and  in  aqueous  solution,  141 

—  rotatory  power  and  constitution, 

71 

—  specific  rotation,  137 
Cinchonine,     rotation   in  alcoholic 

and  in  aqueous  solution,  141 

—  rotatory  power  and  constitution, 

71 

—  equal   rotation   of   the  sulphate 

and  selenate  not  due  to  their 
isomorphism,  136 

—  specific  rotation,  137 

Cis  and  trans  isomerism,  125 

Citraconic  acid,  94,  102 

Citric  acid,  23 

Cobalt,  ammoniacal  compounds  of, 

186,  196 
Cocaine,  61 

Codeine,  specific  rotation,  137 
Conductivity,  electric,  of  ammonia- 
cal compounds  of  cobalt,  186 

—  of  ammoniacal  compounds  of 

platinum,  188 

—  of  racemic  compounds,  44 
Configuration,  favoured,  55 
Configurations,    determination    of, 

in  the  sugar  group,  81 
Coniferyl    alcohol,    from    inactive 

.  coniferine,  inactive,  96 
Conine,  17,  30 

—  conversion      into     an     isomer, 

177 

—  r-malate  of  r-  and  1-,  66 
Conquinamine,    rotation    in    alco- 
holic and  in  aqueous  solution, 
141 

—  specific  rotation,  137 
Conversion,     mutual,     of      active 

bodies,  47 
i    Copellidine,  18,  30 

Croceocobaltammine,  salts  of,  196 
Crotonchloral,    gives  with  amides 

two  isomer s,  69 
Crotonic  acid,  22,  95,  96 
Crotonylene  bromide,  100 
Cumarine,  inactive,  127 
Cumaric  acid,  102 
Cystin,  165 
Cystine,  14 

—  derivatives,  rotation,  165 


204 


INDEX 


DEXTROSE,  multirotation,  149, 10. r> 

Diacetyltartaric  acid  and  anhydride, 
150 

methylic  ester,  rotation, 

157 

a-7-Diacipiperazines,  119 

Di-allyl,  isomeric  bromides,  78 

Diazotates,  175 

Dibromocinnamic  acid,  48,  101 

Dibromoshikimic  acid,  151 

Dibutyryltartaric  acid,  propylic  es- 
ter, rotation,  157 

Dichlorosuccinic  acid,  as  an  ex- 
ample of  isomerisation  on  bring- 
ing halogens  into  union  with  the 
asymmetric  carbon  atom,  24, 
49 

Diethylic  dipropionyl  tartrate,  ro- 
tation, 157 

Dihydrobenzene  derivatives,  120 

Dihydroterephthalic  acids,  127 

Dilatometer,  30 

Dimethyladipic  acids,  78 

Dimethyldioxyadipic  acids,  two 
modifications,  77 

Dimethyldioxyglutaric  acid,  78 

Dimethylene,  ease  with  which  it  is 
saturated,  131 

Dimethyl-fumaric  and  -malei'c 
acids,  102 

Diphenyl-fumaric  and  -malei'c 
acids,  102 

Dimethylglutaric  acid,  78 

Dimethylic  diacetyl  tartrate,  rota- 
tion, 157 

Dimethylmalei'c  acid,  102 

Dimethyltricarballylic  acids,  three 
inactive,  79 

o-Dinitrostilbene,  101 

Di-oximes,  isomeric,  173 

Dipentene,  47,  08 

Diphenyldiethylenediamine,  30 

Diphenylfumaric  acid,  102 

Diphenylmalei'c  acid,  102 

Dipropionyltartaric  acid,  ethylic 
ester,  rotation,  157 

Dipropylic  dibutyryl  tartrate,  ro- 
tation, 157 

Dissociation  by  heat,  theory  of 
universal,  0 

—  constants  of  fumaric  and  malei'c 

acids,  113 

—  electrolytic,  130,  138 

—  its  bearing  on  the  theory  of 
rotation,  130, 145 


Ditoluyltartaric   acid,   rotation    of 

esters,  155 

Divisibility  of  racemic  compounds, 
by  active  compounds,  28 

—  by  organisms,  30 
by  synthesis,  40 

—  spontaneous,  34 
Division  into  optical  isomers,  vain 

attempts,  21,  40,  77,  127,  170,  181 
Double   linkage   of   carbon   atoms, 

nature  of,  97 
—  molecules,  liquids  composed  of, 

134,  135 

Dulcite,  inactive  indivisible,  89 
Dynamic  hypothesis,  112 


ECGOXIXE,  01 

—  1-,  transformation  into  r-,  73 

—  1-  and  r-  yield  the   same  active 

anhydrecgonine  and  the  same 
ecgonic  and  tropic  acids,  08 
Elaidic  acid,  101 

Electrolytes,  rotatory  power,  130 
Electrolytic  dissociation,  180 

—  and  rotatory  power,  130,  138 
Enantiomorphism    of    optical    iso- 
mers, 11 

—  causing  opposite  activity,  10 
Equilibrium    between    active    iso- 

mers,  conditions  of,  49 
Erucic  acid,  101 
Erythrene  bromide,  70 
Erythrite,  74 
Ethoxysuccinic  acid,  15,  29,  32 

rotation  of  salts,  138 

Ethyl    alcohol,   inactive,   obtained 

by    fermentation    from    active 

carbohydrate,  23 

—  amyl,  17 

—  cumaric  acid,  102 

Ethylene  derivatives,  inactivity  of, 

90 
plane     or    three-dimensional 

configuration  of,  82 
Ethylidene  anilines,  173 

—  chlorosulphinic  acid,  20 

—  iodobromide,  25 

—  lactic    acid,  14 

—  methethylate,  20 
Ethylmalic  acid,  rotation,  157 

—  obtained  by  heating  fumaric 

and  malei'c  acids  with  sodium 
ethylate,  53 
a-Ethyl  piperidine,  17,  30 


INDEX 


205 


FAVOUKED  configuration,  55 
Formylthymotic  acid,  127 
Fumaric  acid,  96 

—  inactivity  of,  3 
indivisibility,  46 

—  series,  102 
Furfuracrylic  acid,  101 
Furfurol,  from  active  arabinose  or 

xylose,  is  inactive,  22,  96 


GAIDIC  acid,  101 
Galactonic  acid,  29,  65,  89 

rotation  compared   with   the 

lactone,  147,  149,  164 

from  mucic  acid,  divisible,  53 

converted   into   talonic   acid, 

73 
Galactose,  89 

—  multi-rotation,  149,  165 

a-     and     /3-Glucoheptonic      acids, 
formed  from  glucose,  67 
—  rotation,  164 

—  acid,    rotation    compared    with 

that  of  the  lactone,  148 
a-Gluco-heptose,  rotation,  165 
Gluconic  acid,  64 

its  rotation    compared   with 

the  lactone,  147,  164  «* 
1-Gluconic    acid,    formed     with    1- 
mannonic    acid  from    arabinose, 
67 

Gluco-octonic  acid,  rotation,  164 
a-  and  )8- Gluco-octonic  acids,  formed 
from  heptose,  67 

transformation  of  a-  into  j8-, 

73 

o-Gluco-octose,  rotation,  165 
Glucose,  64 

—  gives  two  isomeric  glucoheptonic 

acids,  67 

—  converted  into  levulose,  92 

—  multi-rotation,  149 
o-Glucosectite,  rotation,  161 
Glucoses,  isomeric,  64,  82,  87,  165 
Glutamine,  rotation,  163 
Glutamic  acid,  17,  32,  163 

-  —  formed       on      heating       al- 
buminoids with  baryta,  48 
Glutaric  acid,  type  78 
—  acids,  the  two  isomeric  dimethyl- 
and  dimethyldoxy-,  78 

methylethyl-     and     methyl- 

propyl,  two  modifications,  78 
Glyceric  acid,  14,  31 


Glyceric   acid,  change   in  rotation, 

146 
—  specific  rotation,  138,  139 

esters   rotation,  as   evidence 

for  Guye's  hypothesis,  158 
Glycols,    substituted,     two     modi- 
fications, 69 
Gulonic  acid,  1-  and  r-,  65 

lactone,  division,  39 

rotation,  compared  with  that 

of  the  lactone,  148 
Gulose,  configuration,  88 
—  1-  and  r-,  64 


HALOGEN,  derivatives  containing 
asymmetric  carbon,  active,  24 

inactive,  25 

Halogens,  attached  to  the  asym- 
metric carbon  atom  cause  isomer- 
isation,  24,  49 

Hexabromobenzenes,  isomeric,  123 

Hexachlorbenzenes,  isomeric,  123 

Hexahydrophthalic  acids,  two 
modifications,  121 

Hexaisophthalic  acids,  two  modifi- 
cations, 122 

Hexahydroterephthalic  acids,  two 
modifications,  121 

Hexamethylene  derivatives,  120 

activity  among,  123 

Hexyl  alcohol,  17 

secondary,  17,  31 

chloride,  24 

iodide,  24 

—  chloride,  17 

—  iodide,  17 
Hexylic  acid,  17 
Homoaspartic  acid,  division,  39 
Homometa-oxybenzoic    acid,   indi- 
visible, 46 

/3-o-Homomethoxybenzoic  acid, 

visible,  127 

Homosalicylic  acid,  indivisible,  46 
Hydrazones,  isomeric,  174 
Hydrobenzoi'n,  77 
Hydrochlorapocinchonine,    specific 

rotation,  137 

Hydrogen,  silver  fulminate,  25 
Hydromellithic  acid,  and  iso-,  122 
Hydronaphthalenediamine,  20 
Hydropiperic  acid,  a-  and  /3->  102 
Hydroshikimic  acid,  123 
Hydrosorbic  acid,,  101 
Hydroterephthalic  acids,  121 


206 


INDEX 


Hyoscyamine,       conversion       into 

atropine,  48 

Hypogaeic  acid,  isoniers,  101 
Hyponitrous  acid,  176 


IDOSACCHARIC  acid,  rotation  and 
configuration,  161 

Idose,  64 

Inactive  indivisible  type,  50,  74 

Inactivity  among  compounds  con- 
taining the  asymmetric  carbon 
atom,  27 

—  of    a     body    arising    from     the 

incompatibility  of  its  constitu- 
tion with  rotatory  power, 
23 

Indivisible  inactive  type,  50,  74 
Indivisibility,    in    absence    of    the 

asymmetric  carbon  atom,  46 
Influence,    mutual,    of   the    groups 

forming  a  molecule,  93,  110 
Inorganic  compounds,  stereomerism 

of,  185 
Inosite,  123 

—  its  strong  rotatory  power  caused 

by  ring  formation,  161 

—  indivisibility,  46 

Inosites,   r-    and   1-,   configuration, 

124 

/3-Iodacrylic  acid,  101 
lodohexyl,  49 

—  from  mannite,  24 
Ions,  rotation  of  acid,  140 
Isapiol,  101 
Isocinnamic  acid,  101 
Isocrotonic  acid,  101 
Isodibromosuccinic   acid,   prepared 

from  malei'c  acid  by  addition  of 
bromine,  108 

—  from  malei'c  acid,  converted  into 

racemic  acid,  109 
Isohydrobenzoi'n,  77 
Isohydromellithic  acid,  122 
Isomerism,  due  to  the  asymmetric 
carbon  atom,  character  of,  9 

—  due   to   doubly    linked    carbon, 

character  of,  99 

Isomerisation,  on  attaching  halo- 
gens to  the  asymmetric  carbon, 
24,  49 

Isomers,   number    due    to    several 
asymmetric  carbons,  56 

—  optical  properties  of,  10 
Isopropoxysuccinic  acid,  15 


Isopropylphenylchloracetic       acid, 

24,49 

Isopropylphenylglycollic    acid,    18, 
24,  29 

—  rotation,  159 
Isosaccharinic  acid,  rotation,  164 

KETOXIMEK,  stereomeric,  173 
Kinetics  of  racemising,  49 

LACTIC  acid,  58 

—  division,  29,  31 

—  rotation,  159,  163 

—  alteration  of,  on  dilution, 

144 

—  decrease  on  standing,  146 
Lactid,  14 

—  rotation,  147 
Lactone  formation,  130 

—  and  rotatory  power,  147 
Lactose,  multi-rotation,  149 
Levulose,  configuration,  88 

—  yields  on  reduction  the  isomers 

mannite  and  sorbite,  67 

—  multi-rotation,  149 

—  breaks  up  on  oxidation  into  gly- 

collic  acid  and  inactive  tartaric 

acid,  90 

Leucic  acid,  rotation,  159 
Leucine,  17,  32,  47,  163 

—  inactive,  formed  on  heating  albu- 

minoids with  baryta,  48 
Leucinephthaloylic  acid,  19 
Limonene,  18,  40 

—  iiitrosochloride   and   its   deriva- 

tives, 60,  67 

rotation,  166 

Linkage,  treble,  graphic  representa- 
tion, 104 
Lyxose,  86,  160 
Lyxonic  acid,  87 


MALAMIDK,  16 

Malei'c  acid,  96 

dissociation  constant,  113 

—  easy  conversion  into  fumaric 

acid,  106 

—  proof  of  configuration,  111 
Malic  acid,  15,  22 

acetyl,  and  Guye's  theory,  117, 

157 

and    its    anhydride,    rota- 
tion, 150 


INDEX 


207 


Malic    acid,  acetyl,  salts    of,   their 

equal  rotatory  power,  138 
alteration  of  rotation  on  dilut- 
ing, 145 

rotation  of  salts,  153 

amylic  esters,  preparation  of 

four,  with  two  active  malic 
acids,  and  two  active  amyl 
alcohols,  57 

behaviour   in  solution,   with 

regard  to  rotation,  143 

conductivity     of    active    and 

inactive  the  same,  44 

activity  among  derivatives  of, 

22 

increase  of  Isevo-rotatioii   in 

the  diluted  solution  on 
warming,  144 

inactive,  51 

its   acid    ammonium   salt, 

52 

prepared  by  heating  fumaric 

or  malei'c  acid  with  soda, 
identity  of  this  with  the 
divisible  malic  acid,  52,  53 
remarkable  change  in  its  rota- 
tion on  diluting,  145 

salts  of,  their  equal  rotatory 

power,  139 

Maltose,  multi-rotation,  149 
Mandelic  acid  18,  29,  31 

rotation,  143,  159 

inactive  from   the   r-  and  1- 

modifications,  identical  with 
synthetic,  40 
Mannice  configuration,  88 

—  hexachlorhydrin  of,  25 

—  isomers,  80 

—  rotation,  161 

—  yields  on  oxidation  mannose  and 

levulose,  92 

Mannoheptonic  acid,  rotation,  164 
Mannoheptose,  rotation,  165 
Mannonic  acid,  29,  64 

1-,  formed  from  arabinose,  67 

—  1-  and  r-,  64 
—  rotation,  164 

—  compared  with  that  of  the 

lactone,  147 

Mannononose,  rotation,  165 
Manno-octose,  rotation,  165 
Mannosaccharic  acid,  configuration, 
161 

rotation,  compared  with  that 

of  the  lactone,  147,  164 


Mannose,  configuration,  88 

—  divided,  32 

Mechanism  of  addition  in  forming 
and  transforming  isomers,  105 

Mechanics  of  the  atoms,  5 

Melting  point,  quantitative  expres- 
sion for  lowering  of,  43 

Menthol,  72 

Mesaconic  acid,  95,  102 

(8-Metahomosalicylic    acid,    indivi- 
sible, 127 

Methoxysuccinic  acid,  15 
—  rotation  of  salts,  138 

Methoxytoluylic    acid,    indivisible, 
46,  127 

Methylamyl,  21 

Methylcumaric  acid,  102 

Methyl  coriine,  18 

Methylethylpiperidine  (copellidine), 
18 

Methyl  glucoside,  high  rotation  of, 
151 

—  glucosides  from  glucose,  67 
Methylic  benzoyltartrate,  high  rota- 
tion, 159 

Methylmalic  acid,  16 

formed  by  the  action  of  fungi 

on  citraconic  acid,  95 

—  —  formed   by  heating  fumaric 

and     malei'c     acids     with 
sodium  methylate,  53 
a-Methylpiperidine  (pipecoline),  17 

—  active,     conversion     into     an 

isomer,  177 

j8-Methylpiperidine,  20 
Mica,  active  combinations  of,  11 
Models,  8,  55 

Molecular  dimensions,  equality  of, 
in  optical  isomers,  10 

—  rotation,  133 
Monochloropropylene,  100 
Morphine,  specific  rotation,  137 
Mucic  acid  derivatives,  89 
Multi-rotation,  148 


NICOTINE,  18 

—  specific  rotation,  137 

-  -  acetate,  rotation  in  alcoholic  and 

in  aqueous  solution,  141 
Nitro-camphor  and  derivatives,  ro- 
tation, 167 
Nitrogen,  combined   with    carbon, 

configuration,  178 
—  nitrogen,  179 


208 


INDEX 


Nitrogen   compounds,  stereochem- 
istry of,  169 

—  trivalent,  169 
—  in  rings,  176 

—  pentavalent,  180 

graphic  representation  of 

isomers,  182 

Nitrolepiperidine,  60 

o-  m-  and  p-Nitrophenylcinnamic 
acids,  102 

Nitrosohexahydroquinolic  acid,  divi- 
sion, 30 

Nitrostilbene,  constitution  of  bro- 
mides, 77 

Nitrostyrolene,  101 

Nitrotartaric  acid,  inactivity,  48 

Nitrothymotic  acid,  127 


OBJECTIONS  to  the  representation  of 
benzene  by  tetrahedra,  128 

—  to   the    theory    of   unsaturated 

isomers,  109 
Oleic  acids,  101 

Optical  isomerism   and  the  asym- 
metric carbon  atom,  13 

—  isomers,  properties  of,  10 
Organism,  formation  of  active  com- 
pounds in  the,  65 

Organisms,  division  of  racemic  com- 
pounds by,  30 

—  action    of    modified,    by    trans- 

position of  groups,  32 
Oxalic    acid    formed    from    active 
sugar  or  active  tartaric  acid 
is  inactive,  22 

indivisible,  46 

Oximes,  isomerism  of,  171 
Oxy-acids,  small  rotation  of,  163 
-  • —  change  of  rotation  on  diluting, 
145 

—  high  rotation  on  introducing 

a  benzene  residue,  165 
Oxybutyric  acid,  15,  139,  159 
a-Oxybutyric  acid,  division,  29 
7-Oxybutyric    acid     most    readily 

forms  a  lactone,  130 
Oxyglutaric  acid,  16 

—  rotation,  164 
Oxy-pyroracemic  acid,  20 
Oxy-pyrotartaric  acid,  20 


PAPAVERINE,  20 
Pentose  group,  63,  82,  84 


Pentoses,  rotation,  160 

Perseite,  rotation  remarkably  small, 

161 

Phenose,  125 
Phenoxacrylic  acid,  150 
Phenylamidopropionic  acid,  18,  163 
Phenylamyl,  19 
Phenylbromacetic  acid  from  man- 

delic  acid,  25,  49 
—  from  phenylglycollic  acid,  24 
Phenylbromolactic  acid  29,  150 
Phenylbromomercapturic  acid,  18 
Phenylchloracetic  acid,  24,  25,  49 
Phenylcystine,  18,  163 
Phenyldibromobutyric    acid,    divi- 
sion, 29 

Phenylmercaptan,  22 
Phenyltrimethylenecarboxylic 

acids,  three  isomeric,  115 
Phenylurethane,  rotation  in  various 

solvents,  154 

Phthalylamidocaproic  acid,  19 
Physiological  properties  of  optical 

isomers,  12 

—  different,  of  the  two  optical  iso- 
mers, 12 
j8-Picoline,  20 
Picryl   a-  and  £-naphthyl    hydra- 

zines,  179 

Picrylhydrazines,  isomerism,  179 
Pinenedihydro-chlorides  and  -bro- 
mides, 122 
a-Pipecoline,  17,  30 
Piperidine    monocarboxylic    acids, 

five  isomeric,  176 
Piperylene,   isomeric   bromides  of, 

78 

Platinum,  bivalent,  187 
Platopyridine  chloride,  193 
Platosammine  salts,  188,  191 
Platosemidiammine  salts,  188,  191 
Podocarpic  acid,  specific  rotation, 

139 

Polymethylene  rings,  Baeyer's  hy- 
pothesis, 131 

—  derivatives,  114 
Polymethylenes,   relative  stability, 

131 

Praseocobaltammine,  salts  of,  196 
Product  of  asymmetry,  155 
Projections  of  models,  55 
Propionaldoxime,  171 
Propoxysuccinic  acid,  15 
Propylene  diamine,  14 

—  glycol,  14,  150 


INDEX 


209 


Propylene  oxide,  14,  150 
Propylic  alcohol,  20,  23 
Propylmandelic  acid,  rotation,  165 
a-Propylpiperidine  (conine),  17 
Pyrotartaric  acid,  29 

inactivity,  48 

Pyrrolylene  bromide,    example   of 
inactive  indivisible  type,  76 


QUINAMINE  salts,  rotation  of  al-  j 
coholic  and  aqueous  solutions,  i 
141 

—  specific  rotation,  137 
Quinic  acid,  123 

—  as  an  example  of  constancy    j 

of  rotation  on  dilution,  144 
--  inactive,  divisibility,  44 

—  salts,  rotation  in  alcoholic  and 

in  aqueous  solution,  140,  141 
--  specific  rotation,  139 
Quinicine,  rotatory  power  and  con- 

stitution, 71 

Quinidine,  rotation  in  alcoholic  and  i 
in  aqueous  solution,  141 

—  rotatory    power    and    constitu- 

tion, 71 

—  specific  rotation,  137,  160 
Quinine  group,  transformations  in, 

71 

—  rotatory  power  and  constitution, 

71 

—  specific  rotation,  137 

—  sulphate,   rotation    in   alcoholic 

and  in  aqueous  solution,  141         j 


RACEMATE   of  sodium  and  ammo- 

nium, 34 
—  potassium,  38 
Racemic  acid,  74 

—  division,  29,  81,  74 
—  compounds,  28 
--  characteristics,  41 

--  properties  of,  41 
Racemising  by  heat,  by  catalysis, 

47,  48 

Rhamnonic  acid,  rotation  com- 
pared with  that  of  the  lactone, 
147  • 

Rhamnose,  multi-rotation,  149 
Ribonic  acid,  64,  163,  164 
--  rotation  compared  with  that 

of  the  lactone,  147 
Ribose,  160 


Ring  formation,  stability  of,  129 
connection  with  unsaturated 

isomers    of    malei'c    type, 

118 
influence    on   rotation,   146, 

150,  164 
with  boric  acid  and  hydroxyl 

groups,  151 

—  stability,  129 
Rings,  four  carbon,  118 

—  three  carbon,  114 

—  six  carbon,  120 
Rotation,  free,  55 

cessation   of,   in   the  case  of 

doubly  linked  carbon,  97 

—  optical,  causes  which  influence, 

184 

—  influence     of     concentration, 

142,  156 
influence  of  groups  attached 

to  the  asymmetric  carbon 

atom,  154 
influence   of    group   weights, 

155 

—  influence   of   ring   formation, 

146,  150,  164 

influence  of  solvent,  135 

influence  of  type,  162 

molecular,  133 

raised  by   addition   of    boric 

acid,  161 

—  relative,  of  singly  linked  carbon 

atoms,  54 

Rotatory    power    and    electrolytic 
dissociation,  136,  138 

—  and  lactone  formation,  147 

—  —  of  non-electrolytes,  158 
and  ring  formation,  146 

—  Guye's  hypothesis,  154 
of  electrolytes,  13(5 

—  of      imperfect      electrolytes 

141 

remarkable  cases,  165 

numerical  value  of,  188 

in   relation    to    con- 
stitution, 184 

tables,  187,  139 

variation  with  vary 

ing  conditions,  134 

varying,     of     tartaric      acid 

solutions,  136 


SACCHAUIC  acid,  configuration,  161 
group,  rotation,  160,  164 


210 


INDEX 


Saccharic  acid,   rotation  compared 
with  that  of  t-he  lactone,  147, 164 

type,  70,  79 

Saccharic  acids,  80 
Saccharin,  multi-rotation,  149 
Saccharinic     acid,     rotation     com- 
pared with  that  of  the  lactones, 
147,  164 

Salicylic  aldehyde,  inactive,  127 
Salts    of    active   bases   and   acids, 
rotatory  power,  136,  188 

multivalent       metals        with 

glyceric  acid,  rotation,  138 
—  polyatomic  acids,  ro- 
tation, 152 

Santonine      derivatives,     rotation, 
160,  167 

—  the  highest  known,  159 
Scacchi's  salt,  37 

Scyllite,  125 

Serine,  no  rotation  as  yet  observed, 

163 
Shikimic  acid,  rotation,  constancy 

on  dilution,  145 
— of  derivatives,  166 

—  of  salts,  108,  138 
Sodium  ammonium  racemate,  34 

—  nitro-ethane,  25 

—  potassium  racemate,  38 
Sorbite,  configuration,  88 

—  rotation,  remarkably  small,  162 
Spontaneous    division    of    racemic 

compounds,  34 
Stability,  absolute  criterion  of,  111 

—  of  un  saturated    stereomers,  un- 

equal, 100 

— •  equal,  of  active  isomers,  47 
Strychnine,  specific  rotation,  137 

—  isomorphous  sulphate  and  sele- 

nate,  equal  rotation  of,  136 
Styrolene,  20,  95 
Succinic  acid,  inactive,  22 

—  formed   from    asparagine,    is 

inactive,  22,  23 

—  obtained     by     reduction     of 

malic  acid,  22 

—  acids,  bisubstituted,  obtained  in 

two  modifications,  69,  77 
Sugars,  configuration,  82 

—  conspectus,  91 


TALOMUCIC  acid,  rotation,  161,  164 
—  compared  with  that  of  the 
'  lactone,  147,  164 


I    Talomucic  acid,  configuration,  161 
I    Talonic  acid,  65,  89 

Talose,  89 

Tartar    emetic,    abnormally    large 
rotation  of,  140,  152 

Tartaric  acid,  81 

—  activity  among  derivatives,  21 
conversion  into  racemic  acid 

by  oxide  of  iron  or  of  alu- 
minium, 48 

—  derivatives,  22 

—  esters,   rotation   in    different 

solvents,  154 

—  formation,  from  racemic  acid, 

by  Pasteur,  28 

—  imides,  isomeric,  178 

inactive,   indivisible,    51,   74, 

81 

—  rotation   and    Guye's    hypo- 

thesis, 158 

—  rotation  specific,  139,  142,  164 

-  —  many        circumstances 

affecting,  135,  143 
—  in  tartar  emetic,  140 

—  type,  74 

Temperature,  effect  on  equilibrium, 

50 

—  of     conversion    of    active    sub- 
stances, 35 
Tensimeter,  37 
Terephthalic   acid,    di-    and    tetra- 

hydrides  of,  125 
Terpenes,  122 
(    Terpines,  structure,  122 
Tetrabromobutane,  76 
Tetrahedron  theory,  129 
Tetrahydrobenzene  derivatives,  125 
Tetrahydrobenzoic    acid,   bromides 

of,  122 
Tetrahydronaphthyleiie      diamine, 

19,30 

Tetrahydroterephthalic  acids,  126 
Tetrahydroterpenes,     a-    and     )8- 

structure,  122 

Tetramethylene  derivatives,  118 
I     Tetroses,  82 

Thermodynamics  of  racemising,  49, 

50 

Thiacetones,  polymeric,  configura- 
tion, 116 

Thialdehydes,  polymeric,  configura- 
tion, 116 

Thiobenzylcrotonic  acid,  101 
Thiodilactylic  acids,  two   modifica- 
tions, 77 


INDEX 


211 


£-,  Thio-ethylcrotonic  acid,  101 
$-Thio-phenylcrotonic  acid,  101 
Tiglic  acid,  95,  101 
Tolane  bromides,  100 

—  chlorides,  100 
o-Toluidine,  indivisible,  46,  127 
Treble   linkage   of    carbon    atoms, 

representation  of,  104 
Trimetliylene,  114 
Trimethylene    dicarboxylic     acids, 

isomeric,  115,  117 
Trimethylethylstibine  iodide,  20 
Tri-oxyglutaric  acid,  a  second   in- 
active indivisible  type,  78 
—  rotation,  164 

—  acids,  87 

Trithiodimethylmethylene,  116 
Trithiomethylene,  114 
Tropaic  acid,  18,  159 

rotation,  159 

Tropine,  62 
Truxillic  acids,  118 
Turpentine    yields    two    borneols, 
66 


Tyrosine,  18,  163 

—  inactive,    obtained    on    heating 
albuminoids  with  baryta,  48 

UBAMIDOSUCCINAMIDE,  16 
Uramidosuccinic  acid,  active,  22 

VALEBIC  acid,  16 
-  —  esters,    rotation   and  Guye's 

theory,  158,  159 
Vanilline,  inactive,  127 
Violeocobaltammines,  salts  of,  196 


XYLITE,  79,  86 
Xylonic  acid,  64,  87,  164 

—  rotation  compared  with  that 

of  the  lactone,  147,  164 
Xylose,  86,  160 
—  multi-rotation,  149,  165 


YEAST,  action  on  various  sugars,  32 


Errata. 

Page  52,  line  11  from  top,  for  ammonia  read  ammonium. 
Page  87,  the  formula  of  lyxose  should  be  as  on  page  83. 
Page  95,  line  12  from  bottom,  for  styrol  read  styrolene. 
Page  101,  line  4  from  top,  for  nitrostyrol  read  nitrostyrolene. 
Page   166,  line   3  from  bottom,   for  limonenenitroso   chloride 
limonene  nitrosochloride. 


read 


I'lUNTEj")     HY 

SPOTTWWOOntf    AND    CO.,    XI-.W-SrUEKT    SQUARE 
LOXDOV 


14  DAY 

TJTTTITRN  TO  DESK  FROM   * 

LOAN  DEPT. 


T2003 


-r,T)21  A-60w-3,'70 
(N5382tlO)476-A-32 


General  Library 


LD21-100m-7,'33 


U.  C.  BERKELEY  LIBRARIES